UNM2000

Network Convergence Management

System V2R11

Operation Guide
Version: 01

Code: MN000004543

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

May 2020
Copyright © FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by
any means without prior written permission from FiberHome.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other FiberHome trademarks are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies

Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

General Disclaimer

All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within your purchase
scope or usage scope. In case of inconsistency, the contract shall prevail.

The information in this document may contain predictive statements. Actual results may differ materially from
those expressed or implied in predictive statements due to numerous factors. Therefore, such information is
provided for reference purpose only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice due to upgrade or other needs.

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No.6, Gaoxinsilu, High-Tech Development Zone, Wuhan, Hubei Province, P. R. China
Postcode: 430205
Website: http://www.fiberhome.com
Tel: +86 800-8800787; +86 400-8890787
 Preface

This manual introduces main GUIs and operation precautions and procedures of the
UNM2000.

This manual is intended for network management system engineers, network support
engineers, and maintenance engineers.

Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic interruption or

Caution
loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

Version
Version Description
01 Initial version for the UNM2000 V2R11
Operation Safety Rules

Item Description
Place the UNM2000 computer away from direct sunlight, electromagnetic interference,
heat source, humidity and dust, and with at least 8 cm distance from other objects to keep
good ventilation.

Use UPS power supply for the UNM2000 computer.

Ground the UNM2000 computer case, UPS and switch (or hub).

Use the UNM2000 computer for network management only, and connect reliable memory
devices only.
Dos
To shut down the UNM2000 computer, first exit its operating system normally and then
shut off its power supply.

Assign permissions and passwords by level, and give passwords to responsible OAM
engineers only.

Perform service configuration or expansion through the UNM2000 during off-peak hours.

Manage networks through either the UNM2000 or the CLI system.

Pay attention to system prompts when performing risky operations.

Do not install an operating system incompatible with the UNM2000 version.

Do not install unnecessary or unidentified third-party applications.

Do not modify the system protocol, host name, and IP address without permissions.

Do not enable irrelevant or insecure services.

Do not install non-authorized anti-virus software such as 360.
Don'ts
Do not install databases incompatible with the UNM2000 version.

Do not log into the database using tools and directly add, delete or modify data in the
database.
Do not delete files of the UNM2000 without permissions.

Do not change the license file in any form.

Contents

Preface ................................................................................................................... I

Operation Safety Rules ........................................................................................... III

1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000 .................................................................1

1.1 Login and Logout................................................................................1

1.1.1 Logging into the UNM2000 via Web Browser...........................1

1.1.2 Login by Client.....................................................................3

1.2 Viewing the UNM2000 Version ............................................................4

1.3 GUI Introduction.................................................................................5

1.3.1 System GUI .........................................................................5

1.3.2 Shortcut Icons.......................................................................5
1.3.3 Common Shortcut Keys .........................................................8

1.4 Setting UNM2000 System Parameters....................................................9

1.4.1 Setting Display of the Browse Tree........................................ 10

1.4.2 Setting the Topology Display ................................................ 11
1.4.3 Setting the Font................................................................... 12
1.4.4 Setting the Skin................................................................... 13
1.4.5 Setting the GUI Display ....................................................... 14
1.4.6 Setting the NE Manager ....................................................... 15
1.4.7 Setting Ping Parameters ....................................................... 15
1.4.8 Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server .................................... 16
1.4.9 Setting the Default Opening Page for NE Manager................... 17
1.4.10 Setting the Personalization Switch ......................................... 18
1.4.11 Setting Display of the Performance Value ............................... 19
1.4.12 Setting the Time Mode......................................................... 20
1.4.13 Setting the XFTP Server....................................................... 21
1.4.14 Configuring Automatic Link Setup Between PON NEs ............ 24
1.4.15 Setting Export Files ............................................................. 25
1.4.16 Limiting the Number of ONUs Connected to the PON Port....... 26
1.4.17 Setting the License Expiration Prompt.................................... 27

1.5 Setting the Default Workspace ............................................................ 27

 1.6 Viewing the Machine ID .................................................................... 28

1.7 Updating the License ......................................................................... 29

1.8 Modifying the User Password ............................................................. 30

1.9 Locking the Terminal......................................................................... 31

1.10 Logging Out Users ............................................................................ 31

1.11 Viewing the Message Platform ............................................................ 32

1.12 Managing the Toolbar........................................................................ 33

2 Security Management .................................................................................. 34

2.1 Overview of the UNM2000 User Security ............................................ 34

2.2 Managing User Security Policies ......................................................... 40

2.2.1 Setting the User Login Mode ................................................ 40

2.2.2 Setting the Access Control List ............................................. 41
2.2.3 Setting the Account Policy ................................................... 43
2.2.4 Setting the Password Policy .................................................. 46

2.3 Authority Management ...................................................................... 53

2.3.1 Authority Management Introduction ...................................... 53

2.3.2 Authority Allocation Principle .............................................. 54
2.3.3 Authority Management Scenarios .......................................... 58
2.3.4 Authorization Planning Suggestion ........................................ 60

2.4 Initial User Authorization ................................................................... 62

2.4.1 Flowchart of Creating Users ................................................. 62

2.4.2 Customizing Object Sets ...................................................... 63
2.4.3 Customizing Operation Sets.................................................. 65
2.4.4 Customizing and Authorizing User Groups ............................. 66
2.4.5 Creating and Authorizing Users ............................................ 69

2.5 Migrating Operation Sets ................................................................... 72

2.5.1 Exporting Operation Sets ..................................................... 72

2.5.2 Modifying Operation Sets in Batches ..................................... 72
2.5.3 Importing Operation Sets ..................................................... 73

2.6 Adjusting Users' Authority ................................................................. 73

2.6.1 Adjusting Authority in Case of Network Changes.................... 74

2.6.2 Adjusting Authority in Case of Responsibility Changes ............ 76

2.7 Querying Authority ........................................................................... 77

 2.7.1 Viewing Management Domains of a User or User Group .......... 77
2.7.2 Viewing Operation Authority of a User or User Group ............. 78
2.7.3 Viewing User Groups to Which a User Belongs....................... 79
2.7.4 Viewing Users / User Groups Served by an Operation Set......... 80
2.7.5 Viewing Operations Included in an Operation Set .................... 80
2.7.6 Viewing Objects in an Object Set .......................................... 81

2.8 FAQs on Authorization Operations ...................................................... 82

2.8.1 How to Confirm Users' Authority .......................................... 82

2.8.2 How to Grant a User Authority Beyond Its User Group ............ 83

2.9 Authorization Examples ..................................................................... 84

2.9.1 Authorization Planning Example ........................................... 84

2.9.2 Authorizing Users ............................................................... 95
2.9.3 Adjusting Users' Authority When Management Scope Changes . 98
2.9.4 Adjusting Users' Authority - Operation Authority Changes ..... 100
2.9.5 Adjusting Users' Authority - Position Changes ...................... 101

2.10 User Security Management............................................................... 102

2.10.1 Locking the Terminal......................................................... 102

2.10.2 Logging Out Users ............................................................ 103
2.10.3 Modifying the User Password ............................................. 103
2.10.4 Reminding Users to Modify Password upon Expiration .......... 104
2.10.5 Resetting a User Password.................................................. 105
2.10.6 Managing Security of Service Passwords.............................. 106
2.10.7 Unlocking a UNM2000 User .............................................. 107
2.10.8 Locking a User Group........................................................ 108
2.10.9 Unlocking a User Group .................................................... 109
2.10.10 Monitoring User Sessions................................................... 109
2.10.11 Logging Out Users ............................................................ 110
2.10.12 Sending Messages to Online Users ...................................... 111
2.10.13 Monitoring Users’ Activities............................................... 112

3 Configuration Management ........................................................................ 114

3.1 NE Communication Route Management............................................. 114

3.1.1 NE Management Program .................................................. 114

3.1.2 Partition Policy Management .............................................. 118

3.2 SNMP Parameter Template............................................................... 120

3.2.1 Creating and Using an SNMP Parameter Template................. 120

 3.2.2 Modifying / Deleting an SNMP Parameter Template .............. 123

3.3 ONU Capability Set Template........................................................... 124

3.3.1 Creating an ONU Capability Set Template ............................ 124

3.3.2 Modifying an ONU Capability Set Template ......................... 126

3.4 Managing Global Templates ............................................................. 127

3.4.1 Viewing Global Templates.................................................. 127

3.4.2 Adding a Global Template.................................................. 128
3.4.3 Modifying a Global Template ............................................. 130
3.4.4 Binding / Unbinding a Global Template ............................... 131
3.4.5 Deleting a Global Template ................................................ 133

3.5 Managing Global Configurations....................................................... 134

3.5.1 Viewing the Global Configurations...................................... 135

3.5.2 Adding the Global Configurations ....................................... 135
3.5.3 Modifying the Global Configurations................................... 136
3.5.4 Issuing the Global Configurations to a Device ....................... 137
3.5.5 Deleting the Global Configurations...................................... 138

3.6 Signaling Tracing ............................................................................ 139

3.7 Configuration Synchronization.......................................................... 140

3.8 Network Access Status Management.................................................. 141

3.9 Pinging NEs ................................................................................... 142

3.10 Telneting NEs................................................................................. 142

3.11 WEB Configuration......................................................................... 143

3.12 The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server..................................... 143

3.13 Migrating the PON Configuration...................................................... 144

3.14 Synchronizing the Device Capabilities ............................................... 145

3.15 Synchronizing the Device Version Information.................................... 145

4 Topology Management............................................................................... 147

4.1 Topology Creation Flow................................................................... 147

4.2 Creating a Global Logical Domain..................................................... 148

4.3 Creating NEs .................................................................................. 149

4.3.1 Creating an Access NE ...................................................... 149

4.3.2 Creating a Switch NE ........................................................ 151
4.3.3 Creating Other NEs ........................................................... 153
 4.3.4 Automatic Discovery of NEs .............................................. 155

4.4 Creating Extended Subracks ............................................................. 160

4.5 Adding Cards ................................................................................. 161

4.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically............................................... 162

4.5.2 Adding Cards Manually ..................................................... 163

4.6 Replacing Cards.............................................................................. 163

4.7 Creating a Link ............................................................................... 164

4.8 Editing an NE................................................................................. 165

4.8.1 Setting NE Attributes......................................................... 165

4.8.2 Editing Icons .................................................................... 167
4.8.3 Setting the Displayed Content of the Icon ............................. 167
4.8.4 Tagging an NE.................................................................. 168
4.8.5 Querying a Label .............................................................. 168

4.9 Editing a Fiber Connection ............................................................... 169

4.9.1 Modifying the Connection Line Properties............................ 169

4.9.2 Setting the Display Mode of the Connection Line .................. 170
4.9.3 Viewing Links Between OLT NEs ....................................... 170
4.9.4 Viewing Links Between ONU NEs ...................................... 171

4.10 Browsing the Topology View............................................................ 173

4.10.1 Customizing Views ........................................................... 174

4.10.2 Checking the Physical Topology View ................................. 175
4.10.3 Viewing the Sub-topology View.......................................... 176
4.10.4 Browsing the Bird-eye View ............................................... 179
4.10.5 Viewing Hot-spot Regions.................................................. 179
4.10.6 Searching Objects ............................................................. 181
4.10.7 Setting the Topology.......................................................... 182
4.10.8 Filtering the Topology ....................................................... 183
4.10.9 Sorting the Object Tree ...................................................... 184
4.10.10 Setting the Background Image ............................................ 184

4.11 Deleting the Topology ..................................................................... 185

4.11.1 Deleting a Global Logical Domain....................................... 185

4.11.2 Deleting NEs .................................................................... 186
4.11.3 Deleting Shelves ............................................................... 187
4.11.4 Deleting a Card................................................................. 187
 4.12 Failure Cases .................................................................................. 188

4.12.1 Causing Database Service Crash by Card Upgrade................. 188

5 NE Management ......................................................................................... 189

5.1 NE Manager GUI............................................................................ 189

5.2 Configuring Local Services .............................................................. 190

5.3 Viewing the ONU List ..................................................................... 191

5.4 Managing ONUs............................................................................. 194

5.4.1 Copying / Pasting Port Service Configurations ...................... 194

5.4.2 Deauthorizing ONUs ......................................................... 194
5.4.3 Adding Users ................................................................... 195
5.4.4 Labeling ONUs................................................................. 197
5.4.5 Resetting ONUs................................................................ 197
5.4.6 Adjusting ONU Service Types ............................................ 198
5.4.7 Replacing ONUs............................................................... 198
5.4.8 Querying End-to-End Services ............................................ 199

5.5 Authorizing Cards ........................................................................... 200

5.6 Authorizing ONUs .......................................................................... 201

5.6.1 Configuring the ONU Whitelist........................................... 201

5.6.2 Managing ONU Authentication Modes ................................ 202
5.6.3 Managing PON Port Authentication Modes .......................... 204
5.6.4 Replacing the ONU Logical Identifier .................................. 205
5.6.5 Viewing the Authorized ONU Information............................ 206
5.6.6 Detecting ONUs by PON Port Automatically ........................ 207

5.7 Synchronizing ONUs Manually ........................................................ 208

5.8 Synchronizing ONU Port Description Manually .................................. 208

5.9 Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port ................................................ 209

5.9.1 Viewing Rule Tasks........................................................... 209

5.9.2 Creating Rule Tasks........................................................... 210
5.9.3 Executing Rule Tasks ........................................................ 210

5.10 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs ......................................................... 211

5.11 Manual ONU Authorization.............................................................. 211

5.12 Modifying SVLANs / CVLANs in a Batch Manner ............................. 212

5.13 OTDR Link Management................................................................. 213

 5.14 System Maintenance........................................................................ 215

5.14.1 Upgrading the System Software .......................................... 215

5.14.2 Backing Up the System Software ........................................ 216
5.14.3 Exporting a Configuration File............................................ 217
5.14.4 Importing a Configuration File ............................................ 218
5.14.5 Comparing Configuration Files ........................................... 219
5.14.6 Upgrading an ONU ........................................................... 221

5.15 Operation and Maintenance Management ........................................... 222

5.16 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks.......................................... 222

5.16.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks .............................. 222

5.16.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task ........................... 223

5.17 Configuring NEs in Batches ............................................................. 225

5.17.1 Calibrating Time in Batches................................................ 225

5.17.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches ........................................ 226
5.17.3 Saving Configurations to Flash in Batches ............................ 227

6 Alarm Management .................................................................................... 229

6.1 Basic Concepts ............................................................................... 229

6.2 Setting Remote Notification of Alarms ............................................... 233

6.2.1 Remote Notification Panorama of Alarms............................. 233

6.2.2 Commissioning Alarm Notification by Emails....................... 234
6.2.3 Commissioning Alarm Notification Through the GSM Modem 236
6.2.4 Commissioning Message Notification Through the SMS
Gateway .......................................................................... 239
6.2.5 Setting the Alarm Notification Format.................................. 242
6.2.6 Setting the Sending Delay of the Remote Alarm Notification... 243
6.2.7 Setting Remote Notification Rules of the Alarm .................... 244
6.2.8 Sending Remote Notification of Alarms ............................... 246

6.3 Setting Alarm Rules ........................................................................ 247

6.3.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Rules ....................................... 247

6.3.2 Managing Alarm Shielding Rules ........................................ 250

6.4 Managing the Alarm Project Status.................................................... 256

6.4.1 Managing Project Status Tasks ............................................ 256

6.4.2 Managing Project Status of NEs .......................................... 258

6.5 Setting Alarm Related Parameters...................................................... 258

 6.5.1 Setting the Audible Alarms................................................. 259
6.5.2 Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm.................................. 260
6.5.3 Setting the Alarm Color ..................................................... 260
6.5.4 Setting the Display Modes of New Alarms / Events ............... 261
6.5.5 Setting Other Items of the Local Alarms ............................... 262
6.5.6 Setting the Definition of the Alarm History ........................... 263
6.5.7 Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules .................. 263
6.5.8 Setting Automatic Alarm Synchronization ............................ 265
6.5.9 Converting Events to Alarms .............................................. 266

6.6 Managing Alarm / Event Templates ................................................... 267

6.6.1 Alarm Template ................................................................ 267

6.6.2 Event Template ................................................................. 272

6.7 Managing Alarm Configurations ....................................................... 274

6.7.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Templates ................................. 275

6.7.2 Binding Alarm Reporting Templates .................................... 276

6.8 Synchronizing Alarms ..................................................................... 276

6.8.1 Synchronizing Alarms Manually ......................................... 276

6.8.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches ........................................ 277

6.9 Monitoring Network Alarms............................................................. 279

6.9.1 Viewing Current Alarms .................................................... 279

6.9.2 Viewing Alarm History ...................................................... 282
6.9.3 Viewing Related Alarms .................................................... 284
6.9.4 Viewing Alarm Details....................................................... 285
6.9.5 Viewing Alarm Logs ......................................................... 286
6.9.6 Viewing Alarm Log Statistics ............................................. 289
6.9.7 Viewing Alarm Statistics .................................................... 291
6.9.8 Viewing Reported Alarms .................................................. 293
6.9.9 Querying Reported Events.................................................. 294

6.10 Handling Alarms............................................................................. 296

6.10.1 Confirming Alarms ........................................................... 296

6.10.2 Clearing Alarms Manually.................................................. 298
6.10.3 Confirming and Clearing Alarms......................................... 298
6.10.4 Clearing Alarms From the Device........................................ 299
6.10.5 Disabling the Event-to-Alarm Conversion ............................ 299
6.10.6 Locating Alarms ............................................................... 300
 6.10.7 Shielding Alarms .............................................................. 300
6.10.8 Modifying Alarm Levels .................................................... 301
6.10.9 Editing Alarm Remarks...................................................... 302
6.10.10 Exporting the Alarm Information......................................... 302
6.10.11 Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience................................ 303
6.10.12 Managing Maintenance Experience ..................................... 303

6.11 Customizing Alarms ........................................................................ 304

6.11.1 Customizing Alarm Names................................................. 305

6.11.2 Re-Defining Alarm Names ................................................. 306
6.11.3 Customizing Alarm Levels ................................................. 307
6.11.4 Customizing Special Alarms............................................... 308

6.12 Managing the Alarm / Event Data...................................................... 312

6.12.1 Setting the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving........................... 312

6.12.2 Setting the Manual Alarm / Event Saving ............................. 314

6.13 Gathering Statistics of Device Failures ............................................... 315

7 Performance Management ......................................................................... 317

7.1 Basic Concepts ............................................................................... 317

7.2 Setting Performance-related Parameters.............................................. 318

7.2.1 Setting Display of the Performance Value ............................. 318

7.2.2 Setting the Performance Collection Sever ............................. 319
7.2.3 Setting the PAS Saving ...................................................... 320

7.3 Managing Performance Query Templates ........................................... 321

7.3.1 Viewing Performance Templates ......................................... 321

7.3.2 Creating a Performance Query Template............................... 321
7.3.3 Modifying a Performance Query Template............................ 325

7.4 Managing Performance Configurations .............................................. 325

7.4.1 Managing Performance Threshold Templates ........................ 325

7.4.2 Binding Performance Threshold Templates ........................... 326

7.5 Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a Batch Manner ... 327

7.6 Monitoring Performance Data ........................................................... 328

7.6.1 Viewing Current Performance ............................................. 328

7.6.2 Viewing Performance History ............................................. 330
7.6.3 Viewing the Performance Comparison ................................. 331
7.6.4 Viewing Real-Time Performance ......................................... 332
 7.6.5 Viewing the Performance History Trend ............................... 334

7.7 Managing Performance Collection..................................................... 335

7.7.1 Managing Performance Indicator Sets .................................. 335

7.7.2 Managing Performance Threshold Sets................................. 337
7.7.3 Managing Performance Collection Tasks .............................. 340

7.8 Managing Performance Data............................................................. 344

7.8.1 Analysis of PON traffic statistics ......................................... 345

7.8.2 Enabling / disabling FTP Report.......................................... 345
7.8.3 Top Ranking Statistics ....................................................... 347

7.9 Managing Statistics Export Tasks ...................................................... 348

7.9.1 Traffic Analysis Export Tasks ............................................. 348

7.9.2 TopN Traffic Ranking Export Tasks..................................... 349
7.9.3 15-Minute Performance Export Tasks .................................. 350
7.9.4 Export Tasks of Equipment Traffic and 15-Minute Performance of
Health Degree................................................................... 351
7.9.5 Optical Module Information Export Tasks ............................ 352

8 Log Management ....................................................................................... 354

8.1 Log Management Policy .................................................................. 354

8.2 Log Type ....................................................................................... 355

8.2.1 System Logs..................................................................... 355

8.2.2 Operation Logs ................................................................. 356
8.2.3 Security Logs ................................................................... 357
8.2.4 Northbound Interface Command Logs.................................. 358

8.3 Log Statistics.................................................................................. 361

8.4 Managing System Logs.................................................................... 363

8.4.1 Managing System Log Templates ........................................ 363

8.4.2 Querying System Logs....................................................... 364

8.5 Managing Operation Logs ................................................................ 366

8.5.1 Managing Operation Log Templates .................................... 366

8.5.2 Querying Operation Logs ................................................... 368

8.6 Managing Security Logs .................................................................. 371

8.6.1 Managing Security Log Templates....................................... 371

8.6.2 Querying Security Logs ..................................................... 373
 8.7 Managing Northbound Interface Command Logs................................. 374

8.7.1 Managing TL1 Command Log Templates............................. 374

8.7.2 Querying TL1 Command Logs............................................ 375
8.7.3 Collecting Statistics of TL1 Command Logs ......................... 377
8.7.4 Managing Web Service Command Log Templates ................. 379
8.7.5 Querying Web Service Command Logs ................................ 381
8.7.6 Querying Web Service Command Logs ................................ 382
8.7.7 Querying Socket Operation Log Templates ........................... 384
8.7.8 Querying Socket Operation Logs......................................... 385
8.7.9 Managing Alarm List Log Templates ................................... 387
8.7.10 Querying Alarm List Logs.................................................. 387

8.8 Managing Log Data......................................................................... 389

8.8.1 Managing the Log Forwarding Server .................................. 389

8.8.2 Setting the Log Overflow Saving......................................... 391
8.8.3 Setting the Manual Log Saving ........................................... 393

9 Resource Statistics Management ............................................................... 395

9.1 Function Overview.......................................................................... 395

9.2 Setting the Resource Statistics Policy ................................................. 405

9.2.1 Setting the Optical Power Statistical Policy / ONU Low Optical
Power Threshold ............................................................... 405
9.2.2 Setting the Rate Limit Scheme for ONU Port Resource
Statistics .......................................................................... 407

9.3 Managing Statistics Templates .......................................................... 408

9.3.1 Background Information .................................................... 408

9.3.2 Viewing Statistical Templates ............................................. 409
9.3.3 Creating Statistical Templates ............................................. 410
9.3.4 Modifying Statistical Templates .......................................... 413
9.3.5 Deleting Statistical Templates ............................................. 414

9.4 Querying Statistical Reports in Real Time........................................... 415

9.5 Exporting Statistical Reports at Specified Time ................................... 418

9.6 Customizing Resource Statistics Reports ............................................ 423

9.7 OLT Resource Statistics Report......................................................... 428

10 Resource Management............................................................................... 431

10.1 Modifying Object Names in a Batch Manner....................................... 431

 10.1.1 Modifying Logical Domain Names in a Batch Manner ........... 431
10.1.2 Modifying NE Names in a Batch Manner ............................. 432
10.1.3 Modifying Port Names in a Batch Manner ............................ 434
10.1.4 Modifying ONU Names in a Batch Manner .......................... 435

10.2 Modifying ONU Names by Importing EXCEL.................................... 437

10.3 Importing the ODN NSM Information................................................ 438

10.4 ONU Query Management................................................................. 439

10.4.1 Querying ONUs................................................................ 439

10.4.2 Querying ONUs in a Batch Manner ..................................... 440
10.4.3 Viewing the ONU List ....................................................... 442
10.4.4 ONU Query Example ........................................................ 444

10.5 Querying the MDU Phone Number.................................................... 446

10.6 Querying Cards By Serial Number..................................................... 446

10.7 Querying ONU RMS Error Information ............................................. 447

10.8 Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs ......................... 448

10.9 Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner .............................................. 449

10.10 Configuring the Gateway Type.......................................................... 449

10.11 Checking the List of Registered ONUs............................................... 450

10.12 Unauthorized ONU List ................................................................... 453

10.13 Managing Customized Attributes ...................................................... 454

11 Managing the Operation Maintenance ........................................................ 457

11.1 Using the Network Management Tool ................................................ 457

11.1.1 Basic Operations ............................................................... 457

11.1.2 Managing Processes .......................................................... 459
11.1.3 Managing Resources ......................................................... 461
11.1.4 Managing History Data ...................................................... 462
11.1.5 Managing Logs................................................................. 464
11.1.6 Setting Management Parameters.......................................... 465
11.1.7 Importing / Exporting the Configuration File......................... 467

11.2 Managing Configuration Backup Tasks .............................................. 473

11.2.1 Managing Software Backup Tasks ....................................... 473

11.2.2 Managing Configuration Export Tasks ................................. 475
11.2.3 Managing Card Software Backup Tasks ............................... 477
 11.2.4 Managing MAC Address Table Export Tasks ........................ 480

11.3 Managing Upgrade Tasks ................................................................. 482

11.3.1 Managing System Software Upgrade Tasks........................... 482

11.3.2 Managing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks.................................. 485
11.3.3 Managing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks ....................... 487
11.3.4 Managing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks ............................ 489

11.4 Managing Data Synchronization Tasks............................................... 491

11.4.1 Managing Software / Hardware Version Upgrade Tasks .......... 491

11.4.2 Managing Configuration Upload Tasks ................................ 491
11.4.3 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks............................ 494
11.4.4 Managing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks ............................ 496

11.5 Managing Test Tasks ....................................................................... 498

11.5.1 Managing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks ........ 498
11.5.2 Managing VOIP PING Tasks .............................................. 500
11.5.3 Managing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks................... 502

11.6 Managing Deployment Tasks............................................................ 506

11.6.1 Managing Configuration Script Tasks .................................. 506

11.7 PON Traffic Analysis ...................................................................... 508

11.8 Failure Isolation .............................................................................. 512

11.8.1 Managing Failure Detection Templates................................. 513

11.8.2 Performing Fault Detection................................................. 515

11.9 Managing Device Users ................................................................... 516

11.9.1 Adding Device Users......................................................... 516

11.9.2 Modifying Device Users' Passwords .................................... 518
11.9.3 Deleting Device Users ....................................................... 518
11.9.4 Enabling / Disabling Device Users....................................... 519
11.9.5 Reading the Device User Information................................... 521

12 Application Scenarios ................................................................................ 522

12.1 Alarm Management ......................................................................... 522

12.2 Performance Management ................................................................ 524

12.3 Guaranteeing Device Configuration ................................................... 526

Appendix A Abbreviations ......................................................................... 528

1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

The following introduces the basic operations of the UNM2000, including the following
content:

1.1 Login and Logout

1.1.1 Logging into the UNM2000 via Web Browser

The UNM2000 can be deployed in the B/S architecture. You can log into and operate on the
UNM2000 via Web browser.

Procedure

1. Enter http://IP:port number/unm2000 in the address bar of a browser. IP refers to

the IP address of the UNM2000 server. The port number is 80 by default. The
following login window appears.

Note:

Please use a Chrome browser of the 70.0 version or later.

Version: 01 1
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Enter the username and password, and click Login to log into the Web client of the
UNM2000.

The Web client has the same GUI layout and functions as the ordinary client, as shown
below.

2 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.1.2 Login by Client

1.1.2.1 Logging into the UNM2000 Client

After logging into the UNM2000 client, you can perform configuration management on the
device through the GUI of the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

u You have logged into the system as an administrator.

u The services of the UNM2000 server are started.

u The communication between the client and server is normal (You can ping far-end IP
address to check whether the network communication is normal).

u The client IP address is included in the access control list (ACL) of the UNM2000. For
details about ACL, see Setting the Access Control List.

u You have been assigned with the valid user account and the password.

u The UNM2000 client is installed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the shortcut icon on the desktop.

2. In the Server field of the Log into UNM2000 window, enter an IP address or select a
desired UNM2000 server IP address from the drop-down list.

The default port for logging into the server is 52001. If you want to modify the port,
refer to the following steps and set the Server filed.

1) Click , and in the displayed Server IP Management dialog box, click

Add.

2) In the highlighted row, enter IP Address, Port Number, and Host Name, and
click OK.

3. In the Log into UNM2000 dialog box, enter the valid username and password and
click OK.

Version: 01 3
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

After the UNM2000 is installed, the default login username admin and
password admin are provided. You need to change the password immediately
after logging into the UNM2000 to ensure the network system security.

1.1.2.2 Logging Out of the UNM2000 Client

The following introduces how to log out of the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

The UNM2000 client is running normally.

Procedure

1. In the UNM2000 window, select System→Exit or click at the top right

corner of the UNM2000 window.

2. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm to Exit from the System alert box.

1.2 Viewing the UNM2000 Version

You can view the version information of the UNM2000 through the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 client.

Procedure

1. Select Help→About UNM2000 from the main menu.

2. View the UNM2000 version in the displayed window.

4 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.3 GUI Introduction

Understanding the GUI of the UNM2000 client helps you quickly locate the access
methods of various operations and improves the operation efficiency.

1.3.1 System GUI

The main GUI of the UNM2000 consists of the object tree pane, toolbar and menu bar, as
shown in Figure 1-1.

(1) Object tree pane (2) Toolbar (3) Menu bar

(4) Alarm statistical panel (5) Display pane (6) Status bar

Figure 1-1 UNM2000 System Main GUI

1.3.2 Shortcut Icons

The following introduces the shortcut icons commonly used in the UNM2000 GUI.

Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

Table 1-1 describes the default shortcut icons on the toolbar.

Version: 01 5
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 1-1 Default Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

Category Icon Name Description

Common Refresh Refreshes the current view.

functional
area Search Object Searches for and locates a desired object.

Alarm Prompt Tone Is Enables / disables the alarm sound

On prompt.
Alarm
The alarm sound Enables / disables the alarm sound
prompt is turned off prompt.

Current Alarm Query Views the current alarms.

Alarm
Query Reported Event Views the reported events.

Historical Performance
Performance Views the performance history.
Query

NMS User Opens the NMS User Management tab

Management to manage the users.

Opens the Communication Routing

NE Communication
Others Management tab to manage the NE
Route Management
communication routes.
Opens the Parameter Settings dialog
Parameter Settings
box to set the system parameters.

Opens the Legend pane to view the

Legend Legend
system legend.

Dynamically displays the number of

critical alarms; Click this icon to open
Critical
the Current Alarm - All Objects -
Critical tab and view critical alarms.
Dynamically displays the number of
major alarms; Click this icon to open the
Major
Current Alarm - All Objects - Major
Alarm tab and view major alarms.
Statistics Dynamically displays the number of
minor alarms; Click this icon to open the
Minor
Current Alarm - All Objects - Minor
tab and view minor alarms.
Dynamically displays the number of
warning alarms; Click this icon to open
Warning
the Current Alarm- All Objects -
Warning tab and view warning alarms.

6 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 1-1 Default Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar (Continued)

Category Icon Name Description

Opens the Alarm Statistics dialog box,

Display Alarm
which displays the statistics of all current
Statistics Window
alarms by default.

Other Common Shortcut Icons

Table 1-2 describes other common shortcut icons.

Table 1-2 Other Common Shortcut Icons

Icon Name Description

Quick Search in Searches for a desired object by entering a

the Browse Tree keyword. You can click to set the query criteria.

Advanced Search Searches for a desired object.

Save Sorting Saves the object sorting in the browse tree.

Expand Expands the object tree.

Collapse Collapses the object tree.

Create Custom Creates a custom topology view to display only the

View focused objects.

Lock the View Locks the NE icons in the topology view.

Unlock the View Unlocks the NE icons in the topology view.

Create Link Creates a link between two NEs.

Moves the NE icons in the topology view when the

Select
view is unlocked.

Move Canvas Moves the topology view.

Bird-eye view Displays the aerial view of the topology.

Zoom in Zooms in the topology view.

Zoom out Zooms out the topology view.

Zoom to 100% Displays the topology view as its original size.

Version: 01 7
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 1-2 Other Common Shortcut Icons (Continued)

Icon Name Description

- Sets the display size of the topology view.

Save picture Saves the current topology as an image.

Save Saves the modified topology.

Displays different topological layers, such as core

Topo Layer
layer, convergence layer and access layer.

Last View Returns to the view or subnet opened just now.

Browses the view or subnet displayed before

Next View
clicking .

Parent View Returns to the upper level of the current view.

Select Different
Quickly selects the view or subnet opened before.
View
Scroll Documents Scrolls to open the left / right window when
Left/Right multiple windows are opened.

Show Opened Quickly selects and opens a certain window from

Documents List the list when multiple windows are opened.

Maximize Maximizes a certain window and hides the other

Window windows when multiple windows are opened.

Displays hidden windows when multiple windows

Restore Window are opened. It is a reverse process of window
maximization.

1.3.3 Common Shortcut Keys

Table 1-3 describes the common shortcut keys in the UNM2000.

Table 1-3 Common Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Key Description

F1 Opens the Help.

F5 Refreshes the current view.
Alt+Shift+Enter Selects / Cancels the full-screen mode.

8 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 1-3 Common Shortcut Keys (Continued)

Shortcut Key Description

Opens the Search Object dialog box to search for NEs, logical domains
Ctrl+E
or cards.
Ctrl+F Searches for ONUs.
Ctrl+M Views the current alarms.
Ctrl+H Views the alarm history.

Ctrl+P Views the performance history.

Opens the Global Template Management tab to manage global

Ctrl+G
templates and configurations.

Alt+S Opens the System main menu.

Alt+V Opens the View main menu.

Alt+E Opens the Resource main menu.

Alt+G Opens the Configure main menu.

Alt+A Opens the Alarm main menu.

Alt+P Opens the Performance main menu.

Alt+D Opens the Advance main menu.

Alt+U Opens the Security main menu.

Alt+W Opens the Window main menu.

Alt+H Opens the Help main menu.

Ctrl+W Closes the current window.

Shift+Escape Maximizes / restores the current window.

Alt+Shift+D Opens the tab in the current or new window.

Ctrl+Shift+W Closes all tabs except the Main Topology tab.

1.4 Setting UNM2000 System Parameters

The UNM2000 system parameters include the browse tree display mode, time mode,
topology display, ping parameters, Telnet proxy server, GUI display, font settings,
personalized switch settings, default page opening settings and NE manager settings. The
following introduces how to set and use these parameters.

Version: 01 9
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1.4.1 Setting Display of the Browse Tree

The Viewing Tree Setting dialog box is used for setting the display of the main topology.
You can set the icon size, border pixels, and border height as well as the space between the
border and the text.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Viewing Tree Setting in the left pane

to open the Viewing Tree Setting dialog box.

3. Set various parameters as required. You can preview the display style via the example
text during setting.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

10 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.4.2 Setting the Topology Display

The UNM2000 allows you to set the background display of the main topology. You can set
the display style as required.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Topology Setting in the left pane to

open the Topology Setting dialog box.

3. Set the background display mode of the main topology.

4 Select Image Mode and then click Apply→OK to set the background of the
main topology to image mode.

In the image mode, right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and
select Set Background Image or Use the Default Background Image from
the shortcut menu to set the background image of the physical topology view.

4 Select Map Mode to set the background of the main topology to map mode.

a) In the gis map url text box, enter the address of the network map or the map
package in the local EMS.

Version: 01 11
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The address entered in the gis map url text box should meet the following
requirements:
u For the network map, the address must be the URL of the GIS online map
database.

u For the map package in the local EMS, the address should be that of the
downloaded map folder in the local EMS.

b) Set to show the latitude and longitude lines or prompt the latitude and
longitude by selecting the corresponding check box.

c) Click Apply→OK.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

1.4.3 Setting the Font

You can set the font, size and style of the UNM2000 GUI by Font Setting.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface SettingFont Setting in the left pane to open the
dialog box.

3. Set various parameters as required. You can preview the font during setting.

12 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore the system default font to restore the parameters to the default values.

1.4.4 Setting the Skin

You can set the GUI skin of the UNM2000 client according to your preferences.

Background Information

The UNM2000 client provides the green and gray skins. After a skin color is selected, the
setting takes effect upon the next startup of the client.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Choose Local Settings→Interface Setting→Skin in the left pane to open the Skin
dialog box.

3. Select a skin color from the drop-down list.

4. Click OK to complete the settings.

Version: 01 13
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

Restart the UNM2000 client to validate the skin settings.

1.4.5 Setting the GUI Display

You can customize the display mode of the tables, alarms, performance and events on the
GUI, and set whether to lock the GUI automatically.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Display in the left pane to open the

dialog box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings take
effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

14 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.4.6 Setting the NE Manager

The UNM2000 client supports setting the quantity of opened NE manager windows and
supports enabling NE manager closing prompt to facilitate the utilization.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client. After logging into the server from the
current client, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Settings→NE Manager Settings in the left pane

to open the NE Manager Settings dialog box.

3. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect immediately.

Other Operation

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

1.4.7 Setting Ping Parameters

You can set the UNM2000 to continuously ping the NE or transfer the ping packet via the
server so as to confirm whether the communication between the UNM2000 and the NE is
normal.

Background Information

u When Consecutive Ping is not selected, the EMS executes the Ping command at
most four times.

Version: 01 15
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u When the client cannot ping the NEs, you can select Forward Ping Packet via the
Server to determine whether the communication between the EMS and NEs is normal.

u After the Ping parameters of the client are set, the settings take effect immediately.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Param Settings→Ping Parameter Config in the left pane

to open the Ping Parameter Config dialog box.

3. Set the Ping parameters as required and click Apply. The settings take effect
immediately.

4 If Consecutive Ping is selected, the EMS will send the Ping commands
consecutively to the object after you right-click an object and select Ping from
the shortcut menu.

4 If Forward Ping Packet via the Server is selected, the Ping commands will be
forwarded by the server.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

1.4.8 Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server

After setting the parameters related to the Telnet / SSH proxy server, you can use the proxy
server to access the device.

Background Information

The settings of the Telnet / SSH proxy server take effect immediately.

16 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Param Setting→Telnet/SSH Proxy Server to open the

dialog box.

3. Select Enable Telnet/SSH Proxy Server, set the information of the proxy server
according to the actual situation and click Apply. The settings take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

1.4.9 Setting the Default Opening Page for NE Manager

You can customize the default opening page of the NE manager as desired.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

Version: 01 17
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→Default Page Open Setting in the left

pane to open the Default Page Open Setting dialog box.

3. Set the default opening page of the NE manager.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default system configuration.

1.4.10 Setting the Personalization Switch

You can set the personalization switch to top the vendor information in the ONU list.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→Personal Style Setting in the left pane to

open the Personal Style Setting dialog box.

18 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

3. Select ONU vendor info show setting and click Apply. The setting takes effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.11 Setting Display of the Performance Value

You can set the unit of the performance value to Bit or Byte by setting display of the
performance value.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the server from
the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→PM Show Unit Setting in the left pane to
open the PM Show Unit Setting dialog box.

3. Select the unit of the performance value and click Apply. The settings take effect
immediately.

Note:

It is recommended to use the default setting: Show Bit by Byte.

Version: 01 19
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.12 Setting the Time Mode

You can set the time mode of the client end. The UNM2000 displays the time in the
configured time mode (UTC or local time).

Background Information

u UTC time indicates the coordinated universal time.

u This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Note:

It is recommended that the client time should be consistent with the server time
to avoid data reporting errors at both ends.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Other Setting→Time Mode in the left pane to open the
Time Mode dialog box.

3. Set the time display mode of the client end as required. Then click Apply to apply the
settings.

20 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.13 Setting the XFTP Server

You can set the XFTP server and related parameters to implement the data transmission
between the UNM2000 client and the server end.

Background Information

The XFTP server is used in NE software management. The UNM2000 server and client
transmit files (including NE software package and NE configuration data) by the FTP port.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Configuring the XFTP Server

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→XFTP Server Setting in the left pane to open the
XFTP Server Setting tab.

Version: 01 21
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click Add to add a blank row in the window. Then set the XFTP server parameters
according to the following table.

Parameter Description

Host Name Name of the host running the XFTP server, which can be customized.

Host IP IP address of the host running the XFTP server.

Click the Protocol Type drop-down menu and select FTP (default), SFTP
Protocol name
or TFTP.
Username User name for logging into the XFTP server.

Password Password for logging into the XFTP server.

Port Number Port number for logging into the XFTP server. It is 21 by default.

Path for saving files on the XFTP server.

The XFTP path is described below:
Path u "/" indicates the root directory; "√" indicates the current directory.
u The path cannot contain drive (for example D:) and illegal characters (?
>|"*:).

4. After completing the settings, click Apply. The added XFTP server appears in the
window.

5. Select the new XFTP server and click Test XFTP. If the prompt XFTP server
connection succeeded appears, the XFTP server can be connected.

Configuring an FTP User

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→XFTP Server Setting in the left pane to view the
preset XFTP server.

3. Select FTP User Management to view the FTP user information already set.

4. Click Add to add a blank row in the window and set the FTP user parameters.

22 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

5. Enter the information of the new FTP user according to the following table.
Parameter Description
Required. It is a string of 1 to 32 characters, which supports ASCII codes
User Name ranging from 0x21 to 0x7e.
You can add up to 50 FTP users (username and password).

Required. It is a string of 1 to 32 characters, which supports the ASCII code

Password of 0x21-0x7e.
You can add up to 50 FTP users (username and password).

Required. It is a string of 1 to 32 characters, which supports the ASCII code

Confirm Password
of 0x21-0x7e.
Required. It is a string of 10 to 28 characters, which can only contains letters,
numbers and special characters such as ":", "/" and "\".
User Path
If a user path entered does not exist in the UNM2000, the UNM2000 will
automatically configure the user path to "$UNM_ROOT/unmftproot".

6. Click OK, and the system displays an alert box prompting Will update FTP server,
continue?. Click Yes.

Other Operations

Select an XFTP server no longer needed and click Delete to delete it.

Version: 01 23
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

To modify or delete an FTP user, do as follows:

u To modify an FTP user, click Modify.

Note:

If you want to modify the user path, first disconnect the FTP server and log in
again; otherwise, the changes will not take effect.

u To delete an FTP user, click Delete.

1.4.14 Configuring Automatic Link Setup Between PON NEs

On the UNM2000 client, you can configure automatic link setup between OLTs, and view
the states of physical connections between OLTs in the main topology.

Background

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client. After logging into the server
from the current client, all users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane of the dialog box, select Topo Setting→PON NE Auto Link to open
the PON NE Auto Link window.

3. Select Enable automatic discovery of pon ne physical link. In the drop-down list
of Refresh Time, select a refresh interval at which physical links are automatically
discovered and updated in the main topology.

4. Click Apply, and the settings will take effect.

24 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.15 Setting Export Files

You can set the volume size of the export file and export the file by volumes when the file is
too large.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the server from
the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→File Export Setting in the left pane to open the File
Export Setting dialog box.

3. Select the Enable check box.

4. Select the volume size from the drop-down list and click Apply. The settings take
effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

Version: 01 25
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1.4.16 Limiting the Number of ONUs Connected to the PON Port

The UNM2000 supports limiting the number of ONUs connected to the PON port. If the
number of ONUs reaches the upper limit, no more ONUs can be added.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Service Configuration→Limit the number of ONU under
the PON port to open the Limit the number of ONU under the PON port pane.

3. Click Create to open the Create the number of ONU settings under the PON port
dialog box.

4. Set the maximum number of ONUs connected to the PON port globally or by the PON
port type, and click OK.

Note:

u The maximum number of ONUs connected to the PON port ranges from 1
to 64.

u If different limits are set on both types, the smaller limit will prevail.

26 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Other Operations

u Select an entry and click Edit to open the Edit the number of ONU settings under
the PON port dialog box. Then edit the limit and click OK.

u Select an entry and click Delete to delete it.

u Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.17 Setting the License Expiration Prompt

The UNM2000 supports license expiration prompt, prompting you to update the license in
time.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select License Setting→License Expired Tip Setting in the left pane.

3. Set The remaining days of the license according to the system reference value and
click Apply.

Related Operation

Updating the License

1.5 Setting the Default Workspace

When using the UNM2000 for the first time, you need to set up a workspace directory for
storing the temporary resource files required by the system.

Note:
This directory must be readable and writable with a hard disk space no smaller
than 512M.

Version: 01 27
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Default Work Section Settings from the main menu to open the
Default Work Space Config dialog box.

2. Click Select, select the folder where the workspace locates, and then click Open.

3. Click OK to complete the settings.

1.6 Viewing the Machine ID

You need to obtain the machine ID when applying for the license.

Background Information

The machine ID refers to the serial number of a device. It is a character string that uniquely
identifies a device and ensures that the license is granted to the designated device.

Procedure

1. Select Help→License Management from the main menu to display the License
Management dialog box.

2. Click Machine ID.

28 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.7 Updating the License

The UNM2000 License file is used for controlling the functions and management capability
of the UNM2000. If the License file is unavailable, you cannot log into the UNM2000
client.

Prerequisite

u Log into the UNM2000 as an administrator.

u The UNM2000 License file has been obtained.

Background Information

u License: It is a way of software selling. A license is a permission to obtain the

corresponding authority and license authorization certificate. By obtaining the license,
you obtain the authority to use the software.

Version: 01 29
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u License file: Indicates the license file that controls the features of the software version.
This file is generated based on the contract, encrypted by a special encryption tool and
released electronically or by paper.

Precautions

When updating the license through the Web client, do not drag the license file to the upload
/ download alert box.

Procedure

1. Back up the original License.

Create a "backup" folder in the D:\unm2000\platform\etc\license directory and

copy the original license file unm2000_license.lic to this folder.

2. Select Help→License Management in the main menu.

3. In the displayed License Management dialog box, click Update the License.

4. In the Open dialog box, select a corresponding license file and click Open.

5. In the license Comparison dialog box, check the control items of the original and
new license files and then click Confirm to Update License.

6. Click OK in the Message alert box.

7. Click Close in the License Management dialog box.

1.8 Modifying the User Password

To ensure the access security of the UNM2000, it is recommended to modify your password
regularly.

Procedure

1. Select System→Modify Password from the main menu.

2. In the displayed Modify Password dialog box, enter Old Password, New
Password and Confirm Password.

30 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Note:

The new password must comply with the set password policies. For setting the
password policies, see Setting the Password Policy.

3. Click OK.

1.9 Locking the Terminal

If the UNM2000 client is idle, you can lock the client upon leaving to prevent unauthorized
operations.

Procedure

1. Follow the steps below to lock the client.

4 Lock the terminal manually.

Select System→Lock the Terminal from the main menu, and the The window
is locked dialog box appears.

4 Lock the terminal automatically.

Enable the automatic terminal lock according to Setting the GUI Display. If no
operation is performed after the preset time period, the terminal will be locked
automatically.

1.10 Logging Out Users

Different EMS users have different operation authority. You can log out from the EMS and
then log in as another user to perform different operations.

Procedure

1. Select System→Logout from the main menu.

2. Click OK in the displayed alert box.

3. In the displayed UNM2000 Login dialog box, enter the corresponding username and
password, and click Login.

Version: 01 31
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1.11 Viewing the Message Platform

You can view the message platform to understand the information prompting the influence
on the UNM2000 running status and the operation return information.

Procedure

1. Select View→Message Platform from the main menu to open the Message
Platform pane.

2. View the prompts or operation return information in the Message Platform pane at
the lower part of the window.

3. In the Message Platform pane, right-click to display a shortcut menu.

4 Select Message Classification to classify messages on the message platform.

4 Select Lock to lock a selected message.

4 Select Copy to copy a selected message.

4 Select Clear All to clear all messages.

Other Operations

Refer to the following table to perform other operations on the message platform.

32 Version: 01
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Button Execution Result

Minimize Message Platform. After you select Dock Window for Message
Platform, the button becomes available.

Close Message Platform.

1.12 Managing the Toolbar

You can set the tools to be displayed on the toolbar and the shortcut button of each tool, so
as to improve the operation efficiency.

Procedure

1. Select View→Toolbars from the main menu.

2. In the Toolbar box, click the functional blocks to be displayed in the main topology
GUI.

3. The "√" icon is shown on the left side of the selected functional block in the Toolbar
box. The selected functional blocks are also displayed on the toolbar in the main view.

Other Operations

1. Select Customize to open the Customize Toolbars dialog box.

2. Click New Toolbar, enter the new functional block name in the New Toolbar dialog
box, and click OK.

3. Drag a desired item from the available tool area into the toolbar to add the
corresponding shortcut icon, or drag a shortcut icon out of the toolbar to delete it.

4. After completing the setting, click Close.

The example below illustrates creating the Topology functional block on the toolbar.
In the Customize Toolbars dialog box, you need to drag the Create Custom View
shortcut icon into the Topology functional block.

Version: 01 33
2 Security Management

Security management prevents unauthorized users from logging in to the network and
ensures network data security. Security management includes user security policy
management, user authority management, and network management user management.

2.1 Overview of the UNM2000 User Security

The security management for UNM2000 users mainly includes the management of account
policies, password policies, authority and access control as well as user session monitoring.

Security Management Entity

Concept Description

Objects that can be operated only by the users authorized by the "Security
Administrator Group" members. Only these objects are the managed
Security Object
objects of the UNM2000, such as devices, object sets and logical
domains.
Scope of security objects (including devices, object sets, and logical
domains) that can be managed by users or user groups. The final
Management Domain management domain is the union of selected devices, object sets, and
global logical domains. Users can operate security objects only in the
management domain.

Authority for performing a specific operation. After operation authority is

assigned to a user, the user can perform the corresponding operation.
Operation Authority
Operation authority is associated with the management domain. Users can
perform operations only on NEs in their management domain.

A set of managed objects. Adding managed objects into an object set

facilitates allocating NE management authority in a unified way. If a user
(or a user group) is assigned with the operation authority specific to an
object set, the user (or user group) has the same operation authority on all
Object Set objects in the object set, without the need to set management authority for
each object separately. You can create object sets according to
geographical areas, network layers and device types.
The default object set Assembly of Objects of the UNM2000 includes
all objects managed by the UNM2000. It cannot be modified or deleted.

34 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Concept Description

A set of operations. Adding operations into an operation set facilitates

managing users' operation authority. If a user (or a user group) is assigned
with the operation authority specific to an operation set, the user (or user
group) has the authority to perform all the operations defined in the
operation set, implementing fast authority assignment. You can create
operation sets if the default operation sets do not meet the requirements
Operation Set
for authority assignment.
The UNM2000 provides the assembly of operations of the NMS
Application type, which cannot be deleted or modified.
u Assembly of Application Operations: Includes all UNM2000
application operations except for security applications.
u Assembly of Object Operations: Includes all device operations.

A service attribute that identifies a service provider. A customer in the

network management system is a general term for a group of operators
who focus on specific services or a group of operation and maintenance
persons who are concerned about services in a specific area or of a
Customer
specific type. For example, a telecommunication service provider is
referred to as a customer, that is, a team of persons who are responsible
for maintaining specific telecommunication services is abstracted into a
customer in the network management system.

Person who uses the UNM2000 client. The uniqueness of username and
password determines the operation and management authority of a user.
After a user is added to a user group, the user has the operation authority
of that user group. A user can be added to multiple user groups, and
therefore the authority of a user is the union of the authority of bound user
User groups plus the user’s own authority.
The UNM2000 provides a default user named admin, which is the
system administrator having higher authority than a security
administrator. The admin user belongs to the Administrators group and
Security Administrator Group by default. You can neither modify its
authority nor add it to other user groups.

A set of network management users who have the same management

authority. By creating a user group in the UNM2000, you can manage a
group of users with the same authority. This function helps you manage
user authority in a batch manner and thus reduce management cost.
Default user groups provided by the UNM2000 include the administrators
User Group group, security administrator group, inspector group, operator group, and
maintainer group. Except for these default user groups, the UNM2000
supports creation of other user groups and can assign management
domains and operation authority to these user groups. New user groups
include Ordinary User Group and Subdomain Security
Administrator Group.

Version: 01 35
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Concept Description

This group has the only member “Administrator”, and this type of user
group cannot be created. The "Administrators" group has a management
Administrators
domain covering all objects in the entire network and all operation
Group
authority except the security management authority. Its management
domain and operation authority cannot be modified.

This group has the only member “Security Administrator”, and this type
of user group cannot be created. The Security Administrator Group has a
management domain covering all objects in the entire network and
Security security management authority, including managing users / user groups,
Administrator managing user accounts and passwords, managing user login, and
Group managing user operation sets / object sets / access control lists.
A user in the Security Administrator Group is known as the UNM2000
security administrator. A security administrator can manage all users
except for user admin and other security administrators.
User
This type of user group is created and assigned with a management
Group
domain by a security administrator. This user group only has the security
Type
Subdomain management authority that cannot be modified.
Security Note: When the network managed by the UNM2000 is large with
Administrator numerous network objects, a security administrator can divide the entire
Group network into several subdomains and specify a subdomain security
administrator for each subdomain. A subdomain security administrator
can create users and assign authority to the users in this subdomain.

An "Ordinary User Group" is created by a security administrator (user in

the "Security Administrator Group") or a subdomain security
administrator (user in the "Subdomain Security Administrator Group").
Ordinary User The management domain and operation authority of the users in this
Group group are assigned by a security administrator or a subdomain security
administrator (A subdomain security administrator cannot assign
authority of Administrators Group or Security Administrator Group to
these users).

36 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Concept Description

In addition to Administrators Group and Security Administrator Group,

the UNM2000 provides three other default user groups, that is, Inspector
Group, Operator Group, and Maintainer Group. These user groups are
ordinary user groups with the management domain being the assembly of
objects. Their operation authority is as follows:
u Inspector Group: By default, it has the operation authority of
Assembly of Application Inspectors and Network Inspector
Set. The member in this group can only view, query, count, and
export data rather than configuring or creating data.
u Operator Group: By default, it has the operation authority of
Other Default Assembly of Application Operators and Network Operator Set.
User Groups The member in this group not only has the operation authority of
inspector groups, but also can configure, create and delete data, such
as creating NEs, deleting cards, and reading / writing port
configurations.
u Maintainer Group: By default, it has the operation authority of
Assembly of Application Maintainers and Network Maintainer
Set. The member in this group not only has the authority of
inspector groups and operator groups, but also can configure and
download data that has great impact on the UNM2000 and devices,
such as setting scheduled tasks, activating or deleting services and
resetting cards.

Authorization and Domain Division

The authorization and domain division functions of the UNM2000 are implemented by
dividing management domains and operation authority. With the authorization (operation
authority) management function, you can divide operation authority into different functional
domains, and with the domain division (management domain) management function, you
can divide NEs into different network domains. Assigning users with different combination
of functional domains and management domains effectively controls user management
authority.

Generally, authorization and domain division achieves the following functions:

u Managers with different responsibilities (or posts / O&M departments) in the same
domain have different available operation privileges.

u Managers with different responsibilities (or posts / O&M departments) in different

domains have different manageable objects and different available operation
privileges.

Version: 01 37
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The authorization mode supported by the UNM2000 is flexible. The following two modes
are recommended to authorize users:

u Adding a user to a default user group: The user has authority of the default user group.
This method is applicable to ordinary O&M scenarios.

u Adding a user to a new user group: If the authority of the default user group is not
suitable for inheritance, you can create a user group and assign the required authority.

Note:

u It is recommended to assign authority by binding a user to a user group. By

assigning authority to the user group, users at the same position can have
the corresponding authority.

u You are not advised to adjust the default user group's authority to adapt to
user authentication.

Account Policy and Password Policy

Concept Description

The account policy specifies the minimum length of a username and

Account Policy the security policy for user login, locking and unlocking. The
account policy enhances the security of accounts.

The password policy specifies the complexity, update period and

Password Policy character limit of a password. The password policy avoids simple
passwords and requires users to change their passwords regularly.

Client Access Control

Concept Description

In this mode, only one admin user can log into the
UNM2000 through one client, and all other users are forced
Login mode Single-user mode to log out. This login mode is commonly used for assigning
settings authority by the admin user, which prevents interference
caused by other users.

Multi-user mode Multiple users can log into the system concurrently.

38 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Concept Description

Address access control is a secure access control

mechanism, allowing users to log into the UNM2000 only
from the specified IP address (client). The UNM2000
provides the following two ways of address access control:
u System address access control
It is specific to the whole UNM2000 system. By
setting a system access control list, you can have all
Address access control
users log into the UNM2000 server only from the
client on the specified IP network segment.
u User address access control
It is specific to a certain user. By setting a user access
control list, you can have the corresponding user log
into the UNM2000 server only from the client on the
specified IP network segment.

When the number of online users exceeds the upper limit

prescribed by the license and the idle time of clients exceeds
Force idle clients offline
the preset threshold, the server will force idle clients to log
out.
To ensure secure running of the network, you can lock a
Locking a client client that is not operated for a long time. After a client is
locked, the UNM2000 still runs normally.

Monitoring Users

User monitoring means monitoring resource access activities of users, including session
monitoring and operation monitoring.

u Session monitoring: By monitoring user sessions, you can view basic information
(including the username, IP address, port number, online time and user type) of online
users in the system.

u Operation monitoring: By viewing operation logs, you can view users' operation
objects, time and specific operations.

A security administrator can force users to log out to prevent unauthorized or dangerous
operations, thus ensuring system security.

Version: 01 39
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2.2 Managing User Security Policies

User security policies are access control rules defined for managing users. During initial
installation, you need to plan and configure necessary security policies and then adjust the
policies according to management requirements.

The UNM2000 supports multiple security policies such as user login mode, access control
list, account policy, and password policy, to improve the security of the UNM2000 and
prevent unauthorized operations.

2.2.1 Setting the User Login Mode

The UNM2000 supports single user mode/multi-user mode for login. Generally, the multi-
user mode is adopted. When you need to maintain the UNM2000 server (for example,
adjusting the user authority), you can set the login mode to single user mode to prevent
interference by other user’s operations.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

u Single-user mode: In this mode, only one admin user can log into the UNM2000 via
the client end, and all other online users are forced to exit.

u Multiple-user mode: In this mode, multiple users are allowed to log in simultaneously.
This mode is used for routine network monitoring.

Note:

When the UNM2000 is switched to the single-user mode, only one admin user
can log into the UNM2000 via the client end, and all other online users will be
forced to exit. To ensure that other users use the UNM2000 normally, switch the
UNM2000 to the multi-user login mode after completing the maintenance in
single-user mode.

40 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→User Login Mode in the left pane to open the User
Login Mode pane.

3. Select Single User Mode or Multi-user Mode and click Apply to apply the selected
mode to the current UNM2000.

2.2.2 Setting the Access Control List

Access control lists include a system access control list and a user access control list.

2.2.2.1 Setting System Access Control List

You can set the system access control list so that the UNM2000 users can only log into the
server from the client on the specified IP segment. The system access control list is
applicable to all users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

u By setting the access control list, you can have the UNM2000 users log in to the
UNM2000 server from only the client on the specified IP network segment.

u The access control list of the user is a subset of the system access control list and is
effective only to the user.

Note:

u When the computer running the client has multiple network cards, add the
IP addresses of all the network cards to the ACL.

u When the client runs both on the Intranet and Extranet, add the Intranet and
Extranet IP addresses to the ACL.

Version: 01 41
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select User Security Strategy→Access Control List to open the
Access Control List pane.

3. Click Add, Modify or Delete to add, modify or delete the data in the list, and then
click Apply to apply the settings.

Setting a System ACL Operation

1. In the Access Control List pane, click Add.

Adding a system ACL 2. Set the start and end IP addresses in the displayed Set IP
Range dialog box and click OK.

1. In the Access Control List pane, select an IP segment entry

and click Modify.
Editing a system ACL
2. Modify the start and end IP addresses in the displayed Set IP
Range dialog box and click OK.

In the Access Control List pane, select an IP segment entry and

Deleting a system ACL
click Delete.

2.2.2.2 Setting an Access Control List for a User

An administrator can set an access control list for a specified user, so that the user can log
into the server through a client on the specified IP network segment only.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

u With a system access control list, all UNM2000 users can log into the UNM2000
server from the client on the specified IP network segment only.

u An access control list of a user is a subset of a system access control list and is
effective only to the current user.

42 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to open the NMS
User Management tab.

2. Expand User in the left pane of the NMS User Management tab, and select a desired
user.

3. Select Access Control List in the right pane of the NMS User Management tab.
Set the policies by referring to the table below.

Option Operation Setting Result

If you select this policy, the
Using all ACLs in the Select Use All Access Control Lists in access control list of the user is
system the System and click Apply. consistent with the system
access control list.
1. Select Use the Following By setting the access control list,
Specified Access Control List. the user can log in to the
Using the following
2. Click Add, Modify, or Delete to set UNM2000 server from only the
specified ACL
an IP network segment for the user. client on the specified IP
3. Click Apply. network segment.

2.2.3 Setting the Account Policy

You can set the minimum length of the username and user login / unlocking policies to
enhance the access security of the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

Background Information

u After installing the UNM2000 for the first time, it is recommended that you set the
account policy immediately and then adjust it as required during maintenance.

u The new account policy will not be applied to the accounts already set.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

Version: 01 43
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select User Security Strategy→Account Policy in the left pane to open the
Account Policy pane.

3. Set the parameters related to the account policy according to Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Account Policy Parameters

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 1 - 32.
Default value: 6
Indicates the minimum length
Minimum Length of Username Principle: The larger the value,
of the username.
the more secure the password.
The recommended value is 6.
Value range: 1 - 1440.
Default value: 30
Principle: The greater the value,
the more secure the account.
Indicates the time after which
The recommended value is 30
Auto Unlock Time (minutes) the user account will be
regarding account security and
automatically unlocked.
restoration.
If Permanent Lock is
selected, the locked user will
not be automatically unlocked.

44 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-1 Account Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 0 - 9999.
Default value: 3
Indicates the time you need to
Principle: The greater the value,
Login or Unlock Failure Delay wait when you log into the
the more secure the account. To
Time (Second) system again after the login or
avoid successive illegal login or
unlocking fails.
unlocking, the recommended
value is 10.
Indicates the number of
successive login attempts
Value range: 1 - 99.
allowed for the accounts
Illegal User Default value: 3
created in the UNM2000. If it
Login X Lock Principle: The smaller the value
reaches the preset value, the
after is, the more secure it is. The
UNM2000 will automatically
Lock the User recommended value is 3.
lock the corresponding
account.
You can select or deselect it.
Never Lock The UNM2000 will never lock It is deselected by default.
Super User the admin user. Principle: It is recommended to
deselect this check box.
When this policy is enabled, a
Options include:
non-admin user account will be
u Disabled or Delete
deleted or suspended if the
u 1 to 1000
period for discontinuous login
Default value:
reaches the specified value. If
Unlogged User Policy u Disabled
the account is suspended,
u 60
contact the admin to enable it
Principle: The recommended
again.
values are Disabled and 60
If the policy is not enabled, this
and the unit is Day.
parameter is greyed out.

With this policy enabled, the

server will force the idle client
Value range: 1 - 100.
to get offline if the client idle
Default value: 1
duration exceeds the preset
Principle: To avoid that the idle
Force Idle Client Offline limit and the number of online
client occupies resources, the
users exceeds the upper limit
recommended value is 1 with
prescribed by the license.
the unit minute.
If the policy is not enabled, this
parameter is greyed out.

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Version: 01 45
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations. The account policy immediately restores to the
default configurations, and the configuration immediately takes effect.

2.2.4 Setting the Password Policy

Setting the complexity of the password reasonably and modifying the password regularly
can improve the access security of the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

u The password policy must be configured upon initial phase of the site building and can
be adjusted accordingly during maintenance.

u The new password policy has no effect on the passwords already set.

u The password policy includes the complexity, updating period and length limit.

u The new password policy will be applicable to all new users of the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→Password Policy in the left pane to open the
Password Policy pane.

46 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

3. Set the common policy and advanced policy according to Table 2-2 and Table 2-3.

Table 2-2 Common Policy Parameters

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 6-16
Indicates the minimum length
Minimum Password Length Default value: 8
of all users' passwords except
of Ordinary User Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
the admin user.
The recommended value is 8 for memorability and security.

Value range: 6-16

Minimum Password Length Indicates the minimum length Default value: 8
of Super User of the admin password. Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
The recommended value is 8 for memorability and security.

Value range: 6-16

Indicates the maximum Default value: 16
Maximum Password Length
length of all users' passwords. Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
The recommended value is 16.

Version: 01 47
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-2 Common Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

The new password of a user The value box is greyed out, and this
Select
cannot be duplicate with the constraint can be ignored in the password
Unlimited.
historical ones in the policy.
specified time period.
Password can't repeat historic For example, if the new
Value range: 1-12
passwords within the period password is set on January 1,
Default value: 1
(in month) 2016 and the parameter is set Deselect
Principle: The larger the value, the more
to 12, the passwords used Unlimited.
secure the password. The recommended
between January 1, 2015 and
value is 12.
December 31, 2015 cannot be
used again.

The value box is greyed out, and this

Select
constraint can be ignored in the password
Unlimited.
policy.

Value range: 1-999

Default value: 180
Principle:
u Select Unlimited on the right of
Minimum Password Used Days.
All the users except admin
The value of Maximum Password
are required to modify their
Used Days must be greater than that
Maximum Password Used passwords in a specified
of Number of Days before
Days number of days; otherwise,
Deselect Password Expiration to Display a
they cannot log into the
Unlimited. Reminder.
UNM2000.
u Deselect Unlimited on the right of
Minimum Password Used Days.
The value of Maximum Password
Used Days must be greater than or
equal to the sum of Minimum
Password Used Days and Number
of Days before Password
Expiration to Display a Reminder.

48 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-2 Common Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

Indicates the shortest time The value box is greyed out, and this
Select
before a non-admin user constraint can be ignored in the password
Unlimited.
changes the password since policy.
last change. Value range: 1-999
Minimum Password Used
Note: To modify the Default value: 1
Days
password before the Deselect Principle: The smaller the value is, the
minimum password used Unlimited. more secure the password is. To avoid that
days expire, you can contact you forget the password due to frequent
the security administrator. changes, the recommended value is 10.

Indicates the time of

password change prompt
before the password expires.
For example, if the value is Value range: 1-30
Number of Days before
set to 10, a user who Default value: 10
Password Expiration to
successfully logs into the Principle: To remind users to change the password in time, the
Display a Reminder
client will receive a recommended value is 10.
notification ten days before
expiration, indicating that the
password will be expired.

Indicates the number of

history passwords that cannot
be the same as the new Value range: 1-30
Number of
password. Default value: 5
Similar
For example, if Number of Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
History
Similar History Passwords The recommended value is 30. This prevents a user from
Passwords
The is set to 2, the new password setting the same password that is easily cracked.

password cannot be set to the recent

should not two history passwords.

be similar The value box is greyed out, and the

Select The
to previous characters of the new password cannot be
Whole
ones Number of completely the same as those of the old
Indicates the number of Password.
characters password.
history password characters
can't contain in Value range: 1-16
that cannot be contained in a
historic Deselect The Default value: 4
new password.
passwords Whole Principle: The larger the value, the more
Password. secure the password. The recommended
value is 4.

Version: 01 49
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 3-16
New Password at least has X Minimum number of
Default value: 3
Characters different from Old different characters between
Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
Password old and new passwords
The recommended value is 3.
The value box is greyed out,
Select Cannot contain
and a password cannot
letters.
contain letters.
Minimum number of letters Value range: 0-16
Minimum Number of Letters in a new or modified Default value: 1
password Deselect Can't contain Principle: The larger the
letters. value, the more secure the
password. The recommended
value is 1.
The value box is greyed out,
Select Can't contain
and a password cannot
uppercase letters.
contain upper-case letters.
Minimum number of upper- Value range: 0-16
Minimum Number of
case letters in a new or Default value: 0
Uppercase Letters
modified password Deselect Can't contain Principle: The larger the
uppercase letters. value, the more secure the
password. The recommended
value is 1.
The value box is greyed out,
Select Can't contain
and a password cannot
lowercase letters.
contain lower-case letters.
Minimum number of lower- Value range: 0-16
Minimum Number of
case letters in a new or Default value: 0
Lowercase Letters
modified password Deselect Can't contain Principle: The larger the
lowercase letters. value, the more secure the
password. The recommended
value is 1.
The value box is greyed out,
Select Can't contain digits. and a password cannot
contain digits.

Value range: 0-16

Minimum number of digits in
Minimum Number of Digits Default value: 1
a new or old password
Deselect Can't contain Principle: The larger the
digits. value, the more secure the
password. The recommended
value is 1.

50 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

The value box is greyed out,
Select Can't contain special
and a password cannot
characters.
contain special characters.
Minimum number of special Value range: 0-16
Minimum Number of Special
characters in a new or Default value: 0
Characters
modified password Deselect Can't contain Principle: The larger the
special characters. value, the more secure the
password. The recommended
value is 1.
The value box is greyed out,
Select Cannot Contain
and a new password cannot
When setting or modifying a Complete Username.
contain a complete username.
The password can't contain password, ensure that the
Value range: 2-16
continuous characters in password cannot contain
Default value: 2
username consecutive characters within Deselect Cannot Contain
Principle: The larger the
a username. Complete Username.
value, the more secure the
password.

When setting a new password

or modifying an old
password, enable this policy,
and set the repeated character
sequence and number of
Value range:
repeat times in the The
password can't contain u Repeat Times: 2-16
duplicate character
u Number of Characters with Repeated Sequence: 2-16
sequence parameter box.
Default value:
The password can't contain For example, a password is to
duplicate character sequence be set to 123abcd123123, u Number of Characters with Repeated Sequence: 3
Number of Characters u Repeat Times: 2
with Repeated Sequence is Principle: The smaller the values of Repeat Times and
set to 3, and Repeat Times Number of Characters with Repeated Sequence, the
is set to 2. Because the more secure the password.
repeated character string 123
appears in the password for
three times, the password
does not satisfy the policy
and cannot take effect.

Version: 01 51
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

When setting or modifying a
Default value: Deselect the check box.
Password can't contain black password, ensure that the
Recommended value: Select the check box.
spaces. password cannot contain a
Setting method: Select or deselect the check box.
blank space.

When setting or modifying a

Default value: Deselect the check box.
Password can't be the password, ensure that the
Recommended value: Select the check box.
username in reverse order. password cannot be a
Setting method: Select or deselect the check box.
username in reverse order.
When setting or modifying a
password, ensure that the
password cannot be set as
follows:
u Digit sequence or letter
sequence in an
Password can't be an increasing or a
Default value: Deselect the check box.
incremental or decremental decreasing order, for
Recommended value: Select the check box.
sequence of digits or letters, example, 12345678,
Setting method: Select or deselect the check box.
or a sequence of intervals. abcdefgh, and
987654321.
u Interval sequence of
numbers or letters, for
example, 1a2a3a4a5a,
b2c2d2e2f2, and
9a7a5a3a1a.
Default value: Deselect the check box.
Recommended value: Select the check box.
When setting or modifying a Setting Method
Password can't be a whole password, ensure that the 1. Set the password dictionary.
word in the password password cannot contain a Enter the D:\UNM2000\server\data\security
dictionary. whole word in the password directory, open the weakpwdic.dic file, and add a row as
dictionary. a dictionary item.
2. Select Password can't be a whole word in the
password dictionary.

4. Click Apply.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations. The password policy restores the default
configurations and takes effect immediately.

52 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2.3 Authority Management

The security administrator can grant appropriate authority to network management users
and adjust authority according to actual project changes. This ensures that maintenance
personnel perform maintenance within their authority range, prevents risks caused by
unauthorized operations, and ensures normal operation of the UNM2000 and NEs.

2.3.1 Authority Management Introduction

Authority specifies operations that a user can perform on a specific object. You can
set the authority management function on the UNM2000 to control user operations on
different objects.

Authority Elements

Authority elements include objects and operations, as described in Figure 2-1 and Table 2-4.

Figure 2-1 Schematic Diagram of Authorization Elements

Table 2-4 Description of Authority Elements

Element Description
Object UNM2000 and NEs
Operations such as login, query and configuration.
Operation Only when users are assigned with the corresponding privileges can they access
and operate the UNM2000 and NEs.

Authority Description

Table 2-5 shows the operations that you can perform in the UNM2000 or on NEs.

Table 2-5 Authority Description

Authority
Object Operation Description
Attributes
Access Log into the Only the users having valid accounts and
UNM2000
Authority UNM2000 passwords can log into the UNM2000.

Version: 01 53
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-5 Authority Description (Continued)

Authority
Object Operation Description
Attributes
Only the users having valid accounts and
NE NE login
passwords can log into an NE.

Indicates the UNM2000 operations

irrelevant to NEs, including log query
Network and topology management.
Management The UNM2000 application operations
UNM2000
Application are classified into log management,
Operation topology management, system
management, alarm management and
performance management.
Operation
Indicates UNM2000 operations that are
Authority
related to NEs, including reading /
writing port configurations and batch NE
configurations.
Network Device
NE The UNM2000 classifies network device
Operation
operations based on NE models,
including more than 60 device models,
such as AN5116_02, AN5516_01B and
AN5116-04B.

2.3.2 Authority Allocation Principle

This section introduces the authority allocation principles of the UNM2000, helping
administrators understand how to authorize users in the UNM2000.

Authorization Mode

The common authorization modes are listed in Table 2-6. Selecting the appropriate mode to
authorize users can improve the authorization efficiency.

54 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-6 Authorization Mode

Authorization ModeNote 1 Description Application Scenario

Multiple administrators manage

Directly set the user different devices with different
Authorize the user directly management domain and responsibilities. Besides, the
operation authority. managed devices are few and
not replaced frequently.

Set the authority (management

domain and operation authority)
Bind the user with a user for the user group and then add Multiple users manage the
groupNote 2 the user into this user group so devices with the same authority.
that the user is assigned with the
authority of the user group.

Bind the user with a user group,

and set the user management
domain and operation authority. Add specific authority (not
Bind the user with a user group,
The user authority is the union included in the authority of the
an object group and an operation
of the authority of the user group user group) for the user
group
and the authority of temporarily.
independently set management
domain and operation authority.

Note 1: The mode of binding the user with a user group is recommended, because one authorization
operation can authorize all users of a position. When the network management user is changed,
the administrator can adjust the authority by only adding or deleting a user in the user group.
Note 2: One user can be added into multiple user groups, and therefore the user has the authority of all
the user groups to which the user belongs.

Authority Setting Method

The live network contains a large number of devices. It is not efficient to set authority of the
devices one by one. The UNM2000 provides diversified authority setting modes for a user
or user group. You can select the authority setting methods by referring to Table 2-7. The
user-defined object set+operation set and global logical domain+operation set
modes are recommended for authorization.

Version: 01 55
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The management domain has two global logical domains:

u Global logical domain on the “Device” node: The authorization to this
global logical domain is equivalent to authorization to existing devices in
this global logical domain. When a device joins this global logical domain,
the management domain will not dynamically add this device.

u Global logical domain on the “Global logical domain” node: The

authorization to this global logical domain is equivalent to authorization to
all devices in this global logical domain. When a device joins this global
logical domain, the management domain will dynamically add this device.

56 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-7 Authority Setting Mode

Available Object in the

Authority Setting Mode Feature Application Scenario
Management Domain

The Assembly of A user group needs to

Objects of the UNM2000 manage all devices or all
is added to the In conjunction with the devices that can be seen on
management domain of Assembly of Object the UNM2000 client.
Assembly of the user group as a Operations of the Considering the system
Objects managed object. When UNM2000, you can security, do not bind the
setting operation authority, authorize all operation Assembly of Objects with
you can only bind the authority to the user. users other than the
operation set with the Administrators and security
object. administrator group.

The “customized object set

+operation set” mode can
improve the authorization
and authority maintenance
efficiency.
u When the managed
object of the user or
user group is the same,
setting the management
domain by using the
Object Set The devices are added to
customized object set
the created object set and
can reduce the
then the customized object
workload. In
set is added to the Managed objects of multiple
subsequent
management domain of user groups are the same but
Customizing management domain
the user group as a the managed objects are not
Object Set adjustment, you only
managed object. When in the same global logical
need to adjust objects
setting operation authority, domain.
in the object set instead
you can only bind the
of adjusting the user or
operation set with the
user group one by one.
object.
u When n devices in the
object set are of the
same type, you can add
or remove the operation
authority of a user or
user group by adding or
deleting the operation
authority to this type of
device in the bound
operation set.

Version: 01 57
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-7 Authority Setting Mode (Continued)

Available Object in the

Authority Setting Mode Feature Application Scenario
Management Domain
This operation is
Devices are added to the
straightforward and easy to
management domain one
understand with accurate
by one. You can bind
Device control of authority. Small-scaled network
operation sets with the
However, the maintenance
devices when setting the
workload is heavy for
operation authority.
authority adjustment.

The “global logical domain

+operation set” mode can
improve the authorization
efficiency and authority
maintenance efficiency. In
addition to the advantages of
the “customized object set
+operation set” mode, the
Managed objects in the
“global logical domain
entire logical domain are
+operation set” mode
added to the object set.
features the following
The managed objects can
advantages:
be added to multiple Users manage devices based
u You do not need to
Global Logical Domain global logical domains. on the global logical
create an independent
When setting operation domain.
object set for the user
authority, you can bind the
group.
operation set with only the
u When objects in the
selected global logical
global logical domain
domain.
are changed (added or
deleted), the objects in
the global logical
domain are changed
accordingly, so as to
automatically adjust the
authority of the user
group.

58 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2.3.3 Authority Management Scenarios

There are two scenarios applicable for authorization and domain division: initial
authorization and authority maintenance. You can refer to Table 2-8 for operations as
desired.

Version: 01 59
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-8 Authority Management Scenarios

Scenario Description Sub-Scenario

1. Plan authorization.
Make a plan before authorization to
reduce unnecessary authorization and
maintenance workload.
2. Authorize users.
Create users and authorize them
After installing the UNM2000,
according to the authorization plan.
Initial you need configure and authorize
3. Migrate an operation set.
authorization the administrator for managing
After an operation set is created on the
sets of equipment.
UNM2000, if you want to copy it to
another UNM2000, you can export this
operation set from the system and then
import it to the target system. In this way,
you can successfully migrate the
operation set.

u Authority adjustment after network

changes
During maintenance, after new
equipment is deployed, you need to
authorize the user group to manage the
After initial authorization, the
equipment. After any sets of equipment
authority then needs to be
are removed, the authority for managing
maintained. When network
Authority the equipment will be automatically
changes (adding or removing
maintenance removed from the corresponding user or
devices) or user responsibility
user group.
changes, you need to adjust
u Authority adjustment after responsibility
users' authority.
changes
You need to adjust users' authority when
their responsibility changes in terms of
managed NE scope, operation authority
or role.

2.3.4 Authorization Planning Suggestion

Making an authorization plan helps reduce unnecessary authorization and maintenance

workload. Table 2-9 shows the authorization planning flow.

60 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-9 Authorization Planning Flow

Planning Steps Planning Flow Content Principle

Sort out a device management
division table as the original data
of authority management
according to your organization
structure and device networking.
Analyze the original data for
subsequent planning as per the
following requirements:
Sorting original data for
1 u Sort out the users managing -
authority management
the same equipment, that is,
the users belonging to the
same management domain.
u Sort out the users with the
same responsibilities, that is,
the users managing the same
devices with the same
operation authority.

u Add the users with the same

Classify users according to their authority into the same user group.
2 Planning user groups
responsibilities. u For users with different authority,
add them to different user groups.

u Add the users with the same

administrative scope to the same
management domain.
u Add the users with different
administrative scopes to different
management domains.
Plan how to group managed Suggestions: Managed objects in the
Planning management
3 objects for efficient authorization same global logical domain
domains
and easy maintenance. preferentially use the global logical
domain. Devices not in the global
logical domain are configured in the
customized object set. The customized
object set is not recommended to
include sub-object sets for easy
subsequent maintenance.

Version: 01 61
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-9 Authorization Planning Flow (Continued)

Planning Steps Planning Flow Content Principle

Analyze the operation authority If some user groups require the same
required for each user to fulfill his operation authority, plan a shared
4 Planning operation sets / her responsibilities and plan an operation group for them. Otherwise,
operation group to include such plan a separate operation group for
operation authority. each user group.

Sort and output a complete

The cells of the management domain
authorization planning table,
record how to add managed objects to
providing reference for
the management domain (global logical
authorization and subsequent
Outputting a complete domain, customized object set, or
authority maintenance.
5 authorization planning device). The cells of the operation
The authorization planning
table authority attributes record the operation
summary table should include user
sets (including the planned customized
group name, user group members,
operation set) that cover all required
management domain and
operations.
operation authority.

2.4 Initial User Authorization

You can create and authorize users according to authorization planning.

2.4.1 Flowchart of Creating Users

After authority planning, create users by referring to Figure 2-2.

62 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Figure 2-2 Flowchart of Creating Users

The UNM2000 has default user groups, object sets, and operation sets. For details, see
Overview of the UNM2000 User Security. If the planning result suggests using the default
user groups, object sets or operation sets directly, you can skip the first three steps when
creating users.

2.4.2 Customizing Object Sets

If custom object sets are required in the authorization planning, you need to customize
object sets before authorizing user groups.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

u Object sets have been planned referring to Authorization Planning Suggestion.

Background

After an object set is authorized to a user group, all users in the user group can view
members in the object set in the physical topology view.

Version: 01 63
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management in the main menu. Right-click Object

Set in the left pane and select Create Object Set from the shortcut menu.

2. Set basic information of the object set.

Set the object set name and description on the Basic Information tab of the Create
Object Set dialog box.

3. Set members of the object set.

1) On the Member tab of the Create Object Set dialog box, click Select to open
the Select Management Domain dialog box.

2) In the Object to be Selected area of the Select Management Domain dialog

box, select the members according to the planning and click to add them
to the Selected Object area. Click OK.

Note:

u The members in the object set can be divided by global logical domain, NE
or NE type.

u To manage user authority easily, you are advised to copy members from an
existing object set to a new one. This avoids nested sub object sets in a new
object set. The detailed procedures are as follows:

1) Click Copy Member from Object Set in the Create Object Set
dialog box.

2) Select one or more existing object sets in the Select Object Set
dialog box, and copy the members to the Member tab of the current
object set.

Related Operation

After creation, if you need to adjust the object set members, click Select at the lower right
corner of the Member tab. In the displayed dialog box, adjust the object set members.

64 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2.4.3 Customizing Operation Sets

If customized operation sets are required in the authorization planning, you need to
customize these operation sets before authorizing user groups.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

u The operation sets have been planned by referring to Authorization Planning

Suggestion.

Background Information

u The users and user groups can be authorized through operation sets. By assigning an
operation set to a user group, you assign all the users in this user group with all the
operation authority in the operation set.

u The UNM2000 provides two types of operation sets, namely, NMS application
operation sets and network device operation sets.

4 NMS application operation sets: Set various types of NMS application operations
that correspond to UNM2000 functions irrelevant from NEs, including log query
and topology management.

4 Network device operation sets: Set various types of network device operations
that correspond to UNM2000 functions related to NEs, including reading /
writing port configurations and batch NE configurations.

u The UNM2000 provides more than 100 default operation sets based on operation types
and authority level (high or low).

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management in the main menu. Right-click

Operation Set in the left pane and select Create Operation Set from the shortcut
menu.

2. Set basic information of the operation set.

Set the operation set name, type and description on the Basic Info tab of the Add
Operation Set dialog box.

3. Set members in the operation set.

Version: 01 65
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1) On the Member tab of the Create Object Set dialog box, click Select to open
the Select Operation dialog box.

2) In the Operation to Be Selected area of the Select Operation dialog box,

select the member according to the planning and click to add it to the
Selected Operation area.

Note:

To simplify subsequent authority maintenance, you can copy members of the

existing operation set to a new operation set rather than selecting the existing
operation set as the member of the new operation set. The method is as follows:
1. Click Copy Member from Operation Set in the Create Operation Set
dialog box.

2. Select one or more existing operation sets in the Select Operation Set
dialog box, and copy the members to the Member tab of the current
operation set.

Related Operations

After creation, if you need to adjust the operation set members, click Select in the lower
right corner of the Member tab. In the displayed dialog box, adjust the operation set
members.

2.4.4 Customizing and Authorizing User Groups

If customized user groups are required in the authorization planning, you need to customize
these user groups before authorizing new users.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

u The user groups are planned. See Authorization Planning Suggestion.

66 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu. Right-click User
Group in the left pane and select Create User Group from the shortcut menu.

2. Set the basic information of the user group.

1) In the Create User Group dialog box, set the name, type, description and
maximum number of sessions of the user group.

Note:

The user group type includes the ordinary user group and sub domain security
administrator group. The latter only has the security management authority,
which cannot be modified.

2) (Optional) Set the user group member. Click Select to open the Select User
dialog box, select the desired users, and click OK.

Note:

There are three ways to add users into a user group:

u Select the desired users when creating a user group. When the user group is
created, the selected users belong to this user group.

u Select the desired user group for a user when creating the user. This user
belongs to the selected user group after being created.

u If the desired user and user group are already created, you can select the
user group for a user through User Group or select the user for a user
group through Member.

3. Set the management domain of the user group.

1) On the Management Domain tab of the Create User Group dialog box, click
Select.

2) In the Select Management Domain dialog box, select the management domain
of the user group, and click OK.

The management domain contains two global logical domains. Different results
will be obtained if you select different global logical domains.

Version: 01 67
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

¡ Global logical domain on the “Device” node: Authorization to a global

logical domain means authorization to existing devices in this global logical
domain. When a device is added in this global logical domain, the
management domain will not dynamically add this device.

¡ Global logical domain on the “Global logical domain” node: Authorization

to a global logical domain means authorization to all devices in this global
logical domain. When a device is added in this global logical domain, the
management domain will dynamically add this device.

4. (Optional) Set the extended topology management domain of the user group.

1) On the Management Domain tab of the Create User Group dialog box, click
Select.

2) In the Select Domain dialog box, select the extended topology management
domain of the user group, and click OK.

5. Sets the operation authority of the user group.

1) On the Operation Authority tab of the Create User Group dialog box, click
Select.

2) Select the corresponding authority in the Select Operation Authority dialog box,
and click OK.

Note:

u Authorized objects selected in Authorized Object determine the operation

authority displayed in Optional Authority.

u You can select an operation set in the Optional Authority area and click
on the top of the area to view operations included in the selected
operation set.

6. (Optional) Set second authorization information of the user group.

4 Click Select to select an item for the second authorization.

4 Click Enabled to set whether to enable the second authorization for the
operation.

4 Click OK.

7. After completing the settings, click OK in the Create User Group dialog box.

68 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Related Operation

After creation, if you need to adjust the user group authority, click Select at the lower right
corner of the Management Domain or Operation Authority tab. In the displayed dialog
box, adjust the management domain or operation authority of the user group.

2.4.5 Creating and Authorizing Users

You can create the UNM2000 user accounts and assign them with corresponding authority
so as to allocate the accounts to users of different responsibilities.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

u The user authority has been planned. For details, see Authorization Planning
Suggestion.

Background Information

u It is recommended to authorize users by binding them with user groups for clear
authority / responsibilities and simple maintenance.

u In addition to the user name and password that must be set upon user creation, other
attributes can be set to the default values or after the user is created.

u The user name and password of the new user must satisfy the account and password
policies. For details, see Setting the Account Policy and Setting the Password Policy.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management. Right-click User in the left pane and
select Create User from the shortcut menu.

2. Set the basic information and user group information of the user in the Create User
dialog box according to Table 2-10, and click OK.

Version: 01 69
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-10 User Information

Parameter Description
Compulsory. Sets the user account, which must comply with the account
Username
policies.

Real Name Sets the actual name of the user.

Employee
Sets the employee ID of the user.
Number
Contact Sets the contact information of the user for convenient management.

Description Sets the description of the user, for distinguishing users.

Unit Sets information of the user's company.

Password Sets the user password, which must comply with the password policies.

Confirm
Types the password again.
Basic Password
infor-
Modify
ma- If this item is selected, the user will be requested to modify the password
Password on
tion upon next login.
Next Login
Users cannot
If this item is selected, the corresponding user cannot modify the password
modify the
via the client.
password
Account
Disabled If this item is selected, the corresponding user cannot log in.
Temporarily

Sets the valid days of the password.

u Select "System Password Valid Days", and the valid days number is
Password Valid
180.
Days
u Select Custom to set the number of valid days.
Value range: 2 to 999 days.

Sets the maximum online number of current users.

u If you select Unlimited, the system does not limit the maximum
number of online users.
Max Online No.
u If you deselect Unlimited, you need to set Maximum Online Number.
Basic The default value is 30.
Infor- Value range: 0 to 255.
mation Sets the waiting time for users to exit automatically. By default, this
(Ad- parameter is disabled.
vance) u If you select Disable Auto-exit, a user does not automatically exit.
Wait-to-Exit
u If you deselect Disable Auto-exit, you need to set the Wait-to-Exit
Time
Time. If no operation is performed within the specified period, the
user will automatically exit.
Value range: 5 to 600 minutes.

70 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-10 User Information (Continued)

Parameter Description
Sets the policy for user accounts that do not log in for a long time. By
default, this parameter is disabled.
u If you deselect Enable, the policy for users not logged in is disabled.
Policy for Users u If you select Enable and Disabled or Delete, you need to set the
Not Logged in number of days during which the user does not log in. If the user does
not log into the system during this period, the system disables or
deletes the user account.
Value range: 1 to 300 days.

Sets the time range for user's login. By default, this parameter is disabled.
u If you deselect Enable, the login time range is disabled.
Login Time
u If you select Enable, you need to set the login time range, including
Range
date, time, and week range. The user can log into the system only
within the specified time range.
User Group Sets the user group to which this user belongs.

Indicates the management domain of the user.

The objects to be selected for the management domain are arranged in
Management Domain parallel in the tree structure by devices, global logical domains, and object
sets. The management domain that takes effect finally is the union of the
selected devices, global logical domains, and object sets.

Sets the operation authority of the user.

The objects of the operation authority are classified according to the
network management applications, all objects in the management system,
Operation Authority
and network devices. The network management application authority
includes the operation sets of the network management application types
and the network management operation list.

Sets the access control list of the user.

u Select Use All Access Control Lists in the System, and the ACLs
set by the system will be used in the range of IP addresses logged in
Access Control List by the user account. For setting the ACLs of the system, see Setting
the Access Control List.
u Select Use the Following Specified Access Control List to set the
login IP address range of this user account.

Note:

Click Copy Rights from User and select an existing user (non-admin user) to
copy the management domain and operation authority, and load the data to the
new user.

Version: 01 71
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Related Operations

You can adjust the user authority by referring to Adjusting Users' Authority.

2.5 Migrating Operation Sets

By exporting operation sets, you can back up all the operation sets that have been created in
the current system and check which operation set the authority belongs to. You can also edit
the exported operation set file.

By importing the backup operation set file, you can recover the operation sets missing in the
UNM2000. You can also import the operation set file that has been edited and then add
some operation sets or modify some operation set members in a batch manner on the
UNM2000.

2.5.1 Exporting Operation Sets

This section introduces how to export operation sets to a local path.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. In the browse tree on the left of the NMS User Management tab, click .

3. Select a saving path in the Save dialog box, and click Save.

4. Open the operation set file saved in the local path selected in Step 3 to view or modify
the operation set.

2.5.2 Modifying Operation Sets in Batches

This section introduces how to modify operation sets in batches.

72 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Export the operation set file to the local computer by referring to Exporting Operation
Sets.

2. Open the operation set file exported in Step 1 to modify the operation sets.

3. Import the operation set file modified in Step 2 into the UNM2000 referring to
Importing Operation Sets.

2.5.3 Importing Operation Sets

This section introduces how to import the operation set file from the local computer to the
UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. In the browse tree on the left of the NMS User Management tab, click .

3. In the Open dialog box, select the file path and click Open.

4. In the dialog box that appears, click OK. The NMS User Management tab refreshes.

2.6 Adjusting Users' Authority

In case of network adjustment or personnel responsibility changes, authority of a created

user may be adjusted.

Version: 01 73
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Authority adjustment in this section uses a user initially authorized by binding

himself / herself with a user group for example. If a user is authorized by
binding himself / herself to a management domain or operation authority, you
can directly adjust the management domain or operation authority instead.

2.6.1 Adjusting Authority in Case of Network Changes

During maintenance, when the network is adjusted (new devices are added or removed), the
users' authority should be adjusted accordingly.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

u The user groups for the added NEs are planned. For the planning suggestion, see
Authorization Planning Suggestion.

Note:

Authority adjustment in this section uses a user initially authorized by binding

himself / herself with a user group for example.

Adjustment Analysis

During maintenance, when the network is adjusted (new devices are added or removed), the
users' authority should be adjusted accordingly (modifying the user group bound with the
maintainer of the device).

u When new NEs are deployed, it is required to assign the desired user group authority
of managing these NEs. The cases are as follows:

74 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Note:

If adding NEs is not included in operation authority of the user group, to avoid
influence on original authority of the device and make later-phase maintenance
easier, you are advised to create a new user group and bind it with the user to
manage new NEs rather than directly modify the current operation authority of
the user group.

4 You need to create a new user group and bind it with the user to manage NEs
according to procedures of initial authorization. See Initial User Authorization.

4 The new NEs are automatically added into the management domain of the
planned user group, and operation authority of the user group include operations
on the new NE. No other operation is required.

Note:

If the logical domain of the new NEs has been added to the global logical
domain of the user group’s management domain, device adding or deletion in
this logical domain will be synchronized in the management domain of the user
group.

4 You need to manually add the new NEs to the management domain of the
planned user group.

u After being removed, the device will be automatically deleted from the object group.

The following introduces how to manually add an NE into the management domain of a
user group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the NMS
User Management tab.

2. Add an NE to the management domain of the user group.

4 If the planned user group uses a user-defined object set for authorization, perform
the following steps to add the new NE to the object set bound with the user
group:

Version: 01 75
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

a) On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Object Set node,
and select the object set bound with the user group.

b) Click Select on the Member tab on the right of the selected object set.

c) In the Select Management Domain dialog box, expand the Device node
under Object to be Selected, and select the new NE.

d) Click to move the selected NE to the Selected Object column and

then click OK.

4 If the planned user group is authorized through device mode, perform the
following steps to add the new NE to the management domain of the user group:

a) On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User Group
node, and select the planned user group.

b) On the Management Domain tab on the right of the user group, click
Select.

c) In the Select Management Domain dialog box, expand the Device node
under Object to be Selected, and select the new NE.

d) Click to move the selected NE to the Selected Object column and

then click OK.

2.6.2 Adjusting Authority in Case of Responsibility Changes

During the maintenance period, when the responsibilities of users are changed, such as
changes of managed object, operation authority or position, the security administrator needs
to adjust the users' authority accordingly.

Scenario Description

Note:

There are many possibilities for responsibility changes. The following only
introduces the common scenarios.

u Authority adjustment after managed objects are changed.

76 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

When the management authority of an object is transferred from a user group to

another user group, you need to adjust the members in the management domain of the
user group.

u Authority adjustment after operation authority is changed.

Due to responsibility changes, a user group still needs to manage a certain object, but
with more or fewer operation privileges. In this situation, you need to adjust the
operation authority of the user group.

u Authority adjustment after the position is changed.

4 When an employee is transferred to another position, you can adjust the user
groups associated with the user.

4 When there are newcomers, create user accounts and assign them with
corresponding authority. See Creating and Authorizing Users.

4 When an employee quits, you can delete the user or suspend the user for future
use.

2.7 Querying Authority

By querying authority, you can learn about authority of users upon initial authorization or
during authority maintenance.

2.7.1 Viewing Management Domains of a User or User Group

A security administrator can view management domains of a user or user group to

determine managed objects.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User or User Group node,
and select a user or a user group.

Version: 01 77
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. View the managed objects of the management domain on the right Management
Domain tab.

You can view the management domain with respect to different managed objects as
follows:
Managed Object How to View

Device Expand the Device node to view managed devices.

Expand the Global Logic Domain node and view the selected
Global logical domain global logical domain. In the left Main Topology browse tree,
confirm the devices in the selected global logical domain.

Expand the Object Set node and view the selected object set as
Object set
well as the specific objects managed by the object set.

Note:

If you select Show Management Domain of the User Group at the bottom
left of the Management Domain tab, you can view the management domain
information of the user group to which the user belongs and the information is
greyed out. You cannot delete it from the Management Domain tab.

2.7.2 Viewing Operation Authority of a User or User Group

A security administrator can view operation authority of a user or user group to determine
the operation authority for managed objects.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

78 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User or User Group node,
and select a user or a user group.

3. On the right Operation Authority tab, expand the object node to view operation
authority assigned to the user or user group.

Note:

If you select Display Authority of Attributed User Group, the displayed user
operation authority includes the operation authority inherited from the user
group. The inherited operation authority is greyed out and cannot be deleted
from the Operation Authority tab.

2.7.3 Viewing User Groups to Which a User Belongs

A security administrator can view user groups to which a user belongs and determine his /
her authority inherited from these user groups.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

A user can belong to multiple user groups and inherit the management domains and
operation authority of these user groups.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node, and select a
user.

3. View the user groups to which the user belongs on the right User Group tab.

Version: 01 79
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2.7.4 Viewing Users / User Groups Served by an Operation Set

You can view users or user groups served by an operation set. Hence, you can learn about
the users or user groups to which the operation authority of an operation set is assigned.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Operation Set node, and
select an operation set.

3. View users or user groups served by the operation set on the right Service For tab.

2.7.5 Viewing Operations Included in an Operation Set

The security administrator can view specific authority of an operation set to determine
whether the authority in the operation set meets the requirements.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

Background Information

An operation set consists of sub-operation sets and operation groups. Authority of an

operation set is the union of the sub-operation sets and specific operations.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

80 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Operation Set node, and
select an operation set.

3. View the specific authority in the operation set on the right Member tab.

Note:

If the operation set includes sub-operation sets, you need to check the specific
operations in the sub-operation set to determine the specific operations of the
operation set.

2.7.6 Viewing Objects in an Object Set

A security administrator can view objects in an object set and determine whether these
objects meet planning requirements.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

An object set can include sub-object sets. The final effective management domain of an
object set is a union of selected devices, selected device types, global logical domains, and
its sub-object sets.

Version: 01 81
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Object Set node, and
select an object set.

3. View the specific objects in the object set on the right Member tab.

The final effective management domain of the object set is a union of selected devices,
device types, global logical domains, and its sub-object sets.

4 Expand the Device node and view specific devices under the Device node.

4 Expand the Device Type node and view specific device types under the Device
Type node.

4 Expand the Global Logic Domain node and view global logical domains
included in the object set. On the Main Topology tab, view the specific devices
included in the corresponding global logical domain.

4 Expand the Object Set node to view sub-object sets in the object set. To view the
specific devices included in the sub-object set, refer to Steps 2 to 3.

2.8 FAQs on Authorization Operations

This section introduces common fault handling methods of authorization operations.

2.8.1 How to Confirm Users' Authority

Question

How to view authority information of a user in the UNM2000?

82 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the NMS
User Management tab.

2. Expand the User node in the left pane of the NMS User Management tab, and select
a desired user.

3. In the right pane of the NMS User Management tab, view detailed authority
information of the user.

4 Click User Group to view the user group to which the user belongs.

4 Click Management Domain to view the management domain of the user.

4 Click Operation Authority to view the operation authority of the user.

4. Expand the User Group node in the left pane of the NMS User Management tab,
and view the management domain and operation authority of the user group bound
with the user.

5. Confirm users' authority through the query results in Steps 2 to 4.

2.8.2 How to Grant a User Authority Beyond Its User Group

Question

How to grant a user authority beyond its user group in the UNM2000?

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the NMS
User Management tab.

2. Expand the User Group node in the left pane of the NMS User Management tab,
and check whether there is a user group that has the to-be-added authority only.

4 If yes, add the user to the user group.

4 If not, create such a user group and add the user to it.

a) In the left pane of the NMS User Management tab, right-click User
Group and select Create User Group from the shortcut menu. The Create
User Group dialog box appears.

Version: 01 83
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

b) In the Create User Group dialog box, select the Operation Authority tab,
and click Select to open the Select Operation Authority dialog box.

c) In the Select Operation Authority dialog box, select the desired object in
the Authorized Object pane and then the desired authority in the Optional
Authority pane. Click the > button to move the selected to the Selected
Authority pane.

d) Click OK to complete the settings.

e) Add the user to the created user group.

2.9 Authorization Examples

This section introduces authorization examples.

2.9.1 Authorization Planning Example

This section uses an example to introduce how to plan authorization. In actual projects,
network operators should complete the authorization planning according to their own
organizational structure and equipment networking.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario

There are ten devices in a certain area. Four devices are in logical domain 01 and six
devices in logical domain 02, as shown in Figure 2-3.

84 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Figure 2-3 Device Networking Diagram

Six persons manage these devices together. Figure 2-4 shows their planned authority
division.

Version: 01 85
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Figure 2-4 Schematic Diagram of Device Management Division

86 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Authorization Planning Flow

Figure 2-5 shows the authorization planning flow chart.

Figure 2-5 Authorization Planning Flow Chart

Collecting Original Data for Authority Management

Sort out the device management division table according to the organization structure and
device management division, as described in Table 2-11.

Table 2-11 Device Management Division

Managed Object Administrator Responsibility

Device01, Device02, Device03, Configure the managed objects and take

Device04, Device05, Device06 and A over daily maintenance of the managed
Device07 objects when administrator B is on leave.

Device01, Device02, Device03, Maintain the managed objects and take

Device04, Device05, Device06 and A over data configurations of the managed
Device07 objects when administrator A is on leave.

Configure parameters for the managed

Device08, Device09 and Device10 C
objects.

Device08, Device09 and Device10 D Maintain the managed objects daily.

Version: 01 87
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-11 Device Management Division (Continued)

Managed Object Administrator Responsibility

Device01, Device02, Device03,

Device04, Device05, Device06, Monitor the managed objects during the
E
Device07, Device08, Device09 and day.
Device10
Device01, Device02, Device03,
Device04, Device05, Device06,
F Monitor the managed objects at night.
Device07, Device08, Device09 and
Device10

Analyze the original data for subsequent planning as per the following requirements:

u Sort out the users managing the same equipment, that is, the users belonging to the
same management domain.

Table 2-12 Co-managed Objects

Administrator Co-managed Object

Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06

A, B
and Device07
C, D Device08, Device09 and Device10
Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06,
E, F
Device07, Device08, Device09 and Device10

u Sort out the users with the same management authority, sharing not only the managed
devices but also the operation authority.

Table 2-13 Co-managed Authority

Administrator Co-managed Authority

As the full-time or part-time administrators, they configure and

maintain the same managed objects.
u The full-time administrator A and part-time administrator B
A, B
configure the same managed objects.
u The part-time administrator A and full-time administrator B
maintain the same managed objects daily.

E, F Monitor the same managed objects.

88 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Planning User Groups

A user group is a set of the UNM2000 users with the same management authority. Planning
user groups means classifying users according to their management authority. Users with
the same authority can be added to into one user group. Table 2-14 shows the user group
planning.

Note:

For simple authority maintenance, when a user has completely different

management authority, it is recommended to add the user into an independent
user group.

Table 2-14 User Group Planning Table

User Group Member Responsibility

Configure and maintain Device01, Device02,

Configuration and
A, B Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06 and
Maintenance User Group
Device07.
Configuration User Group C Configure Device08, Device09, and Device10.

Maintenance User Group D Maintain Device08, Device09 and Device10.

Monitor Device01, Device02, Device03,
Monitoring User Group E, F Device04, Device05, Device06, Device07,
Device08, Device09, and Device10.

Planning Management Domains

When planning management domains, you need to consider how to effectively add
managed objects to the management domain for subsequent maintenance. For users in the
same management domain, plan the management domain uniformly. For users in different
management domains, plan the management domains independently. In this example, three
groups of users share the same managed objects respectively and therefore three
management domains are recommended.

Principles for planning management domains are as follows: Preferentially use logical
domains. Devices not in the same logical domain are recommended to be added in user-
defined object sets to avoid direct authorization to the devices. Sub object sets in the user-
defined object sets are not recommended for clear structure and convenient maintenance.

Version: 01 89
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

According to the preceding principles, the planned management domains are as described in
Table 2-15, and the management division on each object is shown in Figure 2-6.

Table 2-15 Management Domain Planning Table

Administrator Management Objects in Objects

Domain Management
Domain
Logical Domain Device01, Device02, Device03, and
Management
A, B 01 Device04
Domain 01
Object Set 01 Device05, Device06, and Device07
Management
C, D Object Set 02 Device08, Device09 and Device10
Domain 02
Logical Domain Device01, Device02, Device03, and
Management 01 Device04
E, F
Domain 03 Logical Domain Device05, Device06, Device07,
02 Device08, Device09, and Device10

Figure 2-6 Schematic Diagram of Management Domain Planning

90 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Planning Operation Sets

When setting a management domain of a user by setting a global logical domain and an
object set, you need to set user operation authority by binding the user with an operation set.
Therefore, the security administrator need to analyze which operation authority is required
for the users to fulfill their responsibilities and define different operation sets that covers the
authority.

1. Analyze operation authority of each user required to fulfill their responsibilities.

Because users have been assigned to the corresponding user groups during planning
according to their responsibilities, you only need to analyze operation authority
required by the user groups.

Table 2-16 describes operation authority required by each user group, analyzed based
on Table 2-14.
Table 2-16 Operation Authority Assignment Table

User Group Member Responsibility Required Operation Authority

u Configuration and maintenance

operations of Device01,
Configure and maintain Device02, Device03, Device04,
Configuration
Device01, Device02, Device05, Device06, and
and
A, B Device03, Device04, Device07.
Maintenance
Device05, Device06, and u Network management
User Group
Device07. application operations required
for configuration and
maintenance
u Configuration operations of
Device08, Device09, and
Configuration Configure Device08, Device10.
C
User Group Device09, and Device10. u Network management
application operations required
for configuration

Version: 01 91
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-16 Operation Authority Assignment Table (Continued)

User Group Member Responsibility Required Operation Authority

u Maintenance operations of
Device08, Device09, and
Maintenance Maintain Device08, Device10.
D
User Group Device09, and Device10. u Network management
application operations required
for maintenance
u Operations for monitoring
Monitor Device01, Device01, Device02, Device03,
Device02, Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06,
Monitoring Device04, Device05, Device07, Device08, Device09,
E, F
User Group Device06, Device07, and Device10
Device08, Device09, and u Network management
Device10. application operations required
for monitoring

2. Plan different operation sets according to operations required by different user groups.

The operations here are the same for a type of devices. If operations required by
different user groups are the same, you can configure a shared operation set for these
user groups. Otherwise, configure an independent operation set for each user group. To
ensure clear operation set structure and easy maintenance, do not configure sub
operation sets for the user-defined operation sets. Table 2-17 shows the operation set
in this area.
Table 2-17 Operation Set Planning Table

Operation Set Type Operation Set Name Operation Authority

Operations for configuring and

Device Configuration and maintaining Device01, Device02,
Maintenance Operation Set Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06
and Device07
Device Configuration Operations for configuring Device08,
Network device operation Operation set Device09, and Device10
set Device Maintenance Operations for maintaining Device08,
Operation Set Device09 and Device10
Operations for monitoring Device01,
Device Monitoring Device02, Device03, Device04,
Operation Set Device05, Device06, Device07,
Device08, Device09 and Device10

92 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-17 Operation Set Planning Table (Continued)

Operation Set Type Operation Set Name Operation Authority

Network Management
Network management application
Application Operation Set
operations required for configuration and
of Configuration and
maintenance
Maintenance Engineers

Network Management
Network management application
Application Operation Set
Network management operations required for configuration
of Configuration Engineers
application operation set
Network Management
Network management application
Application Operation Set
operations required for maintenance
of Maintenance Engineers

Network Management
Network management application
Application Operation Set
operations required for monitoring
of Monitoring Engineers

Sorting Out the User Group Attribute Table

After the user group, object set and operation set are planned, it is recommended to output a
complete user group attribute table. This table provides reference for authorization and
authority maintenance.

The user group attribute table mainly includes user group members, management domains,
and operation authority. The management domains and operation authority are the bound
objects and operation modes configured upon authorization. Table 2-18 describes the user
group attribute table information collected according to the early-stage planning tables.

Version: 01 93
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-18 Attribute Table of User Groups

User Group Member Responsibility Management Operation Authority

Domain
Device configuration and
maintenance operation sets:
operations for configuring and
Logical domain 01
maintaining Device01, Device02,
Configure and maintain (Device01, Device02,
Device03, Device04, Device05,
Configuration and Device01, Device02, Device03, and
Device06, and Device07
Maintenance User A, B Device03, Device04, Device04)
Network management application
Group Device05, Device06 and Object set 01
operation set of configuration and
Device07. (Device05, Device06,
maintenance engineers: Network
and Device07)
management application operations
required for configuration and
maintenance.
Device configuration operation sets
of S2: configuration operations on
Device08, Device09, and Device10.
Object set 02
Configuration Configure Device08, Network management application
C (Device08, Device09,
User Group Device09, and Device10. operation set of configuration
and Device10)
engineers: Network management
application operations required for
configuration.

Device maintenance operation sets:

operations for maintaining Device08,
Device09, and Device10
Object set 02
Maintenance User Maintain Device08, Network management application
D (Device08, Device09,
Group Device09 and Device10. operation set of maintenance
and Device10)
engineers: Network management
application operations required for
maintenance.
Device monitoring operation sets:
Logical domain 01
operations for monitoring Device01,
(Device01, Device02,
Monitor Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04,
Device03, and
Device02, Device03, Device05, Device06, Device07,
Device04)
Monitoring User Device04, Device05, Device08, Device09, and Device10
E, F Logical domain 02
Group Device06, Device07, Network management application
(Device05, Device06,
Device08, Device09, and operation set of monitoring
Device07, Device08,
Device10. engineers: Network management
Device09, and
application operations required for
Device10)
monitoring.

94 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2.9.2 Authorizing Users

This section uses assigning authority for users in two areas as an example to introduce how
to create user accounts and assign authority.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario Introduction

Devices in areas S1 and S2 are uniformly managed by the UNM2000. Figure 2-7 describes
the inspectors and maintainers. Authority need to be assigned for these personnel.

Figure 2-7 Network Example

Version: 01 95
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Data Planning

Plan the user groups, management domains, and management authority by referring to
Authorization Planning Suggestion, and organize the user group attribute table, as shown in
Table 2-19.

Table 2-19 User Group Attribute

User Management
Member Responsibility Operation AuthorityNote 2
Group DomainNote 1
Device monitoring operation
sets of S1: Monitoring
operations on Device01,
Logical domain S1
Monitor- Monitor the devices: Device02, Device03, and
(Device01,
ing User Device01, Device02, Device04.
A, F Device02,
Group in Device03, and Assembly of Application
Device03, and
S1 Device04. Inspectors: network
Device04)
management application
operations required for
monitoring

Device maintenance operation

sets of S1: Monitoring
operations on Device01,
Mainte- Logical domain S1
Device02, Device03, and
nance Maintain Device01, (Device01,
Device04.
User B Device02, Device03, Device02,
Assembly of Application
Group in and Device04. Device03, and
Maintainers: network
S1 Device04)
management application
operations required for
maintenance
Device monitoring operation
sets of S2: Monitoring
Logical domain S2 operations on Device05,
Monitor the devices: (Device05, Device06, Device07,
Monitor-
Device05, Device06, Device06, Device08, Device09, and
ing User
C, F Device07, Device08, Device07, Device10.
Group in
Device09, and Device08, Assembly of Application
S2
Device10. Device09, and Inspectors: network
Device10) management application
operations required for
monitoring

96 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Table 2-19 User Group Attribute (Continued)

User Management
Member Responsibility Operation AuthorityNote 2
Group DomainNote 1
Device maintenance operation
sets of S2: Monitoring
Logical domain S2 operations on Device05,
Mainte- Maintain the (Device05, Device06, Device07,
nance devices: Device05, Device06, Device08, Device09, and
User D Device06, Device07, Device07, Device10.
Group in Device08, Device09, Device08, Assembly of Application
S2 and Device10. Device09, and Inspectors: network
Device10) management application
operations required for
monitoring

Note 1: According to the planning principles, managed objects in the same global logical domain
preferentially use the global logical domain. Since Device01-Device04 are in logical domain S1
and Device05-Device10 are in logical domain S2, you do not need to plan an independent
object set in this example.
Note 2: The Assembly of Application Inspectors and Assembly of Application Maintainers in
Operation Authority are default network management application operation sets of the
UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Create a user-defined operation set according to the data planning.

For details about how to create a user-defined operation set, see Customizing
Operation Sets.

2. Create a user group and bind it with the management domain and operation authority
according to the data planning.

Note:

For details about creating and authorizing a user-defined user group, see
Customizing and Authorizing User Groups.

3. Create a user and bind it with a user group according to the data planning.

Version: 01 97
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

For details about creating and authorizing a user, see Creating and Authorizing
Users.

2.9.3 Adjusting Users' Authority When Management Scope

Changes

This section introduces how to adjust the existing authority of a user after an NE is added
and the management scope changes.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario

A new NE Device05 is added, and is to be monitored by inspector A and maintained by

maintainer B. The figure below shows the original management authority of inspector A
and maintainer B.

98 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Configuration Suggestion

User's Original Authority Analysis Description

Inspector A Inspector Group is

belongs to the bound with the non- Operation authority: The device type of the
non-default user default object set Object new device Device05 is the same as that of
group Set A and non-default Device01 and Device03. Therefore, the
Inspector operation set Inspector adjustment does not involve operation
Group. Operation Set. authority changes, and the relevant operation In this example, you can add
set does not need to be adjusted. Device05 to Object Set A to
Maintainer B Maintainer Group is Management domain: This authority satisfy the authority
belongs to the bound with the non- adjustment involves management domain adjustment requirements.
non-default user default object set Object changes. Because the original user group is
group Set A and non-default already authorized to add NEs, the original
Maintainer operation set Maintainer authority of the device is not affected.
Group. Operation Set. Therefore, you can add Device05 to the
original object set A.

Version: 01 99
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

Add Device 05 to object set A. For details, see Customizing Object Sets.

2.9.4 Adjusting Users' Authority - Operation Authority Changes

The following takes deleting specific authority of an existing UNM2000 user as an example
to introduce how to adjust the authority of existing users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario Introduction

Delete the Modify NE authority of UNM2000 user A.

Configuration Suggestion

User's Original Authority Analysis Description

The authority adjustment

Operator Group A requirement in this example In this example, you need to
is bound with the does not involve any changes unbind the user set Operator
non-default object of the management domain, Group A with the operation
set Object Set A. and therefore no adjustment to set Assembly of Application
the object set is needed. Operators and then bind it
UNM2000
As the authority adjustment with a new operation set
user A
requirement in this example Assembly of Application
belongs to
involves changes of operation Operators A.
the non-
authority and modifying the If there is another user, for
default user Operator Group A
default operation set is not example user B, who requires
group is bound with the
recommended, you need to the Modify NE authority in
Operator default operation set
create an operation set the user group, you need to
Group A. Assembly of
Assembly of Application remove the user B from
Application
Operators A that includes all Operator Group A and then
Operators.
the operation authority in re-assign authority to the user
Assembly of Application A. This circumstance is not
Operators except the Modify considered in this example.
NE authority.

100 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Create Assembly of Application Operators A.

Create Assembly of Application Operators A and select all the authority in

"Assembly of Application Operators" with Modify NE removed.

For details about how to create a user-defined operation set, see Customizing
Operation Sets.

2. Modify the operation authority of Operator Group A.

Unbind the user with the operation set Assembly of Application Operators and
then bind it with a new operation set Assembly of Application Operators A.

For details about how to modify operation authority of the user group, see
Customizing and Authorizing User Groups.

Operation Result

If user A has logged in, log the user out of the system and then re-log into the system to
validate the settings. After re-login, user A does not have the authority to modify NEs.

2.9.5 Adjusting Users' Authority - Position Changes

This section introduces the related operations of the position changes when user A quits.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Background

u When a user account is not used temporarily, you can suspend it. The suspended
account cannot log in to the UNM2000.

u Users in Security Administrator Group can enable or suspend all the users except
themselves and admin.

u Users in Subdomain Security Administrator Group can enable or suspend the

users created by them.

u The admin user cannot be suspended.

Version: 01 101
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Scenario

User A quits, and the account needs to be reserved.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node, and select user
A.

3. On the Basic Information tab on the right, select Suspend Account and click
Apply.

2.10 User Security Management

You can effectively improve the security of the UNM2000 and prevent unauthorized
operations by means of password management, locking management, and login user
monitoring.

2.10.1 Locking the Terminal

Locking the UNM2000 terminal can prevent others from operating the client without
permissions.

Procedure

The UNM2000 supports the following terminal locking modes:

Locking Mode Procedure

Select System→Lock the Terminal to open the The window is locked

Manual locking
dialog box.

The client will be automatically locked when no operations are performed in

Automatic locking
the specified time duration.

Related Operations

u Unlocking the terminal: Click Unlock in the The window is locked dialog box. Enter
the password in the displayed dialog box and click Log in.

102 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

u Logging off the account after the terminal is locked: In the The window is locked
dialog box, click Logout. Then click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

2.10.2 Logging Out Users

This section introduces how to log out the current user.

Procedure

1. Select System→Logout from the main menu.

2. In the dialog box that appears, click Yes to log out the user. You need to restart the
UNM2000 to log in.

Related Operation

Logging off the account after the terminal is locked: In the The window is locked dialog
box, click Logout. Then click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

2.10.3 Modifying the User Password

User passwords must be periodically changed to ensure access security of the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You have learned about the user password policies. For details, see Setting the Password
Policy.

Procedure

1. Select System→Change Password from the main menu.

2. In the displayed Change Password dialog box, set Old Password, New Password
and Confirm Password.

Note:

The new password must comply with password policies. Otherwise, the system
will display an error prompt.

Version: 01 103
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click OK.

2.10.4 Reminding Users to Modify Password upon Expiration

When your password expires, the system will remind you to modify your password
manually.

Background

u You have set the remaining days for the system to remind the user when the password
is about to expire on the UNM2000.

u You have set the lifespan of the password on the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Log into the UNM2000 using an expired password. An alert box indicating that the
password expired appears.

2. Click Close. The Modify User Current Password dialog box appears. Set the new
password and click OK. You can then log into the UNM2000 using the new password.

104 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2.10.5 Resetting a User Password

In case a user forgets the password, the password expires or the user login is denied, the
security administrator needs to reset the password for the user.

Background

u A user in Security Administrator Group can reset the passwords of all users except
admin, other security administrators, and himself / herself.

u The password of a security administrator can be reset by admin.

u The admin user cannot reset his / her own password. Therefore, the password of
admin must be properly kept.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node. Right-click a
desired user and select Reset Password.

3. In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm Password,
and then click OK.

Version: 01 105
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

If Modify the Password at Next Login is selected, the user must change the
password upon the next login. You are advised to select it to improve the
security of the UNM2000.

2.10.6 Managing Security of Service Passwords

You can manage the passwords of different services and set them visible or not for different
users.

Background Information

The services that require the password authority configuration are as follows:

Service Name Protocol ID

WiFi Service Config 3883
WEB Administrator Config Management Inquiry 4294
ONU Web Admin Global Config 5380
Remote Management Config 3882
Voice IP Config 1652, 4330, 4015, 3412 and 5654

Voice MD5 Authentication 1658, 3414, 6319 and 5659

Voice Port Config 1659, 4332, 6322, 5428 and 5672
PPPoE With NGN Uplinked 3041
NGN Configuration 3042, 4178 and1925
IAD MD5 Configuration 3047
WAN Service 3884, 2612 and 19002

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→Business Password Security Management from the main menu

to open the Business Password Security Management tab.

106 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2. Select a user from the left browse tree.

3. Set whether to display the password of a service by selecting / deselecting the

Password Visible check box in the right pane.

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

5. Click Copy Privilege to User to open the Select User dialog box. Select a user and
copy the authority of viewing the service password to the user.

2.10.7 Unlocking a UNM2000 User

If a user is automatically locked due to consecutive input of incorrect passwords, the user
can wait until the system automatically unlocks the user or request the security
administrator to manually unlock the user. After being unlocked, the user can normally log
into the UNM2000.

Background Information

u A user is automatically locked due to consecutive inputs of incorrect passwords. After

being locked, the user cannot log into the UNM2000. The limit on the number of
consecutive inputs of incorrect passwords can be set by referring to Setting the
Account Policy.

u A user in Security Administrator Group can unlock the users except the admin and
security administrators.

u The security administrator is unlocked by admin.

Version: 01 107
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u The admin user cannot be manually unlocked. Therefore, the password of admin must
be properly kept.

Procedure

The UNM2000 supports the following account unlocking modes:

Unlocking Mode Procedure

To unlock an account manually, perform the following steps:
Unlocking the user 1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.
manually 2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node.
3. Right-click a desired user and select Unlock.

A locked user cannot log into the UNM2000 until it is automatically unlocked
Unlocking the user after a specified time period.
automatically Note 1: You can set the automatic unlocking time referring to Setting
the Account Policy.

2.10.8 Locking a User Group

The UNM2000 can lock a user group, so that users in the user group cannot log in to the
UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management from the main menu. Click User
Group in the left pane to expand the User Group node.

2. Right-click a user group such as Inspector Group and select Lock.

108 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Note:

If a user in the locked user group logs in to the system, the system reports an
error. The user group must be unlocked to enable the user login.

2.10.9 Unlocking a User Group

The UNM2000 supports unlocking user groups.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management from the main menu. Click User
Group in the left pane to expand the User Group node.

2. Right-click a user group such as Inspector Group and select Unlock.

2.10.10 Monitoring User Sessions

By monitoring user sessions, you can understand the information of the online users.

Version: 01 109
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a member of Security Administrator Group.

Background Information

u Session: The connection set up between the client and the server. The session starts at
login of the client and ends at exit of the client.

u When the user login mode is set to Multi-User Mode, one user account can log into
multiple clients at the same time. You can specify the maximum number of concurrent
online users using a same account in Advanced dialog box of the Basic Information
tab. For details, see Creating and Authorizing Users.

u When a client has multiple IP addresses, the value of the IP Address field is selected
randomly from these IP addresses.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

2. On the Monitoring User Session tab, view the online users and their session
information.

Other Operation

u On the Monitoring User Session tab, click Refresh to refresh the current page.

u Select and the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds.

u Force other users to log out according to Logging Out Users.

u Send messages to other users according to Sending Messages to Online Users.

2.10.11 Logging Out Users

By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of the online users and log out
the users who may influence the system security, so as to ensure the system security.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority.

110 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

Background

u Only users belonging to Security Administrator Group can forcibly log out other
users. The security administrators other than admin can forcibly log out only non-
security administrators.

u The current login user cannot forcibly log out sessions corresponding to the current
login.

u The forced exit operation only forces the user account that generates the corresponding
session to log out. For example, if the user account user logs into the same UNM2000
server via client ends A and B, sessions a and b will be generated respectively. When
the account user generating session a is forced to exit, the account user generating
session b is not influenced.

Procedure

1. Select Security→Monitor User Session from the main menu.

2. Right-click the corresponding user session, and select Forced Offline from the
shortcut menu.

Note:

You can select multiple user sessions concurrently to forcibly log them out.

3. Enter the reasons in the Forced Offline dialog box, and click OK.

2.10.12 Sending Messages to Online Users

Sending messages to other online users enables convenient communication between users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority.

Background

The UNM2000 does not support the user of the current session sending messages to himself
or herself.

Version: 01 111
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Security→Monitor User Session from the main menu.

2. Send messages to a user of the specified session.

Sending To Operation

Right-click the corresponding session, select Send Message, enter the

A single object
content and click OK.
1. Select multiple sessions using the Ctrl or Shift key.
Multiple objects 2. Right-click a session and select Send Message. Type the message
contents, and then click OK.

1. Select all sessions by pressing Ctrl+A.

2. Hold the Ctrl key and click the session of the current user to deselect the
user.

All other objects

3. Right-click a session and select Send Message. Type the message

contents, and then click OK.

2.10.13 Monitoring Users’ Activities

This section introduces how to monitor users’ activities to prevent unauthorized operations.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

112 Version: 01
 2 Security Management

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node.

3. Select a user and click Activity Info in the right pane to view the activity information
of the user.

Version: 01 113
3 Configuration Management

The configuration management means the operations to configure the information of the
network and the system equipment, and is the most significant management function of the
UNM2000.

3.1 NE Communication Route Management

By using the NE communication route management function, you can set the Manager
server IP address and the Trap receiver address. The following introduces how to manage
NE communication routes.

Note:

You can configure multiple EMS server addresses when using distributed
deployment mode of EMS servers.

3.1.1 NE Management Program

The NE management program is used to set the communication protocol between the
UNM2000 and the device. Only when the NE management program is correctly configured
can normal communication between the UNM2000 and the device be ensured so as to
manage devices through the UNM2000.

3.1.1.1 Creating a Manager Program

Correct configuration of the NE manager program is the prerequisite to ensure normal

communication between the UNM2000 and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

114 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

Note:

u The anm_manager-1507393536(server IP address) is the default

manager program. If no manager program is configured for an NE during
its creation and no partition is matched with the NE, the default manager
program will be selected for the NE.

u Only one NE communication route manager is supported in the single-

instance mode and hence creating new manager programs is not needed.

2. Right-click Communication Routing Management, and select Create

Management Program from the shortcut menu. Configure various parameters of the
manager program in the displayed dialog box, and click OK.

3.1.1.2 Deleting / Modifying a Manager Program

When the network resource is adjusted or some changes are made to the manager program
that the NE belongs to, you can delete the manager program and then create a new one or
directly modify the manager program to meet your requirement.

Version: 01 115
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Deleting the default manager program is not supported.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

2. Delete a manager program:

Note:

Deleting the default manager program is not supported.

1) In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, right-click

the manager program and select Delete the Manager from the shortcut menu.

2) Click OK in the dialog box that appears to complete deleting the manager
program.

3. Modify a manager program:

1) In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, right-click

the manager program and select Manager Property from the shortcut menu.

2) Modify the parameters as needed in the Manager Properties dialog box that
appears, and then click OK.

116 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3) Click Yes to save the modifications.

Other Operations

1. In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, click before
the manager and Pass-through in sequence.The right pane displays the list of pass-
through NEs managed by the manager program.

2. Right-click an NE and select the corresponding operation from the shortcut menu:
Cancel Manager Management, Copy NE, Delete NE, modify NE Attribute, etc.

Note:

Copy NE is used to create an NE of the same type. After copying an NE, you
only need to modify the different parameters such as the IP address. In this way,
NEs can be created rapidly.

3.1.1.3 Pre-configuration

The NEs in the Pre-configured communication NE list are those without manager
program.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 117
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

2. In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, click before
the manager and Pass-through in sequence.

3. Right-click a certain NE in the Pass-through NE List of the Manager in the right

pane and select Cancel Manager Management from the shortcut menu. This NE is
moved to Pre-configured NE list.

Subsequent Operation

1. Right-click a certain NE in the pre-configured common NE list and select Select

Management Object from the shortcut menu, or click a certain NE in the pre-
configured common NE list and click the Select Management Object button to
select a manager program for the NE again.

2. Click OK. The NE is moved to the pass-through NE list.

3.1.2 Partition Policy Management

For the distributed multi-instance deployment, the EMS has multiple manager programs.
The partition policy can be used to allocate the NEs to different manager programs
according to the specified start IP address and end IP address of each partition. New NEs
are automatically allocated to the corresponding manager program for management
according to the partition policy.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

118 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

2. Right-click Partition Policy Management in the left pane and select Create a
Partition from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, set the parameters and
click OK.

Note:

u Manager Name: Indicates the name of the created manager program.

u After the partition is created

4 If a manager program is not configured for an NE during its creation,
the UNM2000 will automatically assign an existing manager program
to the NE according to the partition to which the NE's IP address
belongs.
4 If a manager program is configured for an NE during its creation, and
is inconsistent with the manager program of the partition to which the
NE's IP address belongs, this manager program is still preferred.

Other Operations

Right-click a partition entry and select Create a Partition, Modify Partition or Delete
the Partition from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

Version: 01 119
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.2 SNMP Parameter Template

To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to configure the
SNMP parameters of NEs at the UNM2000.

You can directly configure the SNMP parameters of NEs at the UNM2000 side, create NEs
manually, or automatically apply the SNMP parameters by using the applicable SNMP
parameter template upon NE automatic discovery.

3.2.1 Creating and Using an SNMP Parameter Template

You can manage the SNMP parameter templates used for communication between the
UNM2000 server and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Background Information

The system provides the default SNMP parameter templates as shown below. The SNMP
parameter template named default cannot be deleted or modified. If no SNMP parameter
template is set upon NE creation, the SNMP parameter template named default will be
used for access NEs by default, and the SNMP parameter template named default_Switch
will be used for switch NEs by default.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→SNMP Parameter Template from the main menu to open the
SNMP Parameter Template Management tab.

2. Click Create to open the SNMP Parameter Template dialog box, set various
parameters and click Create.

120 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3. Right-click the specific template and select Bind NE from the shortcut menu to open
the Select Bound NE dialog box. Select the NE to be bound and click OK.

4. After the NE is bound, the information on the NE bound with the SNMP parameter
template will be displayed in the Binding NE Information pane.

Other Operations

Change the SNMP parameter template bound with the NE.

1. In the main topology window, right-click the NE and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu. The Attribute Page pane appears on the right.

2. In the Attribute Page pane, click the SNMP parameter template field and select a new
template from the drop-down list to change the SNMP parameter template bound with
the NE.

Version: 01 121
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click to save the modification.

122 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3.2.2 Modifying / Deleting an SNMP Parameter Template

You can manage the SNMP parameter templates used for communication between the
UNM2000 server and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Background Information

The SNMP parameter template named default is the default template and cannot be deleted.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→SNMP Parameter Template from the main menu to open the
SNMP Parameter Template Management tab.

2. On the SNMP Parameter Template Management tab, select the SNMP parameter
template to be modified or deleted.

4 Modifying: Click the Modify button, or right-click to select Modify from the
shortcut menu. In the SNMP Parameter Template dialog box that appears,
modify the template as required.

4 Deleting: Click the Delete button, or right-click to select Delete from the
shortcut menu to delete the template.

Note:

The SNMP parameter template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

Version: 01 123
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.3 ONU Capability Set Template

The current method of adapting to the NE by adding the ONU type code cannot be meet the
ever-increasing requirements for adaptation of new terminal types.

With the ONU capability set template, you can configure the parameters such as ONU port
quantity, port type and resource type. The UNM2000 can deliver it to the device to support
the new type of ONU in real time, which quickly meets the adaptation requirements without
upgrading the device.

3.3.1 Creating an ONU Capability Set Template

You can create an ONU capability set template, configure the parameters such as ONU port
quantity, port type and resource type and then deliver it to the device to quickly adapt to the
new ONU.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The ONU capability set template is enabled.

1) Open the server configuration file platform-options.ini in the directory D:

\unm2000\server\etc.

2) Modify the parameters:

#ONU capability set template
[OnuCapability]
enable = true; true - enable the ONU
capability set function, false -
disable the ONU capability set function

Procedure

1. Select Configure→ONU Capability Profile from the main menu to open the ONU
Capability Profile tab.

2. Click , or right-click in the blank area of the ONU Capability Profile tab and
select Create Profile from the shortcut menu.

124 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3. In the displayed Create a ONU Capability Profile dialog box, set various parameters
and click OK.

Version: 01 125
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Binding an ONU capability set template

1. On the ONU Capability Profile tab, right-click the specified template. Select Binding
to NE from the shortcut menu to open the Select Bound NE dialog box.

2. Select the NE to be bound and click OK. After the NE is bound, the information of the
bound NE will be displayed in the NE Bind State pane on the right.

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

3.3.2 Modifying an ONU Capability Set Template

When the ONU capability set template cannot meet the user requirement, you can modify
the template as needed.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The ONU capability set template is enabled.

1) Open the server configuration file platform-options.ini in the directory D:

\unm2000\server\etc.

2) Modify the parameters:

#ONU capability set template
[OnuCapability]
enable = true; true - enable the ONU capability
set function, false - disable the ONU capability
set function

Procedure

1. Select Configure→ONU Capability Profile from the main menu to open the ONU
Capability Profile tab.

2. Select an ONU capability set template and click or right-click to select Modify
Profile from the shortcut menu.

126 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be modified.

Other Operations

Deleting an ONU capability set template

1. On the ONU Capability Profile tab, select an ONU capability set template and click

or right-click to select Delete Profile from the shortcut menu.

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

3.4 Managing Global Templates

A template is a set of attributes with specific values. For example, if a template is referenced
to configure the resources, such as ADSL or G.SHDSL port, the parameter values of the
attributes preset in the template will be automatically adopted by the resource.

You can use a template to configure multiple NEs of the same model in the management
domain of the entire network by using the global profile, so as to improve the project start-
up efficiency.

3.4.1 Viewing Global Templates

You can configure multiple NEs of the same type in the management domain of the entire
network in a batch manner by using the global template, so as to improve the project start-
up efficiency.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 127
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an example.
You can follow the same procedures to view other templates with the only
difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the ADSL
Line Profile tab.

3. Click a template entry on the ADSL Line Profile tab to view the template information.

Other Operations

On the ADSL Line Profile tab, right-click a template entry and select Add, Delete, Batch
Modify, Compare Templates, or Bind to System Card / Port to perform the
corresponding operation.

3.4.2 Adding a Global Template

When the existing global templates do not meet the requirements or new global templates
are needed, follow the steps below to add global templates.

128 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an example.
You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation on other templates
with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the ADSL
Line Profile tab.

3. Click to open the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box, enter the
number of entries to be added and click OK.

4. On the ADSL Line Profile tab, double-click each parameter field to manually enter the
data or select the data from the drop-down list, click to select the saving range,
and then click OK.

Note:

u Global Template Name is mandatory.

u The system automatically generates Global Template ID.

Version: 01 129
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.4.3 Modifying a Global Template

When the existing global templates do not meet your requirements, you can create global
templates by following operations.

Background Information

u You can only modify the parameter settings of a template with the template name
unchanged after the global template is saved.

u The UNM2000 automatically updates the modified parameter settings of the template.

If the template is bound with a device, the modified and saved parameter settings of
the template are automatically delivered to the device.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an example.
You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation on other templates
with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the ADSL
Line Profile tab.

3. On the ADSL Line Profile tab, right-click the desired template and select Batch
Modify from the shortcut menu to open the Modify in a batch manner dialog box.

130 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

4. Modify the parameter settings in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box and click
Apply→OK at the lower part to save the changes.

Note:

Select the Select check boxes and the Modify the Selected Rows at the lower
part to modify the settings of the selected parameters.

3.4.4 Binding / Unbinding a Global Template

You can bind a global template with a device so that the parameter settings of the device are
consistent with those set in the global template in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 131
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an example.
You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation on other templates
with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the ADSL
Line Profile tab.

3. Select the desired template and click the button, or right-click it and select Save
to System from the shortcut menu to open the Select Object dialog box. Select the
system to be bound and click OK.

4. Bind a card / port (for the template to be bound with a card / port).

1) Select the desired template and click the button, or right-click it and select
Bind to System Card / Port from the shortcut menu to open the Please select

132 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

card port dialog box. Click to expand the NE, ONU, card and port in
sequence, select the check box of the desired object, and click OK.

5. Unbind a template.

1) On the ADSL Line Profile tab, click .

2) In the displayed Select Object dialog box, select the device information and
click OK to unbind the template from the device.

Other Operations

Select the shortcut menu or click the button on the toolbar to perform the corresponding
operation on the template, such as Delete, Batch Modify, Delete from System and
Compare Templates.

3.4.5 Deleting a Global Template

When a global template is no longer needed, you can delete it.

Version: 01 133
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The template to be deleted is not bound with any device; otherwise, see Binding /
Unbinding a Global Template to unbind the template from the device.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile as an example. You can follow the
same procedures to delete other templates with the only difference in the access
method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select ADSL Line Profile to display the ADSL Line Profile tab.

3. Click to open the Configure the Selection Range dialog box, select the
corresponding range according to the quantity of templates to be deleted and then click
OK.

3.5 Managing Global Configurations

The global configuration is a set of attributes with specific values. You can use the global
configuration to configure multiple NEs of the same type in the management domain of the
entire network in a batch manner (not using templates), so as to improve the project start-up
efficiency.

134 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3.5.1 Viewing the Global Configurations

You can configure multiple NEs of the same type in the management domain of the entire
network in a batch manner (not using templates), so as to improve the project start-up
efficiency.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The following uses the Voip Service Vlan under Voice Service Config of the
AN5006-30 as an example. You can follow the same procedures to view other
global configurations with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5006-30→Global Config→Voice Service Config→Voip

Service Vlan to display the Voip Service Vlan tab and view the existing voice
VLAN configuration data.

3.5.2 Adding the Global Configurations

When the existing global configurations do not meet the requirements or new global
configurations are needed, follow the steps below to add the global configurations.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: 01 135
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The following uses Igmp Mode under Service Config of the AN5516 as an
example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation on other
global configurations with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5516/AN6000/AN6001→Global Config→Service

Config→Igmp Mode to display the Igmp Mode tab.

3. Click to open the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box, enter the
number of entries to be added and click OK.

4. On the Igmp Mode tab, complete the parameter settings and click . Then the
system automatically generates Global Configuration ID.

Note:

Global Configuration Name is mandatory.

3.5.3 Modifying the Global Configurations

When the existing global configurations do not meet your requirements, you can modify the
global configurations according to your needs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

136 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

Note:

The following uses the IGMP Mode under Service Config of the AN5516 as
an example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation on
other global configurations with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5516/AN6000/AN6001→Global Config→Service

Config→Igmp Mode to display the Igmp Mode tab.

3. On the Igmp Mode tab, right-click the desired configuration entry and select Batch
Modify from the shortcut menu to open the Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Modify the parameter settings in the Batch Modify dialog box and click Apply→OK
at the lower part to save the changes.

3.5.4 Issuing the Global Configurations to a Device

The following introduces how to issue the global configurations to the corresponding
device so that the device parameter is consistent with the global configuration parameter in
the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The following uses the ARP Proxy Switch under Service Config of the
AN5516 as an example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the
operation on other global configurations with the only difference in the access
method.

Version: 01 137
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5516/AN6000/AN6001→Global Config→Service

Config→ARP Proxy Switch to open the ARP Proxy Switch tab.

3. Select a configuration entry and click the button, or right-click it and select Save
to Database from the shortcut menu to open the Configure the Selection Range
dialog box. Select the range and click OK.

4. Select a configuration entry and click the button, or right-click it and select Save
Configuration to Device from the shortcut menu to open the Configure the
Selection Range dialog box. Select the desired NE and click OK.

3.5.5 Deleting the Global Configurations

You can delete the global configurations that are no longer needed.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The following uses the Voip Service Vlan under Voice Service Config of the
AN5006-30 as an example. You can follow the same procedures to delete other
global configurations with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open the
Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5006-30→Global Config→Voice Service Config→Voip

Service Vlan to open the Voip Service Vlan tab.

3. Select the global configuration entry to be deleted, and click to delete it.

138 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3.6 Signaling Tracing

Tracing the signaling is used to trace the signaling frame of the communication between the
current IAD and the voice communication card, so as to find the communication faults in a
timely manner.

Background Information

This function is currently only supported by the FTTH-type and FTTB-type ONUs that
support voice services.

Prerequisite

Set the Enable Signal Trace Report field of the traced object to Enable on the SNMP
TRAP Receiver IP tab (NE Manager→Local Service Config).

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Configure→Signaling Tracing to open the Select

Signaling Tracing Object dialog box.

2. Select the traced object in the displayed dialog box to access the Signal Trace tab.

3. Click Start to perform signaling tracing.

Version: 01 139
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.7 Configuration Synchronization

The configuration synchronization function implements the comparison between the

configuration data in the UNM2000 and those on the device. If any difference is detected,
the corresponding data will be downloaded or uploaded to ensure consistency of the
configurations.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Configuration Synchronization from the main menu to display

the Configuration Synchronization tab.

2. Click Add NE to open the Add NE dialog box, select the object to be compared and
click OK. The Configuration Synchronization tab displays the added NE whose
configurations are to be synchronized.

3. Select the object to be compared in the configuration NE list, and click Configuration
Comparison to compare the configurations.

4. View the comparison result in the lower part of the Configuration Comparison tab.

140 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

Subsequent Operation

When the comparison result shows inconsistency in configurations, you can click Upload
Configurations or Download Configurations to upload or download the configurations
according to Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Configuration Uploading / Downloading

Button Description
Uploads the configuration data of devices to the network
Upload Configurations
management database.

Downloads the configuration data from the network

Download Configurations
management database to devices.

3.8 Network Access Status Management

The network access management helps you analyze and observe the resource
interconnection status and network access status of the system and the line card.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Network Access Status Management from the main menu to

open the Network Access Status Management tab.

2. Select the desired object in the object tree and click the Query button to query the
resource management system interconnection status and registration status of the
object.

Version: 01 141
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Select the system / line card to be registered in the object tree, and click the Send
RMS or Send Selected RMS button to enable the interconnection with the resource
management system.

4. Select the system / line card to be registered and click the Initiate Registration or
Initiate Selected Line Cards button.

5. Click the Write Database or Read Database button to write the configuration into
the database or read the configuration from the database.

3.9 Pinging NEs

The Ping operation is used to check whether the communication between NEs and the EMS
is normal.

Procedure

1. In the main topology or NE manager, right-click the specific NE and select Tools→
Ping from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Command Tool dialog box, view the
Ping operation result.

3.10 Telneting NEs

When the UNM2000 client cannot access the device directly, it can access the device via
Telnet or access the Telnet proxy server to perform operations via CLI. Setting the Telnet /
SSH Proxy Server describes how to set the Telnet proxy server.

Procedure

1. In the main topology or NE manager, right-click the specific NE and select Tools→
Telnet from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed Command Tool dialog box, enter the username and password to log
into the CLI and perform operations via the CLI.

142 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3.11 WEB Configuration

The UNM2000 provides the Web configuration access to call a third-party Web network
management system to manage devices. Currently, only the S2208G-PAF device supports
this function.

Procedure

Right-click an S2208G-PAF NE, and select Tools→Web Config from the shortcut menu
to call a Web network management system to manage the S2208G-PAF NE.

3.12 The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server

The UNM2000 supports sending the Tacert packet from the UNM2000 server to the
specified IP address.

Background Information

The Tracert (tracing the route) function is used to test the gateway that the data packet
passes from the source host to the destination. It mainly checks whether the network
connection is normal and locates the failure in the network. The Tracert command uses the
IP Time to Live (TTL) field and the ICMP error message to determine the route from a host
to another host in the network.

The command is Tracert on Windows OS and Traceroute on UNIX OS.

Prerequisite

u The authority of the Tracert function is configured in the authority and domain division
management. Only the user properly authorized can perform the Tracert function.

u At present, it only needs to support sending the Tracert packet to the IP address in the
IPv4 format, and it does not need to support sending the Tracert packet to the IP
address in the IPv6 format and the host domain name.

Procedure

1. In the left Object Tree pane of the Main Topology tab, right-click Local NMS and
select Server tracert from the shortcut menu.

Version: 01 143
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. In the Server Tracert Tool command dialog box, enter the specified IP address and
press Enter. The Tracert result appears in the command dialog box.

3.13 Migrating the PON Configuration

The UNM2000 supports PON configuration migration as well as the PON port
configuration migration.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→PON Configuration Migration from the main menu to open

the Operation Instructions alert box.

2. Click OK to display the PON Configuration Migration tab.

3. Set the parameters, such as source OLT and destination OLT.

4. Click Execute.

5. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

144 Version: 01
 3 Configuration Management

3.14 Synchronizing the Device Capabilities

This UNM2000 supports synchronizing the device capability.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the left browsing tree of the main topology, right-click an NE and select
Synchronize Equipment Capability.

2. An alert box appears at the lower right corner, prompting synchronization success of
device capability.

3.15 Synchronizing the Device Version Information

This UNM2000 supports synchronizing the device version information.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the left browsing tree of the main topology, right-click an NE and select Version
Synchronization.

2. An alert box appears at the lower right corner, prompting synchronization success of
device version.

Version: 01 145
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

146 Version: 01
4 Topology Management

The topology management is used to create and manage the topology architecture of the
entire network, so as to present the network connection status and operating status of the
equipment. You can view the topology objects and real-time alarm prompts in the topology
view.

4.1 Topology Creation Flow

The creation flow of the network topology describes the creation procedures of the subnets,
NEs, cards and links as well as the relationship among the operation tasks. Figure 4-1
describes the creation flow of the network topology.

Figure 4-1 Flow for Creating the Network Topology

In the creation flowchart, the horizontal procedures indicate the four phases of the network
topology creation: creating the subnet, creating the NE, creating the card and creating the
link; the vertical procedures indicate the operation tasks included in each phase.

Table 4-1 describes the creation flow of the network topology.

Version: 01 147
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 4-1 Description of the Network Topology Creation Flow

Procedure Operation Description

Manage Create a global For convenient management, the topological objects in the same area or of the similar
subnets logical domain attributes can be placed in the same logical domain.

To manage the physical devices through the UNM2000, you need to create the
Add an NE corresponding NEs in the UNM2000. Creating NEs includes creating the access NE
and virtual NE, and discovering the NE automatically.

Configure the NE The NEs are not configured after being created. Before managing the NEs via the
data UNM2000, you need to configure the NE data first.

The NE ID is the unique identifier of the NE. During the network planning, each NE
must be assigned a unique ID. In case of NE ID conflicts, the route conflicts will occur
Manage NEs Modify the NE ID and consequently some NEs cannot be managed. To adjust the original planning and
modify the NE ID during debugging or capacity expansion, you can modify it through
the UNM2000.
Modify the NE You can modify the NE name as needed at any time. Modifying the NE name does not
name influence the running of the NE.

If an inappropriate NE is created, you can delete it in the UNM2000. Deleting an NE

Delete the NE leads to loss of all information related to the NE in the UNM2000; however, this does
not influence the running of the device.

If a physical card is added after the NE data are manually configured, you need to add
Add a card
the card on the NE panel.
Manage cards
When the network configurations change or the card configurations of an NE need to
Delete the card
be modified, you can delete the card from the NE panel.

Add a link You can create links, cables as well as virtual fibers on the UNM2000.

Modify the link You can modify the name, attenuation, length and type of the link according the
Manage links information connection status and physical features of the link.

To delete an NE or change the fiber connection between NEs during network

Delete the link
adjustment, you need to delete the link between the NEs.

4.2 Creating a Global Logical Domain

For convenient management of NEs, you can customize logical domains and place the NEs
in the same area or of the same attribute into a same logic domain. A logical domain is a set
of various NEs, and sub logical domains can be created under it. For example, you can
create a logical domain named Site A, and then create sub logical domains such as Area 1
and Area 2 under Site A.

148 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Create Logical Domain from the main menu to open the Create
Global Logical Domain dialog box.

2. In the Create Global Logical Domain dialog box, set various parameters, among
which Name is required and other parameters are optional.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created logical domain appears in the
main topology.

Other Operations

Right-click the logical domain and select the desired option from the shortcut menus to
perform the corresponding operation.

4.3 Creating NEs

To manage the physical devices through the UNM2000, you need to create the
corresponding NEs in the UNM2000. There are two ways to create the NEs:Manual
creation and automatic discovery. For creating the network topology architecture, manual
creation of NEs in a batch manner is recommended. For network capacity expansion,
automatic discovery of NEs is recommended.

4.3.1 Creating an Access NE

Only when the access NE is created can the access device be managed via the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 149
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main topology, right-click to select Create NE→Create Access NE, or select
Resource→Create NE→Create Access NE from the main menu to open the
Create Access NE dialog box.

2. Set the parameters referring to Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Settings of Creating the Access NE

Parameter Description Remark

NE Type The NE type.

After the NE type is selected, the corresponding subrack (shelf) Required

Default Shelf Type
type will be determined by the system.

150 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-2 Settings of Creating the Access NE (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

NE The name of the NE. It should be easy to recognize.

NE IP Address The IP address of the NE. Optional

NE Mask The mask of the NE.

NE Gateway The IP address of the NE gateway.

The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main topology Optional

Alias Name displays the alias; If this item is not configured, the main topology
displays the NE name.
NE SN
Manufacturer Name
Remark Attributes used for identifying the NE.
Username
Optional
Password
Longitude Longitude and latitude of the physical area where the device is
Latitude located, used for locating.

Topo Level Topology layer to which the NE belongs.

Manager program which manages the NE. If this item is not

configured, this NE is managed by the manager program of its
Manager -
partition; if this item is not configured and no partition exists for
the NE, the NE is managed by the default manager program.

The template used for communication between the UNM2000

SNMP Parameter
server and various NEs. Generally, the default template is -
Template
selected.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created access NE appears in the
logical domain or main topology.

4.3.2 Creating a Switch NE

You can manage a switch via the UNM2000 after creating a switch NE.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 151
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. On the main topology tab, right-click in the blank area and select Create NE→Create
Switch NE from the shortcut menu, or select Resource→Create NE→Create
Switch NE from the main menu to open the Create Switch NE dialog box.

2. Set the parameters referring to Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Settings of Creating a Switch NE

Parameter Description Remark

NE Type NE type of the switch.

Subrack (shelf) type displayed automatically after the NE type is

Default Shelf Type Required
selected.
NE Name of the NE for easy identification.

NE IP Address IP address of the NE in IPv4 / IPv6 format. Optional

NE Mask Mask of the NE in IPv4 / IPv6 format.

Optional
NE Gateway IP address of the NE gateway in IPv4 / IPv6 format.

152 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-3 Settings of Creating a Switch NE (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main topology
Alias Name displays the alias; If this item is not configured, the main topology
displays the NE name.
NE SN
Manufacturer Name Attributes used for identifying the NE. Optional
Remark
Username
Attributes used for identifying the NE. Optional
Password
Longitude Longitude and latitude of the physical area where the device is
Optional
Latitude located, used for locating.

Topo Level Topology layer to which the NE belongs. Optional

Manager program which manages the NE. If this item is not

configured, this NE is managed by the manager program of its
Manager Optional
partition; if this item is not configured and no partition exists for
the NE, the NE is managed by the default manager program.

Template used for communication between the UNM2000 server

SNMP Parameter
and NEs. The default_Switch template is selected by default for Required
Template
creating a switch NE.

3. After the parameters are set, click OK. The created switch NE appears in the logical
domain or main topology.

Note:

After a switch NE is created, the system will automatically create a subrack. The
subrack will contain a virtual core switch card by default for displaying ports on
the switch panel. An S5800 series switch can house two 10GE cards on the
backplane. You need to manually add the corresponding cards in the NE
manager.

4.3.3 Creating Other NEs

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 153
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. On the main topology tab, right-click in the blank area to select Create NE→Create
Other NE from the shortcut menu, or select Resource→Create NE→Create Other
NE from the main menu to open the Create a Virtual NE dialog box.

2. Set the parameters according to Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 Settings of Creating the Other NEs

Parameter Description Remark

NE Type The NE type.
Required
NE Name The name of the NE for identification.
NE IP Address The IP address of the NE.
The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main topology
Alias Name displays the alias; If this item is not configured, the main topology
Optional
displays the NE name.
NE SN
The NE attribute information used for identifying the NE.
Manufacturer Name

154 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-4 Settings of Creating the Other NEs (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

Remark
Topo Level The topological level to which the NE belongs.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created access NE appears in the
logical domain or main topology.

4.3.4 Automatic Discovery of NEs

The UNM2000 supports the NE automatic discovery. You can set the desired IP segment, in
which the NEs will be discovered automatically and created in the UNM2000. Meanwhile,
the configuration data will be uploaded, adding the NEs to the UNM2000 for management.
The NEs that can be automatically detected include access NEs and switch NEs.

4.3.4.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can view the created NE automatic discovery task to automatically discover the NE
information such as IP address, type and status.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab, to view
the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

4 Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management tab. In the left pane, select Data Synchronization
→Auto Detect NE Task.

2. Click the created NE automatic discovery task in the left pane to view the NE IP
address, NE type and status.

Version: 01 155
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.3.4.2 Creating Automatic NE Discovery Tasks

You can set a task to discover NEs in the specified IP address range and create the
discovered NEs automatically.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Follow an access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab.

4 Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management tab. In the left pane, select Data Synchronization
→Auto Detect NE Task.

2. Click the Create button at the bottom of the tab, or right-click Auto Detect NE Task
in the left pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the Create Auto
Detect NE Task dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic Information and Extend Information tabs as
required referring to Table 4-5, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Table 4-5 Settings of Creating an Automatic NE Discovery Task

Parameter Description Remark

Task name Name of the automatic NE discovery task Required
Basic Status of the task. It is selected by default.
information Enable u Select: Enable the scheduled task. Required
u Deselect: Disable the scheduled task.

156 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-5 Settings of Creating an Automatic NE Discovery Task (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

Execution cycle of the task.
u One time: The task is executed immediately after
it takes effect.
u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to
Execution
365. Required
CycleNote 1
u Every week: Select the effective days in every
week.
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every
month.
Execution time of a periodic task.
Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic statistics task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss Optional

End time of a periodic statistics task. It is valid after

End time being selected.
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

IP address range of NEs to be automatically

discovered. You can set it as follows.
u Manually add Start IP Address, End IP
Extend IP Address Address and Subnet Mask in IPv4 / IPv6
Required
information Range format.
u Download an excel template, enter the IP
address range in the template, and then import
the template.

Version: 01 157
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 4-5 Settings of Creating an Automatic NE Discovery Task (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

1. Select ANM NE (access NE) or Interchanger
NE (switch NE) for the NE type to be detected.

2. Click to select an SNMP parameter

template.
Note: By default, the SNMP parameter
template is default for an access NE, and
default_Switch for a switch NE.
Detect
3. Set whether to create NEs automatically. If Auto
Parameter Required
Create NE is selected, you can set the name
Settings
prefix of each NE created automatically. For
example, enter NE in the text box to the right of
Auto Create NE, an NE created automatically
will be named as NE+NE type_NE IP
(NES5800-52T-S-PE(-C)_10.171.1.202).

4. Click to set the logical domain that detected

NEs belong to.

List of IP addresses to be filtered. That is, NEs

Filter IP List corresponding to listed IP addresses will not be Optional
discovered.
Note 1: When One time is selected for execution cycle, Execution Time / Start Time / End Time
will be automatically hidden on the Basic Information tab.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
another task. This improves the setting efficiency.

Subsequent Operation

If Auto Create NE is not selected during task creation, you can manually create discovered
NEs as follows.

1. On the Policy Task Management tab, expand Auto Detect NE Task in the left
pane to display all tasks.

2. Click a desired task, and you can view its details in the right pane. If The NE does
not exist is shown in the Status column of an NE, the NE is discovered but not
created.

158 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

3. Select an entry containing The NE does not exist, click Create All or Create
Selected NE to create the desired NE.

4.3.4.3 Automatic Discovery of NEs

You can set the system to discover the NEs within the appointed IP address range as
required and create the discovered NE automatically.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab, to view
the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

4 Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management tab. In the left pane, select Data Synchronization
→Auto Detect NE Task.

2. Right-click a corresponding task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute
the NE automatic discovery task.

Version: 01 159
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

When a switch NE is automatically detected and created, the system will

automatically create the shelf and add a virtual core switch card on the shelf by
default, which is used to present the panel port of the switch. For the 5800 series
switches, you can insert two 10GE cards on the backplane and you need to
access the NE manager and add the corresponding cards.

4.4 Creating Extended Subracks

This section introduces how to create extended subracks.

Background Information

u The supported device types include: AN5516-06 and AN5116-06B.

u Each NE supports creating at most two extended subracks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. On Device Tree of the NE manager, right-click an NE and select Create Expand

Subrack from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Subrack dialog box, set the parameters such as Child Subrack
Number, Subrack Type and Subrack Name, and click OK.

160 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

4. View the extended subrack created on the Device Tree.

Related Operation

u Add all cards: Right-click the extended subrack and select Add All Cards from the
shortcut menu.

u Delete subracks: Right-click the extended subrack and select Delete Subrack from
the shortcut menu.

u View the subrack attributes: Right-click the extended subrack and select Attribute
from the shortcut menu. Then view the subrack attributes in the Property Page pane.

4.5 Adding Cards

After configuring the NE data, you need to add cards in the NEs. You can manually add
cards or have the cards added automatically.

Version: 01 161
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically

The physical configuration detection function enables the automatic discovery of physical
cards, which then can be synchronized to the UNM2000 automatically through the
synchronization operation.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Detect Physical Configuration from the main menu to open the
Detect Physical Configuration tab.

2. Select the system to be detected in the object tree pane, and click Detect Physical
Configuration (D) at the lower part of the tab to execute the detection command.
Then you can view the information of the detected cards and ports.

3. Select the synchronization mode according to Table 4-6, and click the Synchronize
All button to synchronize the configurations of detected cards to the UNM2000.

Table 4-6 Synchronization Mode

Synchronization Mode Meaning

Only synchronizes the configurations of added physical cards (against the

Incremental
current configurations in the UNM2000).

Overwrites the current configurations in the UNM2000 with the newest

Overwritten
physical card configurations.

162 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

4.5.2 Adding Cards Manually

You can add cards manually or pre-configure the cards as required.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The NE has been created.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager from the
shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. Add the card.

4 Adding all cards

a) Right-click the subrack in the device tree and select Add All Cards from the
shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes. The UNM2000 adds all the cards to
the recommended locations respectively.

c) Right-click the card and select Delete Card / Replace Card from the
shortcut menu to adjust the inserted cards according to the quantity and
location of actual cards of the project.

4 Adding a single card

Right-click the slot of the card in the subrack view and select Add Card→ Add
XXX Card from the shortcut menu according to the actual cards and card location
in the project.

Subsequent Operation

5.5 describes how to authorize the added cards and deliver the configuration to the devices.

4.6 Replacing Cards

You can replace cards as required.

Version: 01 163
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The NE has been created.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager from the
shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. In Subrack View, right-click a card and select Replace Card and select the desired
card.

Subsequent Operation

5.5 describes how to authorize the added cards and deliver the configuration to the devices.

4.7 Creating a Link

You can configure services in the UNM2000 after creating the corresponding link in the
main topology.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u NE and card data are configured.

164 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view, and select Create Virtual
Link from the shortcut menu to open the Create Virtual Link dialog box.

2. Set the parameters referring to Table 4-7.

The table below describes required and common link configuration items only. Adopt
default settings for other items.

Table 4-7 Settings of Creating a Link

Parameter Description
Name of the link, displayed above the link in the topology view by default. It can
Name
be empty.

Source End NE Source NE of the link

Source End Port Port on the source NE of the link
Sink NE Destination NE of the link
Sink End Port Port on the destination NE of the link
u Forward: The connection line has an arrow from the source NE to the sink
NE.
Direction
u Bidirectional: The connection line has bidirectional arrows. Bidirectional
should be selected for a link between switch NEs.

3. After the setting is completed, click OK. The connection line appears between the
source and sink NEs.

4.8 Editing an NE

After configuring the NE basic data, you can set the NE attribute (NE name, NE IP address,
etc.) and NE icon according to the management requirement.

4.8.1 Setting NE Attributes

After creating NEs, you can modify NE attributes (NE name, NE IP address, etc.) according
to the network operation and management requirements.

Background Information

u Modifying an NE's name does not influence the operation of the NE.

Version: 01 165
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Inappropriate IP address settings may cause anomalous communication between the

UNM2000 and NEs or between NEs. This failure can be eliminated by modifying the
NE IP address.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. On the Main Topology tab, right-click the desired NE and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu to open the Attribute Page pane.

2. Modify the NE attributes as needed.

Note:

You cannot modify the NE type of an access NE, or the NE type and SNMP
parameter template of a switch NE.

3. (Optional) In NE Maintain Information of Attribute Page, click View to open the

NE Maintain Information dialog box. You can view the location and maintainer
information of the NE and click Close.

4. (Optional) Click at the top of Attribute Page, and the User-Defined Properties
area appears. Here you can set the custom property name and value for the NE.

Note:

You can add up to three custom properties for an NE. The custom property
name and value define the topology information of a hotspot area.

5. After completing the settings, click and the settings take effect.

Related Operation

Manage the NE maintenance information.

1. Select Resource→NE Maintain Information from the main menu to open the Query
NE Maintain Information dialog box.

166 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

2. Select the corresponding NE and click Show to open the NE Maintain Information
dialog box.

3. Configure the location and maintainer information of the NE, and click OK.

4.8.2 Editing Icons

You can modify the size and pattern of the NE icon according to your preference.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In Physical Topology View, right-click the NE whose icon is to be edited and select
Edit the Icon from the shortcut menu to open the Edit Icon dialog box.

2. Modify the size and pattern of the NE icon and preview the icon at the lower part of
the dialog box.

3. After completion of the icon editing, click OK and the NE icon turns into the desired
size and pattern.

4.8.3 Setting the Displayed Content of the Icon

You can set whether to display the NE IP address and type in the NE icon, facilitating NE
query in the topograph.

Version: 01 167
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select View→Topology View→Show NE IP or View→Topology View→Show NE

Type. These sub-menu options will be selected and the NE icon will display its IP
address and type.

4.8.4 Tagging an NE

You can add special tags to NEs to distinguish NEs requiring difference levels of attention.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select the NE to be tagged in Main Topology.

2. Select Resource→Mark the NE As from the main menu.

3. In the Identifier NE dialog box, enter the tag content and click OK.

4.8.5 Querying a Label

The following introduces how to query marked objects.

168 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Label Query to open the Label Query tab, which displays all the
objects marked with labels by default.

2. Do as follows:

4 Reset Query:Click Reset Query to open the Reset Query dialog box and then
set the flag name and applicable object to search for the object with a specific
flag.

4 Refresh:Click Refresh to refresh the objects in the tab.

4 Locate to Object:Select the desired object and click Locate to Object to locate
the object in the Main Topology tab.

4 Delete the Flag:Select the object and click Delete the Flag to delete the flag of
the object.

4.9 Editing a Fiber Connection

This section introduces how to modify the connection line properties and how to expand /
collapse the connection line.

4.9.1 Modifying the Connection Line Properties

You can modify the properties of the connection line between NEs, such as direction, type
and width.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the connection line between NEs and select Connection Properties from
the shortcut menu to open the Link Attribute dialog box.

2. Modify the connection line direction, control point format, width and color as needed.

3. After modification, click OK.

Version: 01 169
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.9.2 Setting the Display Mode of the Connection Line

When there are multiple connection lines between the NEs, you can collapse or expand the
lines.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the connection line between the NEs and set the display mode.

4 Collapse the connection lines:After Collapse line is selected from the shortcut
menu, the collapsed line is added with a + symbol, and the connection line names
are hidden.

4 Expand the lines:After the Expand line is selected from the shortcut menu, the
connection lines are expanded, each of which is displayed with its name.

4.9.3 Viewing Links Between OLT NEs

The UNM2000 sets up links between OLTs automatically and displays the states of physical
connections between OLTs in the main topology. This section introduces how to view the
states of physical connections between OLTs.

Prerequisite

u You have the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The physical connections between OLTs are in normal state.

u PON NE Auto Link is enabled in the Parameter Settings dialog box following the
steps in Configuring Automatic Link Setup Between PON NEs.

u The LLDP basic attributes are configured on two connected OLTs and hence data
communication is set up between them.

4 In the main menu of NE Manager, select Configuration→Local Service

Configuration→PON Service to display the operational tree.

4 Select Common Config→LLDP Basic Properties to display the LLDP Basic

Properties tab.

170 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

4 Set the parameters referring to the following table.

Parameter Description
LLDP Switch Set it to enable.
LLDP Manage IP Set it to the loopback port IP address.

Slot No. Set it to the slot where the port physically connected resides.

Port No. Set it to the port that physically connects the device to another.

Mode Set it to Tx / Rx.

4 Click to save the configuration data to the current OLT.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of Physical Topology View, and select Refresh PON
NE Link from the shortcut menu.

2. In Physical Topology View, check the states of connections between OLTs. The table
below describes three connection states.

Item Description
The connection line between OLTs is solid and green.

OLTs connected
normally

The connection line between OLTs is dotted and gray.

OLTs disconnected

The connection line between OLTs is solid and red.

OLTs connected but

failed in communication

4.9.4 Viewing Links Between ONU NEs

This section introduces how to view the states of links between ONU NEs. This helps you
quickly understand the running states of links between NEs.

Version: 01 171
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Right-click an OLT NE in the main topology and select View Topology from the
shortcut menu to open the sub-topology view of the OLT NE.

2. Check the states of links between ONUs as follows.

4 When all ONUs are normally connected, their topology links are displayed in
green.

4 When a fiber cut alarm occurs on a PON port or an ONU, the topology link
affected is displayed in red. The table below describes the specific scenarios.

172 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

Scenario Where a Fiber Cut Alarm Where a Red Topology Link

Occurs Is Displayed

PON port without an optical Between the PON port and the
PON port or its connected ONU
splitter connected ONU
PON port with a Level 1 optical Between the PON port and the
PON port
splitter connected optical splitter

PON port with a Level 1 optical Between the optical splitter and
ONU
splitter connected the ONU
PON port with optical splitters Between the PON port and the
PON port
of multiple levels connected Level 1 optical splitter

PON port with optical splitters Between the last level optical
ONU
of multiple levels connected splitter and the ONU

4.10 Browsing the Topology View

In the physical topology view, you can browse the NE topology monitored by the
UNM2000 and relevant information.

Version: 01 173
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.10.1 Customizing Views

In case of too many devices in the main topology, the focused objects are not easy to locate
and view. However, you can create a custom view to only display your focused objects.

Background Information

u Each user can create up to five custom views.

u Users can only see the custom views created by themselves.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Click on the toolbar on the Main Topology tab.

2. In the Create Custom View dialog box that appears, fill in the view name and the
remarks.

3. Select Node Member→Select. In the Select Object dialog box, select the NEs to be
displayed in the custom view, and then click OK.

4. Select Link Member→Select. In the Select Object dialog box, select the NE links
to be displayed in the custom view, and then click OK.

174 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

5. Click OK in the Create Custom View dialog box.

6. In the UNM2000 alert box that appears, click Yes to switch to the custom view.

4.10.2 Checking the Physical Topology View

In the physical topology view, you can check the topology of NEs monitored by the
UNM2000 and relevant information.

Procedure

1. On the Main Topology tab, select Physical Topology View from the Current View
drop-down list.

2. The Current View window displays the information of the devices in the topology.

Subsequent Operation

Perform the following operations via the shortcut menu:

u Expand / collapse all logical domains.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Expand All
Logical Domains or Collapse All Logical Domains from the shortcut menu.

u Hide nodes.

Right-click the NE in the physical topology view and select Hidden Node from the
shortcut menu. Then the NE is not displayed in the physical topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Manage the
Hidden Nodes from the shortcut menu to open the Hide Node Management dialog
box. Then select the nodes to be displayed and click OK. The corresponding nodes are
displayed in the physical topology view.

Version: 01 175
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u According to Table 1-2, you can lock, move, zoom in or zoom out the physical
topology view by clicking the shortcut icons on the top of the view.

4.10.3 Viewing the Sub-topology View

By checking the sub-topology view, you can view the topology relationship between
various physical units of the NE, including the subrack, cards, and ports.

Procedure

1. Right-click an NE in the object tree pane or the physical topology view and select
View Topology from the shortcut menu to open the Sub-topology View tab of the
corresponding NE.

2. The Sub-topology View tab displays all the information of the NE, including the
subrack, card and the connection of ports.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations in the sub-topology view via the shortcut menu.

u Set the background image.

Right-click the blank area on the Sub-topology View tab, and select Set
Background Image or Use the Default Background Image from the shortcut
menu to set the background image of the sub-topology view.

u Set the layout style.

1) Right-click the blank area on the Sub-topology View tab, and select Layout
Mode from the shortcut menu to open the Layout Mode dialog box.

176 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

2) Adjust the layout style as required, and preview the adjustment results in the
Preview pane.

3) Click OK after the setting is completed.

u Hide nodes.

Right-click the node in the sub-topology view, and select Hidden Node from the
shortcut menu; then the selected node is not displayed in the sub-topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the sub-topology view and select Manage the Hidden
Nodes to open the Hide Node Management dialog box. Then select the nodes to be
displayed and click OK. Then the corresponding nodes are displayed in the sub-
topology view.

u Edit icons.

Right-click the node in the sub-topology view, and select Edit the Icon from the
shortcut menu. In the Edit Icon dialog box, set the size and pattern of the node icon,
and click OK.

u Table 1-2 describes how to lock, move, zoom in, and zoom out the sub-topology view
via the shortcut icons at the top part of sub-topology view.

u Add splitters.

Version: 01 177
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Right-click the PON object in the sub-topology view, and select Add Splitter from the
shortcut menu. In the Add Optical Splitter dialog box, set parameters of the splitter
and then click OK.

u Move splitters.

1) On the Sub-topology View tab, right-click a splitter and select Move Optical
Router to open the Move Optical Router dialog box.

2) In the Move Optical Router dialog box, select the desired PON port or splitter,
and click OK.

As shown below, move the splitter from PON port 8 to the splitter 2 under the
PON port 7.

178 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

4.10.4 Browsing the Bird-eye View

The Bird-eye View displays the thumbnail of the topology. In case the topology window
displays only part of the view, you can browse the full view, understand the topology
architecture as well as locate the display area of the topology view via Bird-eye View.

Procedure

1. Click on the toolbar above the topology view to open the Bird-eye view window,
which displays the thumbnail of the current topology.

Note:

In the Bird-eye view window, only the area within the purplish red frame is
displayed in the topology view. Drag this area to locate the display area of the
topology.

4.10.5 Viewing Hot-spot Regions

Prerequisite

The NE attributes and hot-spot regions are set according to Managing Customized
Attributes.

Procedure

1. Select View→Hot Region from the main menu.

2. Click a hot-spot region in the browsing tree at the left side of the Hot Region tab, and
you can view the hot-spot region topology.

Version: 01 179
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

On the Hot Region tab, you can view the sub-topology, NE manager, current alarm /
alarm history, Ping / Telnet / SSH / ICMP Ping / Tracet and NE attributes via an
NE's shortcut menu.

Related Operation

u Modify the attributes of a hot-spot region.

1) Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2) Right-click a hot spot in the browsing tree at the left side of Custom Attributes
Management and select Modify Property.

3) Modify the attributes or objects of the hot spot in the Modify Property dialog
box and click OK.

u Delete a hot-spot region.

1) Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2) Right-click a hot spot in the browsing tree at the left side of Custom Attributes
Management and select Delete Property Value.

180 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

u Transfer a hot-spot region.

1) Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2) Right-click a hot spot in the browsing tree at the left side of Custom Attributes
Management and select Transfer The Selected Object.

3) Modify the attribute name or value in the Transfer The Selected Object dialog
box, and click OK.

4.10.6 Searching Objects

You can search for and locate the object quickly via the object search functions.

Background Information

The objects include NEs, logical domains and cards.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Search Object from the main menu.

2. In the displayed Advanced Search dialog box, set the object type, search type and
search content, and then click Search.

Version: 01 181
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Select the desired object in the search result and click Localize. The Main Topology
tab will automatically go to the area that the NE locates in and mark the target object.

4.10.7 Setting the Topology

With the Topology Setting function, you can adjust the topology background, logical
domain background, NE and link display mode, and display content.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of the Physical Topology View and select Topology
Setting.

2. On the Topo Setting tab, set the topology parameters as required and click .

182 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

4.10.8 Filtering the Topology

The UNM2000 supports filtering topologies according to specified criteria, such as subnet
or NE.

Background Information

u The topology filtering settings are only applicable to the current user.

u If a user sets the filtering criteria on multiple client ends simultaneously, only the latest
setting will take effect when he restart the main topology/

Procedure

1. Right-click a blank area in the main topology and select Topo Filtering from the
shortcut menu, or select View→Topo Filtering in the main menu to open the Topo
Filter pane.

Note:

The filtering criteria are empty by default. If you have set the topology filtering
and then re-open the GUI, the latest setting remains.

2. Set Logic Name, NE Name or Link Name in the Topo Filtering pane, and then
click Filter.

Version: 01 183
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The following filters the NE whose name contains 10.171.0.34. After the filtering
conditions are set, the topology only displays this NE.

Note:

You can enter the keyword related to the region name, NE name or connection
name for filtering.

4.10.9 Sorting the Object Tree

With the object tree sorting function, you can sort the browse tree by name.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area in the left browse tree on the main topology tab and select
Sort by Name from the shortcut menu.

2. Drag an NE or a logical domain to the designated position.

3. Click at the top of the browse tree pane to save the settings.

4.10.10 Setting the Background Image

You can customize the background image of the topology by the Set Background Image
function.

Procedure

u Set the background image of the main topology.

184 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

1) Right-click in the blank area of the Main Topology tab and select Set
Background Image from the shortcut menu to open the Set Logic Domain
Background dialog box.

2) Select a logical domain in the left pane of the Set Logic Domain Background
dialog box.

3) Click Set Background, select the background image in the displayed dialog box
and click Open.

4) (Optional) Click Use Default Background to set the background image of the
logical domain to the default one.

5) Click OK to save the settings.

u Set the background image of the sub-topology.

1) Right-click an NE in the main topology and select View Topology from the
shortcut menu to open the Sub-topology View tab of the NE.

2) Right-click in the blank area of the Sub-topology tab and select Set
Background Image from the shortcut menu.

3) Select the desired background image in the displayed dialog box and click Open.

4) (Optional) Right-click in the blank area of the Sub-topology tab and select Use
the Default Background Image from the shortcut menu to set the background
image of the sub-topology as the default background image of the system.

4.11 Deleting the Topology

Typically, you need to delete the objects in the network topology before adjusting the
topology.

4.11.1 Deleting a Global Logical Domain

When adjusting the network topology, you can delete the subnet logical domain that is no
longer needed from the topology view. After a logical domain is deleted, the objects in this
logical domain will be moved to its upper-level logical domain.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: 01 185
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Right-click in the logical domain of the main topology window and select Delete from
the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

4.11.2 Deleting NEs

When an incorrect NE is created or an NE is changed due to network adjustment, you can

delete the NE on the UNM2000. Deleting an NE leads to loss of all information related to
the NE in the UNM2000; however, this does not influence the running of the device.

Background Information

u The UNM2000 provides batch deletion of NEs, and you can select and delete multiple
NEs.

u Deleting NEs will delete the alarms, performance and configuration data of the NE
simultaneously.

u Deleting NEs will delete all cards, ports, connected ONUs and related alarms,
performance and configurations under the NE.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

u Delete a single NE.

1) Right-click the desired NE and select Delete from the shortcut menu.

2) Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the selected NE.

u Delete multiple NEs.

1) Select Resource→Batch Delete NE from the main menu.

2) In the Select an NE dialog box, select the desired NEs and click OK.

3) Click OK in the displayed warning alert box to delete the selected NEs and their
connected ONUs.

186 Version: 01
 4 Topology Management

4.11.3 Deleting Shelves

This section introduces how to delete shelves.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In Device Tree of the NE Manager, right-click the desired shelf and select Delete
Subrack from the shortcut menu.

2. Click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

4.11.4 Deleting a Card

In case of network configuration change or modifying the card configuration of the NE is

required, you can delete the card from the NE.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager from
the shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. Delete the card.

4 Delete all cards.

a) Right-click the subrack in the device tree and select Delete All Cards from
the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

4 Delete a single card

a) Right-click the desired card in the device tree and select Delete Card from
the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

Version: 01 187
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

5.5 describes how to authorize cards and delivery configuration to device.

4.12 Failure Cases

This chapter introduces the failure cases of the UNM2000.

4.12.1 Causing Database Service Crash by Card Upgrade

Failure Description

Upgrading the card leads to database service crash.

Possible Reason

The following reasons may result in this problem after troubleshooting:

The query sentence SELECT DISTINCT ctaskno FROM t_pmcollectobjinfo WHERE

cneid = 13172736; makes the database (MySQL 5.7.18) service crash.

Summary and Suggestion

Summary:The query with DISTINCT will result in the MySQL bug which is related to the
Windows operating system due to lack of the SP1 patch for the Windows 2008 R2.

Suggestion:Before installing the server software on the Windows Server 2008 R2

Standard system, install the SP1 patch.

188 Version: 01
5 NE Management

This section introduces the NE management of the UNM2000.

5.1 NE Manager GUI

The NE Manager GUI is the main GUI for managing the devices. You can perform
operations based on NEs as well as configure, manage and maintain the NEs, cards or ports
separately. You can select the corresponding operation object and the corresponding
function in the main menu of the NE manager to search for and use the related
configuration items of the function.

Access Method

Double-click an NE in the main topology, or right-click the NE and select Open NE

Manager from the shortcut menu to access the NE Manager GUI, as shown in Figure 5-1.

Version: 01 189
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

(1) Toolbar (2) Main menu

(3) Alarm statistical panel (4) Shelf view

(5) Display pane (6) Common command pane

(7) Device tree pane

Figure 5-1 NE Manager GUI

5.2 Configuring Local Services

The following introduces the access method and GUI layout of the NE service
configuration function.

Access Method

Right-click an NE in the main topology and select Local Service Config or access NE
Manager and select Configuration→Local Service Configuration to open the Local
Service Configuration tab.

190 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

GUI Introduction

The Local Service Configuration GUI includes the Operational Tree pane, the Local
Service Configuration tab and the Operation Information pane, as shown in Figure 5-2.

(1) Operational tree pane (2) Service configuration pane (3) Operation information pane

Figure 5-2 Local Service Configuration GUI

5.3 Viewing the ONU List

You can view the ONU details and configure the ONUs.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-

click an NE in the left browse tree of the main topology and select ONU List from the
shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

Note:

The ONU list allows you to view the software / hardware version information of
ONUs.

2. You can perform the following operations as needed.

Version: 01 191
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The following uses Port Service Config, Service Configuration and View
Details as an example to introduce how to perform the operations.

4 Port Service Config

On the ONU List tab, select an entry and click Port Service Config to view the
port type of the ONU service and the number of ports of different types.

4 Service Configuration

On the ONU List tab, select an entry and click Service Configuration to access
the designated ONU service configuration tab and perform the service
configuration of the ONU.

192 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Note:

Right-click the designated configuration option in Operational Tree and select

Favorite from the shortcut menu to save this option in the favorite folder, so
that the user can find it quickly next time. Select Cancel Favorite to remove
this option from the favorite folder.

4 View Details

Click View Details to view the detailed information of the specified ONU,
including ONU Port Panel, ONU Information, ONU Service Information,
LAN Port Status Information, ONU MAC address, ONU Callback
Information and QINQ Domain Attach Information.

Version: 01 193
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.4 Managing ONUs

This section introduces how to copy / paste ONU port service configurations, deauthorize
ONUs, add users, mark ONUs and reset ONUs.

5.4.1 Copying / Pasting Port Service Configurations

This section introduces how to copy and paste ONU port service configurations.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-

click an NE in the left browse tree of the main topology and select ONU List from the
shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an entry and select Port Service Config from the shortcut menu.

3. Expand Data Port or Voice Port in the left browse tree of the Port Service Config
tab.

4. Right-click a port and select Copy Port Configuration.

5. Right-click a port and select Paste the Port Config and send to device.

5.4.2 Deauthorizing ONUs

This section introduces how to deauthorize ONUs.

194 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Background Information

u Deauthorize (database): Deauthorizes the ONU from the EMS database without
issuing commands to the device.

u Deauthorize an ONU: Issues the "Deauthorize ONU" command to the device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Deauthorize:

4 Deauthorize (database): Right-click an entry and select Unauthorize (database)

from the shortcut menu.

4 Deauthorize an ONU: Right-click an entry and select ONU Deauthorization

from the shortcut menu.

3. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

5.4.3 Adding Users

This section introduces how to add ONU users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select New User.

3. In the New User dialog box, set the basic information of the user and click OK.

Version: 01 195
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

User Address is required.

Related Operation

u View the information of the ONU user:

1) On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

2) View the user information in the Attribute pane.

u Delete ONU users:

1) On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

2) Modify the user information in the Attribute pane.

3) Click to save the settings.

u Modify the information of the ONU user:

196 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

1) On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

2) In the Property pane, select a use and click .

3) Click to save the settings.

5.4.4 Labeling ONUs

This section introduces how to label ONUs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU and select Mark the ONU as from the shortcut menu.

3. Enter the label content in the displayed dialog box and click OK.

Related Operation

For querying labels, see Querying a Label

5.4.5 Resetting ONUs

This section introduces how to reset ONUs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 197
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU and select Reset ONU.

3. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

5.4.6 Adjusting ONU Service Types

Configuring the ONU service type can help identify the important ONUs and the
corresponding ONU alarms that require attention.

Background Information

The default alarm shielding rules of the UNM2000 are only applicable to the ordinary
ONUs. This meets multiple cities' requirements to only report ONU alarms of enterprise
customers.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU, select ONU Service Type and then Set VIP ONU or Set
Ordinary ONU from the shortcut menu.

5.4.7 Replacing ONUs

This section introduces how to replace ONUs.

Background Information

You can replace the original ONU with an unauthorized ONU under the same PON port.

198 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The unauthorized ONU exists under the same PON port.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU and select ONU Replace.

3. In the ONU Replace dialog box, set the New Physic ID.

4. Click OK.

5.4.8 Querying End-to-End Services

You can view the ONU end-to-end service and the graphical display of its signal flowchart.

Background Information

Supported Equipment Types:

u OLTs: AN5516 series (01/04/06), AN6000-17, AN6001-G16 and AN5116-06B/04B

u ONUs of the MDU type: AN5006-04P4, AN5006-11, AN5006-12, AN5006-20,

AN5006-30, AN5006-15, AN5006-16, AN5172-8GR, AN5220, AN5506-10-B. The
THA-EDFA does not support viewing the end-to-end service path.

Procedure

1. Right-click an NE in the main topology and select ONU List from the shortcut menu.

2. On the ONU List tab of the NE Manager, right-click an ONU and select OnuPort
Service Query.

3. On the OnuPort Service Query tab, view the service parameter information at the
ONU side and OLT side.

4. Click a service and view the details of the service in the lower pane.

Version: 01 199
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.5 Authorizing Cards

Users need to authorize the cards of the equipment.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE manager GUI, select Configuration→Set Card

Authentication to display the Set Card Authorization tab to view the authorization
information of cards.

2. Configure the card authorization according to the parameter description in Table 5-1
and button description in Table 5-2.

Table 5-1 Parameters

Parameter Meaning
EMS Configuration The type of card configured in the UNM2000.

Device Configuration The type of card stored in the device RAM memory.

Actual Configuration The type of card physically inserted into the device.

200 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Table 5-2 Buttons

Button Operation

Set the EMS configuration as the card configuration.

Set the device configuration as the card configuration.

Set the actual configuration as the card configuration.

Add all cards.

Delete all cards.

Hide empty slots.

3. After completing the card authorization, click to deliver the configuration to the
device.

5.6 Authorizing ONUs

You can perform ONU authorization related operations, including configuring the
authentication mode of the PON port or the ONU, authorizing the ONU, replacing the ONU
logical identifier and viewing authorized ONU list.

5.6.1 Configuring the ONU Whitelist

You can query the information of the authorized ONUs and pre-authorize the unauthorized
ONUs. Services can be authorized and provisioned only for the ONUs in the white list.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The PON port authorization type of the OLT device is configured.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→ONU Whitelist from the main menu

of the NE manager to open the ONU Authorization View tab, displaying the
information of the authorized ONUs.

Version: 01 201
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Modify the ONU whitelist information: Select an entry, double-click Slot No., PON
No., ONU Type, ONU No., or Enable/Disable, and select the corresponding value
from the drop-down list or manually enter the value.

Pre-authorizing the ONU

1. Click on the ONU Authorization View tab. In the displayed dialog box, enter the
number of ONU(s) to be pre-authorized and click OK.

2. Set the parameters of the ONU(s) to be pre-authorized according to the PON port
authentication mode.

3. Click on the ONU Authorization View tab to deliver the pre-authorization data
to the device.

5.6.2 Managing ONU Authentication Modes

You can view and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single PON
port, card or device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→ONU Authentication Mode from

the main menu of the NE manager.

202 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

2. Select the object in the Switch Objects (ONU Authentication Mode) dialog box
that appears, and click OK.

3. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Auth Type field of
this ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the drop-down list.
Table 5-3 describes the authentication modes.

Table 5-3 Description of the ONU Authentication Modes

Authentication Mode Description

Physical address
Authenticates the ONU based on its MAC address.
authentication
Logical SN authentication:
enable the ONU MAC
Turn on this switch to set the ONU that is already authenticated based on
automatic replacement
its SN to be authenticated based on its MAC address.
function in the logical SN
authentication mode
Logical SN authentication:
disable the ONU MAC
Turn on this switch, and the ONU can be authenticated only based on its
automatic replacement
SN. It cannot be authenticated based on its MAC address.
function in the logical SN
authentication mode

Version: 01 203
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 5-3 Description of the ONU Authentication Modes (Continued)

Authentication Mode Description

GPON password
authentication: enable the
ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch to set the ONU that is already authenticated based on
replacement function in the GPON password to be authenticated based on its MAC address.
GPON password
authentication mode
GPON password
authentication: disable the
ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch, and the ONU can be authenticated only based on
replacement function in the GPON password. It cannot be authenticated based on its MAC address.
GPON password
authentication mode

4. After the settings are completed, click to deliver the configurations to the device.

5.6.3 Managing PON Port Authentication Modes

You can view and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single PON
port.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→PON Port Authentication Mode

from the main menu of the NE manager.

2. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Authentication

Mode field of this ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the drop-
down list.

204 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

3. After the settings is completed, click to deliver the configuration to the device.

5.6.4 Replacing the ONU Logical Identifier

When an ONU using the authentication based on logical ID is faulty, you can replace it with
an ONU of the same type, and set the logical ID of the new ONU to that of the faulty ONU.
The services on the original ONU will be automatically downloaded to the new ONU, and
service configuration is not required.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→Replace the ONU Logic ID from the

main menu of the NE manager to open the ONU Authorization View tab.

2. Click and enter the number of rows to be added in the dialog box that appears.
Then click OK.

3. Set the parameters accordingly.

Version: 01 205
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. After the settings are completed, click to deliver the configurations to the device.

5.6.5 Viewing the Authorized ONU Information

You can view the authorized ONU information.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→ONU Authentication→

Authorized ONU Information from the main menu to display the Switch Object
(Authorized ONU Information) dialog box.

2. Select a card or port and click OK to view the information of the authorized ONU
connected to the card or port. Table 5-4 describes the Status column on the ONU
Authorization View tab.

206 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Table 5-4 ONU Authorization Status

Status Meaning
Authorized The ONU is connected and the authorization information is sent to the ONU.
The ONU is disconnected and the authorization information is saved in the network
Preauthorized
management database.

Note:
You can select only one card in the Switch Object (Authorized ONU
Information) dialog box.

Other Operations

Replace the selected object.

1. On the ONU Authorization View tab, click .

2. In the displayed Switch Object (Authorized ONU Information) dialog box, reselect
the desired card or PON port and click OK. The ONU Authorization View tab
displays the information of the authorized ONUs corresponding to the selected object.

5.6.6 Detecting ONUs by PON Port Automatically

You can view and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single PON
port.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→Switch of PON Auto Sense ONU

from the main menu of the NE manager.

2. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Switch field of this
ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the drop-down list.

Version: 01 207
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. After the settings is completed, click to deliver the configuration to the device.

5.7 Synchronizing ONUs Manually

You can manually synchronize the ONU authorization information on the device to the
UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the NE Manager, select Configuration→Manual ONU Synchronization from the

main menu. The Manually synchronizing the ONU succeeded alert box appears at
the lower right corner, indicating that the ONU authorization information on the device
is synchronized to the UNM2000.

5.8 Synchronizing ONU Port Description Manually

You can manually synchronize the ONU port description from the device to the UNM2000
or from the UNM2000 to the device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

208 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. Synchronize information from the device to the UNM2000: Right-click an NE on the

device tree of the NE manager and select Manual Port Description
Synchronization→Synchronization From Device to synchronize the ONU
authorization information from the device to the UNM2000.

2. Synchronize information from the UNM2000 to the device: Right-click an NE on the

device tree of the NE manager and select Manual Port Description
Synchronization→Synchronization From NMS to synchronize the ONU
authorization information from the UNM2000 to the device.

5.9 Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port

You can set the automatic enabling and disabling time period of the ONU port, which is
convenient for you to remotely manage the time period in which the ONU port can be used.

5.9.1 Viewing Rule Tasks

You can view the port enabling rule tasks already set in the system to understand the object
source, execution result and other related information of each task.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane to view
the existing tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the task type, execution type, task progress, task
status, execution result and start time of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Version: 01 209
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.9.2 Creating Rule Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and then select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5.9.3 Executing Rule Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the ONU port enabling rule tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane to view
the existing tasks.

3. Right-click the desired rule task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
click the task and then click the Execute Now button at the bottom of the tab to
execute the ONU port enabling rule task.

210 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Other Operations

Right-click a rule task and select View from the shortcut menu to view the executed object
and execution status in the lower pane.

5.10 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs

You can obtain the information of unauthorized ONUs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager, select Configuration→Obtain Unauthorized ONU from the

main menu to display the Switch Object(Unauthorized ONU List) dialog box.

2. Select a desired PON port and click OK. The ONU Authorization View tab appears,
displaying the unauthorized ONUs.

Subsequent Operation

u Click to read the information of unauthorized ONUs from the device.

u Click to open the Switch Object (Unauthorized ONU List) dialog box and
reselect the PON port to be queried.

u Click , select the range in the displayed Configure the Selection Range dialog
box and click OK to authorize the ONU on the displayed ONU Authorization tab.

5.11 Manual ONU Authorization

You can authorize the ONUs manually.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 211
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the NE manager, select Configuration→Manual ONU Authorization from the

main menu to display the Manually Authorize ONU dialog box.

2. Configure the basic information and authentication information, and click Write
Database or Write Equipment according to Table 5-5 to authorize the ONU
manually.

Table 5-5 Buttons

Button Application
It is applicable to the situation when the ONU is not physically connected.
Write Database When the ONU is connected, you can write the configuration in the
database into the device through Configuration Synchronization.

Write Equipment It is applicable to the situation when the ONU is physically connected.

5.12 Modifying SVLANs / CVLANs in a Batch Manner

You can modify SVLANs / CVLANs in a batch manner.

Background Information

As modifying SVLANs / CVLANs of ONUs one by one is inefficient, the UNM2000 now
supports modifying SVLANs / CVLANs of ONUs in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→Batch Modify SVLAN/CVLAN from the main menu of the

NE manager.

2. In the displayed dialog box, select the device and click OK.

3. Click Batch Modify on the Batch Modify SVLAN/CVLAN tab.

212 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

4. In the Batch Modify dialog box, click Add to add one or more entries.

5. Set SVLAN ID, New SVLAN ID, CVLAN Strategy, CVLAN ID Start and CVLAN ID
End.

Note:

When CLVAN Strategy is set to Translation, it is not required to set CVLAN

ID Start and CVLAN ID End.

5.13 OTDR Link Management

You can set parameters, perform test, view test status and deliver the test command for the
OTDR link via the OTDR link management.

Version: 01 213
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The ODMA, ODMB or ODMC card is configured.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→OTDR Link Management from the main menu in the NE

manager to open the OTDR Link Management tab.

2. Configure the parameters (taking the Port Mapping Relation as an example).

1) Select Test Config→Port Mapping Relation from the operational tree in the
NE manager.

2) Click , set the number of rows to be added in the dialog box that appears and
click OK.

3) Set the parameters such as OTDR Slot No., OTDR Port No., and Test Port No..

4) Click to save data to the database.

3. Execute the manual test.

1) Select Test→Manual Test from the operational tree in the NE manager.

2) Select the tested object in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

3) After the test is completed, view the test result in Export.

Other Operations

u View test history:

1) Select Test→Test Records from the operational tree in the NE manager.

2) Set the query criteria in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

3) View the test history data on the Test Records tab.

u Read the connection status of the OTDR card / optical link / remote device from the
device. The following takes querying optical link status as an example.

1) Select Test State→Find Optical Link Status from the operational tree in the
NE manager.

2) Click to read the device status.

214 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

3) View the results on the Find Optical Link Status tab.

u Reboot a device or card. The following takes rebooting a remote device as an example.

1) Select Commands→Remote Device Reset from the operational tree in the NE

manager.

2) Set the ODTR slot number and port number on the Remote Device Reset tab.

3) Click to deliver the command to the device.

5.14 System Maintenance

This section introduces the system maintenance functions newly added in this version.

5.14.1 Upgrading the System Software

This section introduces how to upgrade the system software for an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The upgrade package is saved in a directory on the FTP server.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager, select Configuration→System Maintenance

→System Software Update to open the System Software Update dialog box.

Version: 01 215
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Set the parameters referring to the table below.

Parameter Description
Select File Type Select the type of the software to be upgraded.

Slot Select the slot housing the card to be upgraded.

XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the upgrade package is saved.

Enter the directory where the upgrade package is saved on the FTP server.
File Path When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory here. The default
path is the root directory of the FTP server.

File Name Select the upgrade package to be used.

3. Click Update System Software to upgrade the system software. After the upgrade is
complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt Message.

5.14.2 Backing Up the System Software

This section introduces how to back up the system software for an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

216 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager, select Configuration→System Maintenance

→System Software Backup to display the System Software Backup tab.

2. In the drop-down box of XFTP Server, select an XFTP server where the backup file is
saved.

3. Click Backup System Software to back up the system software.

4. When the backup is complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt
Message. You can view the backup file in the specified path on the XFTP server.

5.14.3 Exporting a Configuration File

This section introduces how to export the configuration file of an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The name of the file to be exported is obtained.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System Maintenance

→Export Configuration File to display the Export Configuration File tab.

Version: 01 217
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Set the parameters referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

XFTP Server Select the XFTP server where the exported file is saved.

Repeated Times Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 10 to set the number of retries.

Export File Name Enter the name of the file to be exported.

3. Click Export Configuration File. A progress bar Exporting Configuration File is

shown in the lower part of the window. When the export is complete, the execution
result will be displayed in Prompt Message.

Other Operations

Click XFTP Server Setting to open the XFTP Server Setting window. You can set the
related parameters of the XFTP server.

5.14.4 Importing a Configuration File

This section introduces how to import the configuration file of an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The name of the file to be imported is obtained.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System Maintenance

→Import Configuration File to open the Import Configuration File window.

218 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

2. Set the parameters referring to the table below.

Parameter Description

XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the configuration file is saved.

Enter the directory where the configuration file is saved on the FTP server.
File Path When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory here. The
default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

Select a file to be imported. When Show All is selected, configuration files of

File Name
all types will be displayed.

3. Click Import Configuration File to import the selected configuration file. When the
import is complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt Message.

5.14.5 Comparing Configuration Files

This section introduces how to compare configuration files for an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u You have obtained the name of the file to be compared.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System Maintenance

→Compare Config File to display the Compare Config File tab.

Version: 01 219
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Set the parameters of the first configuration file referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the configuration file is saved.

Enter the directory where the configuration file is saved on the FTP server.
File Path When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory here. The
default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

Select the file to be compared. Files in txt format are shown by default. If
Configuration File
Show All is selected, configuration files of all types will be displayed.

3. Select a comparison mode as needed.

4 Compare the configuration file with the current configuration of the NE.

a) Click Compare to Current Configuration to compare the configuration

file with the current configuration on the device. After the comparison is
complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt Message.

b) When the comparison is completed successfully, the Configuration

Comparison Results dialog box appears to display the detailed comparison
result.

4 Compare the configuration file with another.

a) Click Select Configuration to Compare to open the Select

Configuration dialog box.

b) Set the parameters of the second configuration file in the same way that you
set the first one.

c) Click OK to compare the first configuration file with the second one. After
the comparison is complete, the execution result will be displayed in
Prompt Message.

220 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

d) When the comparison is completed successfully, the Configuration

Comparison Results dialog box appears to display the detailed comparison
result.

5.14.6 Upgrading an ONU

This section introduces how to upgrade an ONU.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The upgrade package is saved in a directory on the FTP server.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System Maintenance

→Update ONU to display the Update ONU tab.

2. Set the parameters referring to the following table.

Parameter Description
Select File Type Select the type of the software to be upgraded.

Select the ONU to be upgraded.

1. Click to open the Select ONU dialog box.
Select ONU
2. Select the ONU type and model.
3. Click OK.
XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the upgrade package is saved.

Version: 01 221
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Parameter Description
Enter the directory where the upgrade package is saved on the FTP server.
File Path When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory here. The
default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

File Name Select the file to be upgraded.

3. Click Update ONU. A progress bar Updating ONU is displayed in the lower part of
the window. When the upgrade is complete, the execution result will be displayed in
Prompt Message.

Note:

During ONU upgrade, the Update ONU window becomes modeless. You can
perform other operations at the same time.

5.15 Operation and Maintenance Management

This section introduces the operation and maintenance management functions newly added
in this version.

5.16 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can set the NE automatic discovery task to automatically discover the NEs in the
specified IP range and then synchronize the NEs to the UNM2000 so as to automatically
create NEs in the UNM2000.

5.16.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can specify an IP address range within which NEs are to be discovered automatically.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

222 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Resource→Auto NE Discovery or select System→Policy

Task Management→Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task to view the
existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

2. Double-click a task entry, or right-click a task entry and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu. You can view the related information of this task, such as execution
cycle, execution time, and IP address range.

Subsequent Operation

u Right-click a corresponding task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute
the NE automatic discovery task.

u Right-click an NE that is discovered automatically in the right pane, and select Create
Selected NE or Create All from the shortcut menu to automatically save the NE data
in the UNM2000.

5.16.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task

When changes are made to IP segments managed by the UNM2000 and new device NEs
are added in these IP segments, you can create NE automatic discovery tasks to enable the
UNM2000 to manage the devices in the entire network.

Version: 01 223
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu to access the Auto
Detect NE Task GUI.

2. Click the Create button at the bottom of the tab, or right-click Auto Detect NE Task
in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and select Create from the shortcut
menu to open Create Auto Detect NE Task dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information and Extend information tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

224 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

4. Click the new NE automatic discovery task in the left pane to view the IP address, NE
type and status.

5.17 Configuring NEs in Batches

The UNM2000 supports configuring access NEs in batches, including calibrating time,
synchronizing alarms and saving configurations to Flash in batches.

5.17.1 Calibrating Time in Batches

The UNM2000 can calibrate NE time in a batch manner, improving operation efficiency.

Prerequisite

You have configured the UNM2000 server address in SNMP System Time Config for
NEs.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Batch Configuration→NE Batch Timing from the main

menu to open the NE Batch Timing page on the NE Batch Configuration tab.

2. Click Batch Timing in the right pane to open the Select NE dialog box.

3. In the Select NE dialog box, select a desired logical domain or desired NEs and click
OK.

4. Click Yes in the displayed alert box to execute the time calibration command.

Note:

When the batch command is being executed, you can click Stop to suspend the
operation.

5. When the batch command is executed successfully, view the time calibration result in
the NE Batch Timing page.

Version: 01 225
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6. (Optional) To calibrate NE time again, select desired objects and click Restart. Click
Yes in the displayed alert box.

5.17.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches

In case of network interruption or other failures, alarm data in the UNM2000 may be
inconsistent with those on NEs. In this version, NE alarms can be synchronized to the
UNM2000 in a batch manner.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Batch Configuration→NE Batch Alarm Synchronization

from the main menu to open the NE Batch Alarm Synchronization page on the NE
Batch Configuration tab.

2. Click Batch Synchronization in the right pane to open the Select NE dialog box.

3. In the Select NE dialog box, select a desired logical domain or desired NEs and click
OK to deliver the alarm batch synchronization command.

226 Version: 01
 5 NE Management

Note:

When the batch command is being executed, you can click Stop to suspend the
operation.

4. When the batch command is executed successfully, view the alarm batch
synchronization result in the NE Batch Alarm Synchronization page.

5. (Optional) To synchronize NE alarms again, select desired objects and click Restart.

5.17.3 Saving Configurations to Flash in Batches

The UNM2000 can save NE configurations to Flash in a batch manner, improving

operation efficiency.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Batch Configuration→NE Batch Save To Flash from the

main menu to open the NE Batch Save To Flash page on the NE Batch
Configuration tab.

2. Click Batch Save in the right pane to open the Select NE dialog box.

Version: 01 227
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. In the Select NE dialog box, select a desired logical domain or desired NEs and click
OK.

4. Click Yes in the displayed alert box to execute the command of saving configurations
to Flash.

Note:

When the batch command is being executed, you can click Stop to suspend the
operation.

5. When the batch command is executed successfully, view the configuration saving
result in the NE Batch Save To Flash page.

6. (Optional) To save NE configurations again, select desired objects and click Restart.
Click Yes in the displayed alert box.

228 Version: 01
6 Alarm Management

The alarm is the main information source for knowing about the operating condition of the
equipment and the fault isolation. You need to monitor and handle alarms in a timely
manner, so as to ensure the normal operation of the network.

6.1 Basic Concepts

This section introduces the basic concepts related to alarm management, including alarm
browsing, alarm notification mode, alarm level, alarm classification, current alarm, alarm
history, alarm and event, alarm statistics and alarm saving, facilitating you in alarm
processing.

Alarm Browsing

By browsing alarms, the network maintainer can understand the running status of the
network devices and the UNM2000 timely. The alarm browsing operation includes
browsing the current alarms or alarm history of the UNM2000, NEs, cards and services, as
well as synchronizing, verifying and confirming the alarms.

u Browsing alarms:You can browse the alarms of the devices or services in the
UNM2000 to understand the running status of the network or device.

4 Browsing current alarms:Browses the current alarms of all levels of the entire
network.

4 Browsing the alarms of the specified NE:By selecting the device in the main
topology, you can browse the current alarms of the selected device quickly.

4 Browsing the alarm log:By browsing the alarms which meet the query condition,
you can browse the required alarm information quickly.

u Confirming alarms:If an alarm is confirmed, the alarm is processed. You can select the
desired alarm and confirm it in the current alarm window.

4 Manual confirmation:You can select the desired alarm and confirm it in the
current alarm window.

Version: 01 229
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Automatic confirmation:You need to enable the alarm automatic confirmation

function. After an alarm is processed, the UNM2000 will clear the alarm
immediately or at the specified time according to the settings.

u Confirming and clearing alarms: You can select the desired alarm to confirm it and
clear it at the same time in the current alarm window. This alarm will be saved in the
alarm history database.

u Synchronizing alarms: In case the UNM2000 restores from the communication

interruption with the device or the UNM2000 restarts, you need to synchronize the
alarm to ensure consistent alarms in the UNM2000 and on the device. The UNM2000
will check whether the alarms in the UNM2000 database and on the NE device are
consistent. If not, the alarms on the NE device will be synchronized to the UNM2000
database and overwrite the alarms in the database.

u Checking alarms: Checks whether the current alarm at the UNM2000 side exists in the
current alarms at the NE side. If yes, the alarms at the UNM2000 side keep unchanged.
If not, the UNM2000 clears the alarm.

u Refreshing alarms: Obtains the latest alarms from the UNM2000 alarm database and
displays them at the client.

u Clearing alarms: Clears the alarms from the current alarm database of the UNM2000
and from the NE and saves them to the alarm history database.

u Filtering alarms: You can set the filter conditions to filter the alarm not focused in the
alarm browsing window.

u Alarm remarks: Adds remarks for the alarms already processed, convenient for alarm
management.

Alarm Notification Mode

Obtaining the alarm information timely is very important to alarm processing and network
maintenance. The UNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm notification.

u Alarm indicator color:The UNM2000 uses the changes of the alarm indicator LEDs to
help you quickly locate the alarmed object. By default, the alarm indicator of the
UNM2000 indicates critical alarms in red, major alarms in orange, minor alarms in
yellow and alert alarms in blue. You can customize the colors of the alarm indicator to
indicate alarms of different levels.

230 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

u Alarm sound:The UNM2000 client provides the audible and visual alarm when it is
connected to the alarm box device. You can determine the level of the reported alarm
according to the indicator color and sound of the alarm box. Upon the reporting of a
new alarm, the UNM2000 immediately triggers the alarm box to play the alarm sound
and the corresponding alarm indicator flickers.

u Remote alarm notification:The UNM2000 provides the following two ways of remote
alarm notification for users who are not on site.

4 Sends alarms via email automatically to the specified users.

4 Sends alarms via SMS automatically to the specified users.

Alarm Level

Alarm levels are used to identify the severity, importance and urgency of the alarms. The
UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the following four levels in terms of severity:critical
alarms, major alarms, minor alarms and warning alarms. The alarms of different levels have
different meanings and should be processed differently, as shown in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Description and Handling Method of Alarms of Different Levels

Alarm Level Meaning Handling Method

Indicates the alarms on the failures that are

Critical alarm global or may cause corruption of NEs and Handled urgently.
services.
Indicates the alarms on the failures of cards
Major alarm Processed timely.
or services in a certain range.

Indicates the alarms on failures of general Alarm reason should be found timely
Minor alarm
cards or services. to eliminate the failure.
Indicates the alarms that may influence the
service quality of devices or resources other
Warning alarm than system performance and service. Some Handled accordingly.
of them are just information prompting the
devices are back to normal.

Alarm Status

The alarm status includes alarm confirmation and clearance. Different handling methods
should be adopted for alarms in different status. Alarms can be divided into the following
different statuses according to whether the alarm has been confirmed or cleared.

u Unconfirmed and uncleared

Version: 01 231
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Confirmed but uncleared

u Unconfirmed but cleared

u Confirmed and cleared

Alarm Classification

Alarms can be divided into NE alarms and UNM2000 alarms according to their occurrence
locations.

u NE alarms:Indicates the alarms on the failures of NEs.

u UNM2000 alarms:Indicates the alarms on the failures of the UNM2000 environment.

Current Alarm and Alarm History

Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history. Their respective meanings are as
follows:

u Current alarms:Indicates the NE alarms saved in the current alarm database of the core
switch card or the UNM2000 alarms saved in the current alarm database of the
UNM2000.

u Alarm history:Indicates the NE alarms cleared and then saved in the alarm history
database of the core switch card or the UNM2000 alarms confirmed by users, cleared
from the current alarm database and then saved to the alarm history database.

Alarm Statistics

Alarm statistics indicates gathering the alarm data according to your desired conditions. The
alarm statistics are convenient for you to analyze the running status of the device.

Alarm Saving

If the alarm history data stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the UNM2000
operation will be influenced. The alarm data saving function can save the alarm history data
in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to improve the UNM2000
operation performance. The UNM2000 supports manual saving and overflow saving.

u Overflow saving:You can set the maximum alarm saving capacity and the UNM2000
will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history data reach the
preset capacity, the UNM2000 will save the data to a specified file to decrease its load.

232 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

u Save Manually:You can save the alarm history data in the UNM2000 to a specified file
folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving period. When the alarm
history data saved in the database reach the preset time period, the UNM2000 will save
the data to a designated file folder.

Alarm and Event

When detecting the status changes of the managed objects, the UNM2000 presents them via
alarms or events.

u The alarm indicates the notification generated when the system detects a failure.

u The event indicates any changes occurring on the managed objects.

6.2 Setting Remote Notification of Alarms

By setting the remote notification rules of alarms, alarms meeting the rules will be sent to
the maintenance personnel so that they can obtain the alarm information timely even if they
are not on site.

6.2.1 Remote Notification Panorama of Alarms

The UNM2000 can send alarms to users through messages or by emails. You can
comprehensively learn about remote notification functions through the remote notification
panorama of alarms.

Version: 01 233
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.2.2 Commissioning Alarm Notification by Emails

The following introduces how to commission the alarm notification by emails, including
parameter setting and function verification.

Background Information

u The UNM2000 server or client has been connected to the SMTP mail server.

u If the SMTP mail server requires authentication, you must have the user name and
password used to connect to the mail server.

u To ensure communication security and security of remote alarm / event notifications

sent by the UNM2000, you must ensure that the mail server (SMTP) supports TLS,
port 587 is available, and the sending client has installed the trust certificate. TLS is
recommended for encrypted transmission of remote notifications by emails.

Prerequisite

SMTP has been configured for connections and the corresponding ports are available, since
the UNM2000 needs to communicate with the mail server through the ports when sending
remote notifications by emails.

u Port 25 has been configured for the common connection mode.

u Port 587 has been configured for the TLS connection mode.

u Port 465 has been configured for the SSL connection mode.

Configuring Parameters of Alarm Notifications by Emails

You need to set parameters of alarm notifications by emails on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Select Enable Email Setting on the Email Notification tab, and set the parameters
such as E-Mail Server, Sender of the Email, Encryption Type, and Identity
Authentication according to Table 6-2.

234 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Table 6-2 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates whether to notify users of the
Enable Email Setting Select or deselect the check box.
alarm by email.

E-Mail Server Indicates the address of the email server. Enter it manually.

Sender of the Email Sets the email sender's address. Enter it manually.

Indicates the encryption type of the

Encryption Type Select the check box.
email.
Indicates the port number of the server.
Port Number Enter it manually.
Value range: 0 to 65535
Email
Notification Identity Indicates whether the identity
Select or deselect the check box.
Authentication authentication is required.

Indicates the username of the email

Username Enter it manually.
receiver.
Indicates the password for logging into
Password Enter it manually.
the mailbox.
1. Click Test....
Tests whether the alarm-related email is
Test 2. Enter the receiver's email account.
sent successfully.
3. Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

Version: 01 235
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Verifying Alarm Notifications by Emails

After parameters of alarm notifications by emails are set, verify whether the configuration is
correct and whether email notifications can be received on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Confirm that the email parameters are correctly configured and Enable Email Setting
is selected on the Email Notification tab.

4. Click Test....

5. In the Test text box, enter the email address for testing, and click OK.

4 If the system prompts Test email successfully sent, and an email titled Test
from UNM2000 is received in the mailbox, the alarm notification by emails is
correctly configured.

4 If the system prompts for anomalies, the alarm notification by emails is

incorrectly configured. Check the parameter configuration and test again.

6.2.3 Commissioning Alarm Notification Through the GSM

Modem

The following introduces how to commission the alarm notification through the GSM
modem, including parameter setting and function verification.

Prerequisite

The GSM modem has been installed and commissioned.

236 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Setting Parameters of Message Notification by the GSM Modem

After the GSM modem is installed, you need to set parameters of message notification
through the GSM model on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Communication Parameter to open the dialog box.

3. Select Enable GSM Modem Settings on the GSM Modem Settings tab, and set
parameters such as message sending device, serial port number, baud rate, and
message interval according to Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates whether to enable the
Enable GSM Select or deselect the check
GSM modem to send alarm
Modem Settings box.
messages.
GSM
Indicates the device for sending
Modem
SMS Modem messages. -
Settings
Default value: GMS Modem
Serial Port Indicates the serial port number Select an item from the drop-
Number of the GSM modem. down list.

Version: 01 237
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 6-3 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

Indicates the baud rate of signal
Baud Rate transmission for the GSM Enter it manually.
modem.
Indicates the interval of the
Message Interval Enter it manually.
alarm sending.

1. Click Test....
Tests whether the alarm message 2. Enter the phone number
Test
is sent successfully. for receiving the message.
3. Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

Verifying Message Notification by the GSM Modem

After parameters of message notification through the GSM modem are set, verify whether
the configuration is correct and whether alarm messages can be received on the UNM2000
client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Communication Parameter to open the dialog box.

3. Confirm that the GSM modem parameters are correctly configured and Enable GSM
Modem Settings is selected on the GSM Modem Settings tab,.

4. Click Test....

5. In the Test text box, enter the mobile number for testing (including the country code,
for example, +8613*********), and click OK.

4 If the system prompts that the message has been successfully sent and the test
mobile phone has received the message, the message notification through the
GSM modem is correctly configured.

4 If the system prompts for anomalies, the message notification through the GSM
modem is incorrectly configured. Check the parameter configuration and test
again.

238 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.2.4 Commissioning Message Notification Through the SMS

Gateway

The following introduces how to commission the message notification through the SMS
gateway, including parameter setting and function verification.

Prerequisite

You have obtained the IP address, port, user name, password, and coding protocol of the
SMS center.

Setting Parameters of Message Notification by the SMS Gateway

You need to configure parameters of the SMS center (SMS gateway) on the UNM2000
client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Select Enable SMS Gateway Settings on the ISMG Settings tab, and set SMS
gateway parameters according to Table 6-4.

Version: 01 239
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 6-4 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Enable SMS Indicates whether to enable the ISMG to
Select or deselect the check box.
Gateway Settings send alarm messages.

Indicates the interface protocol of the

Code Protocol Select an item from the drop-down list.
ISMG.
Click IPV4 or IPV6 to select an IP
Indicates the IP address of the host,
Host IP protocol version, and manually enter
supporting IPV4 or IPV6.
the IP address.
Indicates the port number of the host.
ISMG Settings Port Number Enter it manually.
Value range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the charged user type. Options

include charging the source (Tx)
Charging User Type Select an item from the drop-down list.
terminal, destination (Rx) terminal and
service provider.

Username Indicates the username of the ISMG. Enter it manually.

Indicates the password of the ISMG

Password Enter it manually.
user.

240 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Table 6-4 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

Indicates the number of the source
Source Number Enter it manually.
terminal.
SP Code Indicates the service provider code. Enter it manually.

Service Type Indicates the service type of the SMS. Enter it manually.

1. Click Test....
Tests whether the short message is sent 2. Enter the phone number for
Test
successfully. receiving the short message.
3. Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

Verifying Message Notification by the SMS Gateway

After parameters of message notification through the SMS gateway are set, verify whether
the configuration is correct and whether alarm messages can be received on the UNM2000
client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Confirm that the SMS gateway parameters are correctly configured and Enable SMS
Gateway Settings is selected on the ISMG Settings tab,.

4. Click Test....

5. In the Test text box, enter the mobile number for testing (including the country code,
for example, +8613*********), and click OK.

4 If the system prompts that the message has been successfully sent and the test
mobile phone has received the message, the message notification through the
SMS gateway is correctly configured.

4 If the system prompts for anomalies, the message notification through the SMS
gateway is incorrectly configured. Check the parameter configuration and test
again.

Version: 01 241
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.2.5 Setting the Alarm Notification Format

You can set the remote notification format of the alarm, including setting the email subject
and contents of the mail notification.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Message Format.

3. Set the remote notification message format.

4 In the Email Notification tab, click the Select the Field buttons in the Title and
Content panes respectively to select the subject and content fields of the mail to
be sent.

4 Select the SMS Notification tab, and click the Select the Field button to select
the content field to be sent.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default settings in
case of setting error.

242 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.2.6 Setting the Sending Delay of the Remote Alarm

Notification

Set the delayed duration to send the remote notification upon the occurrence of the alarm. If
the alarm is still not cleared after the duration, the remote notification will be sent;
otherwise, it will not be sent.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote Notification

Settings→Sending Delay.

3. Select the alarm codes needing transmission delay. You can isolate the target alarm
codes rapidly via selecting the NE type or the searching function.

Version: 01 243
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

u The remote notification for the alarm codes in the Alarm Delay Settings
will be sent with a delay of 10 seconds by default.

u You can modify the delay time interval of a certain alarm as required.

4. Click Set the Alarm Delay Time.

5. Set the alarm delay time interval and then click Apply. Update the Alarm Forward
Time of the selected alarm code to the new values set.

6. Click Apply after the settings are completed. The settings immediately take effect.

6.2.7 Setting Remote Notification Rules of the Alarm

By setting the alarm remote notification rules (including the receiver information,
notification conditions, alarm sources, and time limit), the alarms meeting the rules will be
automatically sent to the maintenance personnel so that they can obtain the alarm
information in a timely manner even if they are not on site.

244 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Notification Settings from the main menu.

2. On the Alarm Notification Setting tab, click Create Receiver Information.

3. Set the related information such as the receiver information, notification conditions,
alarm sources, and time limit as required, and click OK.

4. (Optional) In the left pane, select the corresponding receiver and modify the relevant
information if necessary in the right pane. Click Save All.

Version: 01 245
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5. (Optional) In the left pane, select the Receiver Information node, right-click the
corresponding receiver on the right pane, and select Enable / Disable.

6.2.8 Sending Remote Notification of Alarms

Through the UNM2000 client, maintainers in the equipment room can send alarms of
equipment in different regions to maintainers nearby according to the geographical
distribution, so as to ensure alarm processing in a timely manner and improve device
maintenance efficiency.

Background Information

u Manual sending of remote notifications of alarms is applicable only to current alarms.

u Email subject, email content, and message content can be set by referring to Setting the
Alarm Notification Format.

246 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

u Parameters and rules for remote notifications of alarms have been configured.

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click an NE on the main topology and select Current Alarm.

2. On the Current Alarm tab, right-click an alarm entry and select Remote Notification
→Email/Message to open the Send a Mail to Notify or Notify via SMS dialog
box.

3. Select Receiver and click OK.

6.3 Setting Alarm Rules

This section introduces how to set the alarm reporting rules and shielding rules.

6.3.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Rules

You can set the alarm reporting rules to automatically report the alarms that you concern
most. These alarms will be automatically reported to the UNM2000 upon their occurrence.
For the unnecessary alarms, you can set not to report them so as to minimize the influence
on the UNM2000 performance caused by a large number of alarms.

6.3.1.1 Viewing Alarm Reporting Rules

You can view whether the existing alarm reporting rules meet the requirements for current
network maintenance.

Version: 01 247
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingAlarm Reporting Settings from the main menu to display

the Alarm Reporting Setting tab.

2. Select Report Rule in the left pane, and view the existing reporting rules in the right
pane.

3. Click before Report Rule, select the corresponding alarm reporting rule, and then
view the related information of the rule in the right pane.

6.3.1.2 Setting Alarm Reporting Rules

When the existing alarm reporting rules cannot meet the requirements for device
maintenance, you can create alarm reporting rules as described below.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm reporting rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Reporting Settings from the main menu to display

the Alarm Report Setting tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Alarm Report Rule
dialog box.

248 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

No. Access Method

1 Click Report Rule in the left pane, and click Create in the right pane.

Select Report Rule in the left pane, right-click in the blank area in the right pane and select
2
Create from the shortcut menu.
3 Right-click Report Rule in the left pane and select Create from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Alarm Report Rule dialog box, set the alarm reporting rules as
required.

Note:

u Click Copy from Other Rule, and select the desired reporting rule in the
Select the Report Rule dialog box to copy the related information of the
selected reporting rule. This can improve the setting efficiency.

u If the continuous reporting mode is enabled, the alarms meeting the

reporting rules will be reported again after the set time interval expires.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Other Operations

Right-click an alarm reporting rule entry in the right pane and select Delete, Refresh,
Enable / Disable, Print, Copy Cell or Export from the shortcut menu to perform the
corresponding operation.

Version: 01 249
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.3.2 Managing Alarm Shielding Rules

The alarm shielding rules are used to shield some NE alarms so that you can focus on
important alarms, improving the failure solving efficiency. After the alarm shielding rules
are set, the shielded alarms are neither saved into the alarm database nor displayed.

6.3.2.1 Viewing Alarm Shielding Rules

You can view whether the existing alarm shielding rules meet the maintenance requirements
of the UNM2000 and the NE.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Shield Rule Management from the main menu to

open the Alarm Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Select View Current Alarm Shield Rule in the left pane, and view the existing
current alarm shielding rules in the right pane.

3. Click before Current Alarm Shield Rule, select the corresponding alarm shielding
rule, and view the related information of the rule in the right pane.

6.3.2.2 Setting Alarm Filter Rules

When the existing alarm filter rules cannot meet the management and maintenance
requirements of the UNM2000 and NEs, you can create alarm filter rules as described
below.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

250 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Settings→Alarm Shield Rule from the main menu to open the
Alarm Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Alarm Report Rule
dialog box.

Number Path
1 Click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane and click Create in the right pane.

Click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and
2
select Create from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane and select Create from the
3
shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Current Alarm Shield Rule dialog box, set the alarm filter rule
according to the planning.

Note:

u On the Shield Conditions tab, select the ONU service level and set the
alarm shielding rule applicable to different ONU service levels.

u Click Copy from Other Rule to open the Select Shield Rule dialog box
and select the desired filter rule to copy its rule settings. This can improve
the setting efficiency.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Version: 01 251
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click the alarm reporting rule entry in the right pane and select the Delete, Refresh,
Enable / Disable, Print, Copy Cell or Export operation.

6.3.2.3 Setting Northbound Interface Filter Rules

When some alarms need not be reported to the third-party EMS through the northbound
interface, you can set northbound interface alarm filter rules to fitter these alarms so as to
improve the alarm processing efficiency.

Background Information

u The shielding rules do not apply to the alarms already reported. They are only
applicable to the subsequent alarms matching the shielding rules.

u The filtered alarms will not be reported to the northbound interface.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingNorthbound Interface Shield Rule Management from the

main menu to open the Northbound Interface File Rule Management tab.

2. Click Create Rule.

3. In the displayed Northbound Interface Filter Rule dialog box, set the filter rules.

252 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Note:

On the Alarm Source tab, select the ONU service level and set the alarm
shielding rule applicable to different ONU service levels.

4. Click OK to add a northbound interface alarm filter rule and filter the current alarm in
specific condition. You can view the added northbound interface alarm filter rule in the
Northbound Interface File Rule Management tab.

Other Operations

On the Filter Rule of North tab, right-click a northbound interface alarm rule and select the
desired option from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operations, including
Modify Rule, Delete Rule, Disable Rule, Copy Rule, etc.

6.3.2.4 Setting Alarm Vibration Shielding Rules

When some alarms need not be reported, you can set alarm vibration shielding rules to fitter
these alarms so as to improve the alarm processing efficiency.

Background Information

u When an alarm is generated several times in the delay time, but the reporting times do
no reach the preset repetition times, the UNM2000 only displays the number of alarm
occurrence times without reporting the alarm repeatedly.

u When the reporting times of an alarm reach the preset repetition times in the delay time,
the UNM2000 only displays the number of alarm occurrence times and mark the alarm
as a vibration alarm, without reporting the alarm repeatedly.

Version: 01 253
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management from the

main menu.

2. Click Create.

3. In the Create Current Alarm Vibration Shield Rule dialog box, set the alarm level,
alarm type, alarm delay time and alarm vibration times.

4. Click OK to add an alarm filter rule and filter the current alarm in specific condition.
The newly added alarm vibration shielding rules can be viewed on the Alarm
Vibration Shield Rule Management tab.

Other Operations

In the Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management tab, right-click an alarm filter rule and
select the operations, such as Delete and Copy.

254 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.3.2.5 Setting Alarm Frequency Analysis Rules

For alarms with a large quantity but little impact in current networks (such as ONU fiber cut
alarm, power disconnection alarm and MGC link alarm), you can set the alarm frequency
analysis rules and set Handling Strategy and Triggering Conditions for different alarms.
The UNM2000 will filter the alarms or generate new alarms based on the rules.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule from the main menu to

open the Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule tab.

2. Perform the following operations.

Operation Procedure
1. In the Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule tab, select Add.
Adding an alarm
2. In the Object dialog box, set the parameters according to the planning.
frequency analysis rule
3. Click OK.
Modifying an alarm 1. Select a desired rule and click Modify.
frequency analysis rule 2. Modify the rules according to the requirements and click OK.

1. Select a desired rack and click Delete Rule.

Deleting an alarm
Note:
frequency analysis rule
Press Shift or Ctrl to select multiple rules simultaneously.
2. Click Yes in the Delete Rule alert box.
Enabling/Disabling an
alarm frequency Select a desired rule and click Enable/Disable.
analysis rule

Version: 01 255
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.4 Managing the Alarm Project Status

During engineering installation or expansion, NEs may generate alarms. After collecting the
alarms, the UNM2000 reports the alarms and dispatches the work orders. A large number of
invalid work orders affects the work order handling efficiency. After setting the managed
object to maintenance status, alarms generated by the object are reported to the UNM2000
but not to the northbound interface, thereby avoiding a large number of invalid work orders
dispatched.

6.4.1 Managing Project Status Tasks

This section introduces how to create, view, modify and delete project status tasks.

Background Information

u The UNM2000 provides default tasks. The default tasks cannot be deleted or modified,
and the task status cannot be changed.

u The managed objects of project tasks can be logical domains, NEs, cards, or ports.

u When "Project Status" of the project task is changed to "Active", the status of the
managed object is changed to "Project Status".

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Choose Alarm→Project Status Task from the main menu.

2. Perform the following operations by referring to the table below.

256 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Operation Procedure
1. Click Add at the bottom right of the Project Status Task tab.
2. Set Task Information and Device Information in the Create Project
Create a project task
Task dialog box.
3. After the settings are completed, click OK.

1. Select a project task to be modified on the Project Status Task tab,

and click Modify.
Modify a project task 2. Set Task Information and Device Information in the Modify Task
dialog box.
3. Click OK.
1. Select a project task to be deleted on the Project Status Task tab.
Delete a project task
2. Click Delete and then click Yes in the alert box.
1. Click Query on the Project Status Task tab.
Query project tasks
2. Set query criteria in the Query Project Task dialog box and click OK.

Right-click a project task with Project Status set to Active on the Project
Status Task tab, and select Stop from the shortcut menu.
Stop a project task
Note: After a project task is suspended, the object that only exists in
this project changes from Project Status to Normal.

1. Right-click a project task with Task Status set to Active on the

Project Status Task tab, and select Suspend from the shortcut menu.
Suspend a project task 2. Click Yes in the displayed alert box.
Note: After a project task is stopped, the object that only exists in
this project changes from Project Status to Normal.

1. Right-click a project task with Task Status set to Active on the

Recover a project task Project Status Task tab, and select Recover from the shortcut menu.
2. Click Yes in the displayed alert box.

1. Select a project task to be configured on the Project Status Task tab.

2. Click View Details. The managed object of the selected task is
displayed in the lower pane.
3. Configure managed objects of the project task as needed.

4 Click Add Device. In the Add Device dialog box, select an object
Configure managed
to be added to the project, and click OK.
objects of a project task
4 Select the managed object to be deleted, click Delete Device and
click Yes in the displayed alert box.

4. Select the managed object and click Query Project Status Alarm. On
the Device Alarm tab, view the project status alarm of the selected
object.

Version: 01 257
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Related Operations

u Select an NE on the Main Topology tab, or select an NE, card or port in the NE
Manager window. Then right-click to select Manage Project Status→Create
Project Task to create a project task for the selected object.

u Select an NE on the Main Topology tab, or select an NE, card or port in the NE
Manager window. Then right-click to select Manage Project Status→Add to
Project Task to add the selected object to an existing project task.

6.4.2 Managing Project Status of NEs

You can manually set the alarm maintenance status of an object on the UNM2000. By
setting the maintenance status to Project Status, you can directly identify and mask non-
concerned alarms to rapidly locate and handle important alarms.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. On the Main Topology tab, select an NE, or select an NE, a card or a port in the NE
Manager window. Then right-click to select Manage Project Status→Modify
Project Task from the shortcut menu.

2. In the Modify Project Status dialog box, set the alarm maintenance status of the
selected object, and click OK.

3. Click Close in the displayed alert box.

6.5 Setting Alarm Related Parameters

Set the alarm-related parameters, including the alarm reporting rules, alarm shielding rules,
alarm history definition and other local settings.

258 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.5.1 Setting the Audible Alarms

You can set different sounds for alarms of different levels and set the play priority of the
alarm sounds. When an alarm occurs, the loudspeaker on the computer running the client
will play the corresponding sound to notify of the reported alarm of the specific level.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→Alarm Sound in the left pane to open the
dialog box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings will take
effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

Version: 01 259
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.5.2 Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm

The following introduces how to enable / disable the audio alarm. This operation is only
valid to the current client end. The UNM2000 client will play different alarm sounds for
alarms of different levels upon their occurrence in the UNM2000 or NE. You can select
whether to enable the audio alarm in the UNM2000.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

u Disable the audio alarm.

Click to change it to .

u Enable the audio alarm.

Click to change it to .

Note:

For other setting items related to the audio alarm, see Setting the Audible
Alarms.

6.5.3 Setting the Alarm Color

You can set different colors for alarms of different levels, which is convenient for you to
browse the focused alarms.

Background Information

u After the colors corresponding to alarms of different levels are set, the alarm icons in
the topology view, alarm entries queried and alarm indicators on the alarm bulletin
board will appear in the set colors.

u The UNM2000 provides four colors corresponding to four alarm levels. Critical
alarms: ; major alarms: ; minor alarms: ; warning alarms: .

u The GUI display settings are applicable to all users at any client.

260 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings→Alarm Settings→Local Alarm→Alarm

Color dialog box.

2. In the Set a Color for the Alarm Level combo box, click on the right to select
the desired color for each alarm level.

3. In the Set the Background Color of the List Corresponding to the Alarm combo
box, click on the right to select the desired colors for different confirmation
statuses.

4. Click Apply→OK to apply the settings.

6.5.4 Setting the Display Modes of New Alarms / Events

You can set the display modes of new alarms / events as required.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→New Alarm / Event in the left pane to open
the dialog box.

Version: 01 261
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings will take
effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

6.5.5 Setting Other Items of the Local Alarms

Other local alarm settings include the alarm monitoring template, maximum number of
startup templates as well as whether to enable alarm automatic reporting upon client startup.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→Others in the left pane to open the dialog
box.

262 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings will take
effect immediately.

4. Select Alarm→Alarm Query Template Management from the main menu to view
the parameters already set.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

6.5.6 Setting the Definition of the Alarm History

You can set the delay for switching current alarms to the alarm history as required.

Background Information

When the current alarms are confirmed and cleared, they are switched to the alarm history
after the preset delay time.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Alarm History Definition in the left

pane to open the dialog box.

3. Set the delay for switching current alarms to the alarm history and then click Apply to
apply the settings.

6.5.7 Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules

For convenient maintenance, the UNM2000 provides the automatic confirmation by alarm
level or by rule for the unconfirmed but cleared alarms. You can set the automatic
confirmation rules for the cleared alarms.

Version: 01 263
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Auto Confirm in the left pane to open

the dialog box.

3. Click Add to open the dialog box.

4. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Confirming Condition, Alarm Source
and Alarm Source and Alarm Source Type tabs respectively. Then click OK to
create an automatic confirmation rule.

5. Return to the Auto Confirm dialog box, and click Apply to make the settings valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default values.

264 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.5.8 Setting Automatic Alarm Synchronization

When the automatic alarm synchronization is set, the alarms will be automatically
synchronized after the UNM2000 recovers from the communication interruption with the
NE or restarts so as to ensure the consistency of the alarms at the UNM2000 side and NE
side.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Auto Synchronization in the left pane

to open the dialog box.

Set the All alarms will be synchronized when network management service
starts up and Auto Synchronize Equipment Alarm after Communication
Interruption is Restored check boxes.

Version: 01 265
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

u Automatically synchronizing all alarms after network management services

are started: After the network management services are started, the
UNM2000 not only synchronizes alarm data of NEs, but also synchronizes
existing alarm information from the alarm services.

u Automatically synchronizing device alarms after a communication

interruption is recovered: After the communication interruption is
recovered, the UNM2000 issues a polling command to synchronize NE
alarms to the UNM2000. For IPRAN and POTN devices, the UNM2000
issues forcible synchronization commands to synchronize NE alarms to the
UNM2000.

6.5.9 Converting Events to Alarms

You can convert events into alarms by adding or deleting events in a batch manner. The
UNM2000 processes the alarms converted from events as alarms.

Prerequisite

The authority of the Event to Alarm Settings function is configured in the authority and
domain division management. Only the user properly authorized can perform this function.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingEvent to Alarm Settings from the UNM2000 main menu.

2. On the Event to Alarm Settings tab, select the desired event entries.

266 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

3. Click Save.

6.6 Managing Alarm / Event Templates

The UNM2000 supports setting the alarm / event query conditions or statistical conditions
as templates. You can use the predefined alarm / event template to quickly set the filter
conditions and attributes of alarms / events.

6.6.1 Alarm Template

The alarm template is used to save the alarm query / statistical conditions. The alarm
template simplifies the setting operation and enables you to quickly complete the settings of
the alarm browsing and alarm attributes.

The UNM2000 allows you to set the alarm templates for different objects, such as network
blocks, NEs, and cards..

The alarm templates include the following types:

u Current alarm query template

u Alarm history query template

u Alarm log query template

u Current alarm log statistical template

u Alarm history log statistical template

Version: 01 267
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Alarm filter template

The following introduces how to view, add, delete and modify various alarm templates.

6.6.1.1 Viewing Alarm Templates

You can view the alarm template already set and saved. If the current alarm template meets
your requirements for querying alarms, you can use the template directory without the need
to set the conditions.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm Query
Template Management tab.

2. Select Alarm Profile in the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management
tab, and view the quantity and attributes of various preset templates in the right pane.

3. Click the desired alarm template type and select the specific number of this type of
template to view the details.

6.6.1.2 Creating an Alarm Template

You can save the commonly used alarm query / statistics conditions as a template so that
you can directly use the template next time for the same query or statistics, without the need
to set the conditions again.

Note:

The following uses the current alarm query template as an example. You can
follow the same procedures to add other templates with the only difference in
the access method.

268 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm Query
Template Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Current Alarm
Template dialog box.

No. Access Method

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, and click Create Current
1
Alarm Template in the right pane.

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the right pane
2
and select Create Current Alarm Template from the shortcut menu.

Right-click Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane and select Create
3
Current Alarm Template from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the alarm query conditions in the Create Current Alarm Template dialog box as
needed.

Note:

Click Copy from Another Template, and select the desired alarm template in
the Select Template dialog box to copy the related information of the selected
alarm template. This can improve the setting efficiency.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, select the new alarm template
entry in the right pane and click the desired button at the bottom, or right-click the entry and
select Delete, Refresh, Print, Copy Cell or Export from the shortcut menu to perform the
corresponding operation.

Version: 01 269
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.6.1.3 Modifying an Alarm Template

When setting the alarm template, you can modify the settings in case the query condition
setting error occurs.

Note:

The following uses the current alarm query template as an example. You can
follow the same procedures to modify other templates with the only difference
in the access method.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm Query
Template Management tab.

2. Select Alarm Profile in the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management
tab, and view the quantity and attributes of various preset templates in the right pane.

3. Click the desired alarm template type and select the specific number of this type of
template to view the details.

4. Modify the relevant information of the alarm template in the right pane and click
Apply.

6.6.1.4 Setting the Template Attributes

At the UNM2000 client, you can set the alarm template as a monitoring template, startup
template or default template to facilitate monitoring, querying or gathering statistics of
alarms.

Background Information

u Default template:When you query or gather statistics of the alarms via the menu, the
UNM2000 will use this template to open the tab of the corresponding functions. Only
one default template can be set for a type of alarm templates.

270 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

u Monitoring profile:The Alarm Statistics dialog box in the toolbar of the UNM2000
client will display the alarm statistics according to this template. The monitoring
template needs to be a current alarm template. You can set five monitoring templates at
most.

Note:

After the monitoring template is set to the current template in the Alarm
Statistics dialog box, the four indicators (in different colors) on the toolbar will
display the statistics data of alarms with various levels according to the current
template.

u Monitoring profile:The Alarm Statistics dialog box in the toolbar of the UNM2000
client will display the alarm statistics according to this template. The monitoring
template need to be a current alarm template. You can set five monitoring templates at
most.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm Query
Template Management tab.

2. Set the alarm template attribute, that is, set the alarm profile to be a monitoring
template or startup template.

4 Set the alarm template as a monitoring template.

a) In the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management tab, select
Monitor Template Management.

b) Right-click in the blank area of the right pane and select Select, or click the
Select button at the lower-right corner.

c) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding alarm and
click OK to set the template as a monitoring template.

Version: 01 271
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

d) Select a monitoring template and click Delete Template Settings, or right-

click the monitoring template and select Delete Template Settings to
undo setting the alarm template as a monitoring template.

4 Set the alarm template as a startup template.

a) In the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management tab, select
Startup Template Management.

b) Right-click in the blank area of the right pane and select Select, or click the
Select button at the lower-right corner.

c) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding alarm and
click OK to set the template as a startup template.

d) Select the starting template and click Delete Template Settings, or right-
click the startup template and select Delete Template Settings to undo
setting the alarm template as a startup template.

6.6.2 Event Template

The event template simplifies the setting operation and enables you to quickly complete the
settings of the event browsing. The event template is used to save the event query or
statistical conditions.

The UNM2000 allows you to set the event templates for different objects, such as network
blocks, NEs, and cards. Monitoring and managing events can ensure the normal operation
of the network.

6.6.2.1 Viewing Event Templates

Save the frequently used event query conditions into a template, so as to use the template
for quick queries in the future.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event Query
Template tab.

2. Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane to view the existing event query
templates.

272 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

3. Click the desired event template type and select the specific entry of this type to view
the details.

6.6.2.2 Creating an Event Template

Save the frequently used event query conditions into a template, so as to use the template
for quick query in the future.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event Query
Template tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the New Event Query Template
dialog box.

No. Access Method

Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane and click Create
1
Event Query Template in the right pane.

Right-click Event Report Query Template in the left pane and select
2
Create Event Query Template from the shortcut menu.

Click Create Event Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the right
3
pane and select Create Event Query Template from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic Information, Filter Info, and Event Source tabs as
required, and click OK. Then the new event query template will be displayed in the
template list.

Note:

Click Select Template, and you can copy all settings except Template Name
from other templates. This can improve the setting efficiency.

Version: 01 273
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click the corresponding query template, and select operations such as Copy, Delete,
Refresh, Set as Default Template / Cancel Default Template, Print, Copy Cell or
Export.

Note:

The default profile (All Object) of the system cannot be copied, deleted, and
modified.

6.6.2.3 Modifying an Event Template

When setting the event template, you can modify the event query template settings in case
the query condition setting error occurs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event Query
Template tab.

2. Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane to view the existing event query
templates.

3. Click the event reporting query template to view the detailed settings of the template.

4. Modify the event query reporting template in the right pane and click Save All.

6.7 Managing Alarm Configurations

The UNM2000 supports managing alarm reporting management templates and binding
them with the devices.

274 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.7.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Templates

The UNM2000 supports creating, modifying and deleting alarm reporting templates.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

Creating Alarm Reporting Templates

1. In the NE Manager window, select .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Alarm Management→Alarm Report Manage

Profile and Bind→Alarm Report Manage Profile.

3. On the Alarm Report Manage Profile tab, click .

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the number of new alarm reporting templates and click
OK.

5. Set the template name and object type in the left pane.

6. Set whether to report the alarm upon occurrence in the right pane.

Modifying Templates in a Batch Manner

1. Click .

2. Select the desired template in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box and modify
the parameters in the Configuration Item pane.

Version: 01 275
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Deleting a Template

Select a template and click .

6.7.2 Binding Alarm Reporting Templates

The UNM2000 supports binding alarm reporting templates with objects.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the NE Manager window, select .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Alarm Management→Alarm Report Manage

Profile and Bind→Alarm Report Manage Profile Bind.

3. Select the desired object in the left device tree and set the template name in the drop-
down list in the right pane.

4. Click to deliver the configuration to the device.

5. Batch settings: Select multiple objects, click and set the templates in the
Configure Template in Batch Manner dialog box.

6.8 Synchronizing Alarms

Synchronizing alarms includes synchronizing the current alarms of NEs and the UNM2000.
With this function, you can synchronize the alarms at the NE side with those at the
UNM2000 side and synchronize the current alarms of the UNM2000 with the alarms in the
alarm database of the UNM2000. The UNM2000 supports manual alarm synchronization.

6.8.1 Synchronizing Alarms Manually

In case of network interruption, the alarms at the UNM2000 side may be inconsistent with
those at the NE side. To actually reflect the alarm data of the NEs, you can synchronize the

276 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

alarms of the selected NEs to the UNM2000 so as to ensure the alarm data at the UNM2000
and at the NE side are consistent.

Background Information

Generally, the UNM2000 will automatically synchronize the alarm data at the NE side with
those at the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Right-click the object in the main topology and select Open NE Manager from the
shortcut menu to access the NE Manager GUI.

2. Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select Manual Alarm
Synchronization from the shortcut menu. Then click Close in the displayed alert box.
The manual alarm synchronization is completed.

6.8.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches

In case of network interruption or other failures, alarm data on the UNM2000 may be
inconsistent with those on NEs. In this version, NE alarms can be synchronized to the
UNM2000 in a batch manner at the scheduled time, and reported to a third-party platform
via northbound interfaces.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides default alarm batch synchronization tasks, which cannot be deleted.
You can modify the attributes of a task as needed.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Administrator Group authority or higher.

u You have turned on the switch for synchronizing alarms in batches as follows.

1) Access the D:\unm2000\server\etc directory and open the platform-options.

ini file.

2) Search for BatchSyncAlarm and set enable to true.

Version: 01 277
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3) After the parameters are set, restart the EMS services.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Batch Sync Alarm Task in the left pane to view
existing alarm batch synchronization tasks.

3. Select one of the following access methods to open the Property dialog box of an
alarm batch synchronization task.

4 Double-click a desired alarm batch synchronization task in the right pane.

4 Right-click a desired alarm batch synchronization task in the right pane and select
Attribute from the shortcut menu.

4 Click before Batch Sync Alarm Task in the left pane, right-click a desired
alarm batch synchronization alarm task in the right pane and select Attribute
from the shortcut menu.

4. Set the attributes of the alarm batch synchronization task referring to Table 6-5, and
click OK.

Table 6-5 Settings of an Alarm Batch Synchronization Task

Parameter Description

Task name Name of the alarm batch synchronization task, which cannot be edited.

Status of the task. It is disabled by default.

Enable u Select: Enable the task.
u Deselect: Disable the task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 365.
Task Type
u Every week: Select the effective days in every week.
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every month.

Execution time of a periodic task.

Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

End time of a periodic task. It is valid after being selected.

End time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

278 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

5. (Optional) After the task is executed successfully, you can view the execution result in
the lower right pane.

6.9 Monitoring Network Alarms

By monitoring the network alarms, you can know the operating status of the network in a
timely manner.

The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the current alarms and the alarm history according
to the alarm statuses.

u Current alarm: The alarm data saved in the current alarm database of the UNM2000.

The same alarm frequently generated by an object will be displayed as one entry in the
current alarm list. You can view the alarm log to query all the alarm records.

u Alarm history: The current alarms that have been cleared and those confirmed and
cleared will be added into the alarm history after a preset period.

The alarm history will be saved into the alarm history database from the current alarm
database. See Setting the Definition of the Alarm History regarding how to set the
delay time for transferring the current alarms to the alarm history.

6.9.1 Viewing Current Alarms

You can view the current alarms of the entire network or a certain object, so as to analyze
the alarm information and perform the troubleshooting.

Procedure

1. Select one of the access methods in Table 6-6 to open the Query Current Alarm
dialog box.

Note:

If you have set a default template for querying current alarms, you can select
one of the following access methods to directly open the Current Alarm tab
and display alarm information queried by the default template.

Version: 01 279
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 6-6 Access Methods for Viewing Current Alarms

Operation Access Method

Select Alarm→Current Alarm from the main menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane, and select Current Alarm
from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the topology view, and select Current Alarm

Viewing current from the shortcut menu.

alarms In the NE manager window, select Alarm→Current Alarm from the main menu.

In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the corresponding
card or port, and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.

In the Subrack View pane of the NE manager window, right-click the

corresponding card, and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.

2. Set query conditions in the Query Current Alarm dialog box and click OK.

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Query Current Alarm dialog box, you
can click Save As template to save the query conditions as a template. You
can use this template directly for querying according to the same conditions next
time, without repeated settings.

3. Re-set the query condition to view the current alarms.

4 Select a template to query current alarms.

a) On the Current Alarm tab, click Query by Template in the lower part.

b) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding template and
click OK to view the alarm information queried by the selected template.

4 Set the query condition to view the current alarms.

a) On the Current Alarm tab, click Query in the lower part.

b) Reset the query conditions in the Query Current Alarm dialog box as
needed.

c) After completing the settings, click OK to view the current alarms meeting
the conditions.

280 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper left corner of the Current Alarm tab to perform
the following operations.

4 Click to set whether to automatically report updated alarms.

4 Click to set whether the system automatically scrolls the alarm display table
when the alarms are reported.

4 Click to select the corresponding template for query.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the critical
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the major
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the minor
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the warning
alarms.

u Click the buttons at the bottom-right corner of the Current Alarm tab to perform the
corresponding operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected alarm.

In Additional Information of the current alarm details, you can view the
threshold values and current performance value when a threshold-crossing alarm
is generated.

4 Select an alarm and click Confirm Alarm. The Confirmation Status of the
alarm becomes User Confirmation.

4 Select an alarm and click Clear Alarm. The Clear Status of the alarm becomes
User Clearance.

Version: 01 281
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.9.2 Viewing Alarm History

You can view the alarm history of a certain object or all objects in the entire network to
understand the alarms that occurred so as to facilitate failure analysis.

Background Information

u The current alarm that is cleared and confirmed on the UNM2000 is converted into a
history alarm and saved in the history alarm after the specified time lapse is due. For
details about the time lapse settings, see Setting the Definition of the Alarm History.

u Due to the limit of rows in the table, when the number of alarms exceeds the limit,
only the latest history alarms in compliance with the rules are displayed. You can
query non-displayed alarms by setting filter conditions.

Procedure

1. Select one of the access methods in Table 6-7 to open the Alarm History Query
dialog box.

Note:

If a default history alarm query template is set for the current user, you can
select one of the following access methods to directly open the Alarm History
tab and display alarm information queried by the default template.

Table 6-7 Access Methods for Viewing the Alarm History

Operation Access Method

In the Subrack View pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card and select History Alarm from the shortcut menu.

Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select History Alarm
from the shortcut menu.

Viewing Alarm Right-click the corresponding NE in the topology view and select History Alarm
History from the shortcut menu.
Select Alarm→History Alarm from the main menu in the NE manager window.

In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the corresponding
card or port and select History Alarm from the shortcut menu.

Select Alarm→Alarm History from the main menu.

282 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

2. Set query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box and click OK.

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box, you
can click Save As template to save the query conditions as a template. You
can use this template directly for querying according to the same conditions next
time, without repeated settings.

3. Re-set the query conditions to query history alarms.

4 Select a template to query history alarms.

a) On the Alarm History tab, click Query by Template in the lower part.

b) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding template and
click OK to view the history alarm information queried by the selected
template.

4 Set the query conditions to query history alarms.

a) On the Alarm History tab, click Query in the lower part.

b) Reset the query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box as
needed.

c) After completing the settings, click OK to view the alarm history meeting the
set conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Alarm History tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to display only the critical alarms on the alarm history tab.

4 Click to display only the major alarms on the alarm history tab.

4 Click to display only the minor alarms on the alarm history tab.

4 Click to display only the warning alarms on the alarm history tab.

Version: 01 283
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Perform operations by clicking buttons. Click the buttons at the lower right corner of
the tab to perform the following operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected alarm.

In Additional Information of the history alarm details, you can view the
performance threshold values and current values at the beginning and end of a
threshold-crossing alarm.

4 Click Refresh to refresh the alarms.

4 Right-click an alarm, and you can perform the following operations via the
shortcut menu: locating, refreshing, exporting, etc. For operations related to alarm
handling, see Handling Alarms.

6.9.3 Viewing Related Alarms

You can view the NE alarms to understand the running status of the NE.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select View Current Alarm of Attributed
NE / View NE Alarm History to view the current alarm / alarm history of the NE
corresponding to the alarm.

284 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.9.4 Viewing Alarm Details

By viewing the alarm details, you can obtain the alarm name, alarm reason, processing
suggestion and location.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.

2. Select an alarm and click View Details in the lower right corner to view the details of
the selected alarm.

3. Right-click the alarm and select Details from the shortcut menu to view the alarm
details in text. You can click Copy to copy the alarm details to the clipboard.

Version: 01 285
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

You can process the alarm according to the processing suggestions on the Maintenance
Information tab in the alarm details pane.

6.9.5 Viewing Alarm Logs

You can query the log information for the alarms of the entire network or the selected object
via viewing the alarm logs.

Background Information

u The alarm log records all alarms received by the UNM2000. Each alarm is displayed
as a record.

u Current alarms are combined alarms. When an object reports an alarm for multiple
times, these same alarms are combined for display. The alarm ID remains unchanged,
but the alarm frequency increases.

u You can view each alarm entry on the Alarm Log tab, which includes current alarm
logs and history alarm logs.

286 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

u Due to the limit of rows in the table, when the number of alarm logs exceeds the limit,
only the latest current alarm logs in compliance with the rules are displayed. You can
query non-displayed alarm logs by setting filter conditions.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Query Alarm Log from the main menu to open the
Query Alarm Logs dialog box.

Note:

If you have set a default template for querying alarm logs, the preceding access
method directly opens the Query Alarm Logs tab and displays alarm log
information queried by the default template.

2. Set the query conditions in the Query Alarm Logs dialog box and click OK.

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm log query dialog box, you can
click Save as template to save the query conditions as a profile. When
querying according to the same conditions, you can select this profile directly,
without repeated settings.

3. Reset the query condition to view alarm logs.

4 Select a template to query alarm logs.

a) On the Query Alarm Log tab, click Query by Template in the lower part.

b) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding template and
click OK to view the alarm log information queried by the selected template.

4 Set the query condition to view alarm logs.

a) On the Query Alarm Log tab, click Query in the lower part.

b) Reset the query conditions in the Query Alarm Logs dialog box as needed.

c) Click OK to view the alarm logs meeting the conditions.

Version: 01 287
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

You can also perform the following operations as required after completing the alarm log
query information.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Alarm Log tab to perform the
corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of critical alarms only on the Alarm Log
tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of major alarms only on the Alarm Log
tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of minor alarms only on the Alarm Log
tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of prompt alarms only on the Alarm Log
tab.

u Click the buttons at the bottom-right corner of the Alarm Log tab to perform the
corresponding operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected alarm.
For specific information, see Viewing Alarm Details.

In Additional Information of the alarm log details, you can view the
performance threshold values and current values at the beginning and ending of a
threshold-crossing alarm.

4 Click Refresh to refresh the alarms.

4 Click Query by the Template to select another template for query.

4 Click Query to open the Query Alarm Logs dialog box. Then reset the query
condition for query.

288 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

u Select the shortcut menus. Right-click an alarm and select the corresponding shortcut
menu item to confirm, clear or locate the alarm. For operations related to alarm
handling, see Handling Alarms.

6.9.6 Viewing Alarm Log Statistics

You can set the statistics conditions to gather statistics of alarm logs.

Procedure

The procedures of gathering the alarm log statistics are similar. The following takes
gathering the current alarm log statistics as an example.

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Current Alarm Log Statistics from the main menu to
open the Query Alarm Log Statistics dialog box.

Note:

If the default alarm log statistics template has been set, the system will query
according to the default template. For the operations of setting the default alarm
query template, see Alarm Template.

2. Set the statistics conditions in the Query Alarm Log Statistics dialog box, and then
click OK.

Version: 01 289
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Query Alarm Log Statistics dialog
box, you can click Save As template to save the query conditions as a
template. When querying according to the same conditions next time, you can
select this template directly, without repeated settings.

3. After completing the settings, click OK to view the statistics information of alarm logs
meeting the set conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Gather Current Alarm Log
Statistics tab to perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a table.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a chart. You can select different
display and output modes by clicking different buttons.

¡ Click to print the current page.

¡ Click to export the current page as an image.

¡ Click to select the alarm levels displayed on the current page.

¡ Click to select the time points displayed in the chart from the displayed
list.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a curve chart.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a bar chart.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a pie chart.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a curve comparison chart.

290 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.9.7 Viewing Alarm Statistics

The following introduces how to view the alarm statistics through the alarm panel.

Procedure

1. Click on the shortcut toolbar of the main menu to open the Alarm Statistics
dialog box.

Note:

In the Alarm Statistics dialog box, the statistics are displayed in the way you
have selected.

Subsequent Operation

u Select Table Display.

Click the Table Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring template and the
statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm statistical information is
displayed in a table.

4 Select Flashing Alarm Indicator LED to flicker the corresponding LED

automatically on the toolbar when an alarm occurs.

4 Click the Select Template or right-click in the table display area to select
Select Template. In the displayed Select Template dialog box, select the
corresponding template and view its statistical information.

4 Select the corresponding row in the table and click Cancel Statistics or right-
click the row and select Cancel Statistics to cancel calculating the alarm
information.

Version: 01 291
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Select the corresponding row in the table and click Set to Current or right-click
the row and select Set to Current. After setting the selected template as the
current one, the four-color alarm indicator LEDs on the toolbar will display the
corresponding information of the current template.

4 Right-click in the table display area to select Alarm Query Template to open the
Alarm Query Template Management tab. Then add, delete or modify the
alarm query template as needed. For details, see Alarm Template.

u Select Bar Chart Display.

Click the Bar Chart Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring template
and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm statistical
information is displayed in a bar chart.

u Select Pie Chart Display.

Click the Pie Chart Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring template
and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm statistical
information is displayed in a pie chart.

292 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.9.8 Viewing Reported Alarms

This section introduces how to view the reported alarms.

Prerequisite

The alarm reporting rules have been set and enabled.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→View the Reported Alarms from the main menu.

2. On the View Reported Alarm tab, view the information on the alarms meeting the
reporting conditions.

Note:

For the related operations of the buttons, shortcut icons, and shortcut menus on
the View Reported Alarm tab, see Viewing Current Alarms.

Version: 01 293
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click Report Setting at the bottom-right part of the tab, and access the Alarm Report
Setting tab to re-configure the alarm reporting rules.

4. Click Clear All Records at the bottom-right part of the tab to clear all the records on
the current tab. Then the tab will display the alarm information reported after the
records are cleared.

6.9.9 Querying Reported Events

By querying the reported events, you can obtain the running status of the system.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Query Reported Events from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Query Reported Events dialog box that appears and
click OK.

Note:

u If the default template has been set, the system will query according to the
default template.

u You can click Copy from Another Template in the Query Reported
Events dialog box to select an existing template for query.

u After setting the query conditions, you can click Save as Template to
save the current query conditions as a template.

3. On the Query Reported Events tab, view the query results.

294 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Subsequent Operation

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Query Reported Events tab to
perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to set whether to automatically report updated events.

4 Click to set whether the system automatically scrolls the event display table
when the events are reported.

4 Click to select the corresponding template for query.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the critical
events.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the major
events.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the minor
events.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the warning
events.

u Click the buttons at the bottom of the Query Reported Events tab to perform the
corresponding operations.

4 Click Query to re-set the query conditions in the Query Reported Events dialog
box and then click OK.

4 Click Query by Template, select the desired template in the Select Template
dialog box and then click OK.

4 Select an event entry and click View Details to view the detailed information of
the selected event.

u Right-click an event entry on the Query Reported Events tab and select the shortcut
menu items to perform the corresponding operations.

u Select Topology Location to locate the source NE that triggered the event in the
topology view so as to ascertain the physical position of the corresponding NE in the
network.

u Select View Event Report of the NE to display all the events that occurred on the NE
so as to analyze the running status of the NE.

u Select Remark to type the remark information of the selected event.

Version: 01 295
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Select Copy Cell to copy the information in the selected table cell to the clipboard.

u Select Print to print the event logs.

u Select Export→Export All Records to export all reported events in format of TXT,
Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML to the specified directory.

u Select Export→Export Selected Record to export the selected events in format of

TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML to the specified directory.

6.10 Handling Alarms

When an alarm occurs, you should handle the alarm following certain procedures to
eliminate the fault, including viewing the detailed alarm information, isolating the alarm,
confirming the alarm and clearing the alarm.

6.10.1 Confirming Alarms

The UNM2000 supports manual and automatic confirmation of cleared alarms. The manual
alarm confirmation indicates that the alarm has been followed up.

Background Information

You can batch confirm alarms by specifying alarm names, levels, and types.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

u Confirm alarms manually.

1) Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2) Confirm alarms via one of the following ways:

¡ Select the corresponding alarm and click Confirm Alarm in the lower right
part of the tab or right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm
Alarm from the shortcut menu.

296 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

¡ Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm and Mark the
Alarms from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, enter the
remarks and click OK.

¡ Right-click an area on the corresponding tab and select Batch Confirm

Alarm from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, set the alarm
confirmation conditions and click OK.

3) After manual alarm confirmation, the Confirmation Status of the corresponding

alarm is changed to User Confirmation.

u Confirm alarms automatically.

See Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules for setting the automatic
confirmation rules of the cleared alarms.

By default, the system, at 00:00, automatically confirms the alarms that have been
cleared for one day and the Confirmation Status of the alarms is changed to Auto
Confirm.

Related Operation

If any alarm is to be re-focused, you can right-click this alarm and select Unconfirm the
Alarm. The Confirmation Status of this alarm will subsequently change to Unconfirmed.

Version: 01 297
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

You can only confirm alarms on the Alarm Log tab and cannot cancel any
alarm confirmation on this tab.

6.10.2 Clearing Alarms Manually

After a failure is eliminated, the corresponding alarms will be cleared automatically. If the
alarms cannot be cleared automatically, you can remove them manually.

Background Information

u For automatically cleared alarms, the "Cleared By" item displays the name of the NE
which the alarm object belongs to.

u For manually cleared alarms, the "Cleared By" item displays the user who cleared the
alarms.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Clear Alarm, or click Clear Alarm
at the lower right corner of the tab. The Clear Status of the corresponding alarm
changes to User Clearance.

6.10.3 Confirming and Clearing Alarms

When a device is faulty, you can confirm and clear alarms with one click.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

298 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings→Alarm Settings→Server Settings→

Alarm Basic Setting from the main menu.

2. In the Alarm Basic Setting dialog box, select Show Confirming and Clearing
Alarm Function.

3. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

4. Select the corresponding alarm and click Confirm and Clear Alarm in the lower right
part of the tab, or right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm and Clear
Alarm from the shortcut menu.

6.10.4 Clearing Alarms From the Device

After a failure is eliminated, the corresponding alarms will be cleared automatically. If the
alarms cannot be cleared automatically, you can remove them manually.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Clear Alarm From Device.

6.10.5 Disabling the Event-to-Alarm Conversion

The following introduces how to convert the alarms that are previously converted from
events back to events.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

Version: 01 299
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Disable Event to Alarm.

6.10.6 Locating Alarms

This function enables you to locate the topological object, ONU list, card or port that
generates this alarm.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm, Alarm History or Alarm Log tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Topology Location / Locate to Card
or Port / Locate to ONU List.

6.10.7 Shielding Alarms

The following introduces how to shield a certain alarm in the current alarm query GUI.
When some alarms do not need to be handled, you can shield these alarms.

Background Information

u The shielding rules do not apply to the alarms already reported. They are only
applicable to the subsequent alarms matching the shielding rules.

u The shielded alarms are neither saved in the alarm database nor displayed.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Filter.

3. In the Shield Alarm dialog box, set the filter rules.

300 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

4. Click OK to add an alarm shielding rule and shield the alarm matching the specified
condition.

Note:

u The newly added alarm shielding rules can be viewed on the Alarm Shield
Rule tab.

u To cancel an alarm shielding rule, clear the Enable option or delete the
shielding rule. See Viewing Alarm Shielding Rules.

6.10.8 Modifying Alarm Levels

You can set the alarm level in the UNM2000 to improve the alarm monitoring efficiency.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Modify the Level.

3. In the Modify Alarm Level dialog box, select the desired radio button in Modify
Range and Modify the Level to respectively.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

Version: 01 301
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.10.9 Editing Alarm Remarks

You can edit the alarm remarks to record additional information about the alarm for
maintenance.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Modify the Remark from the shortcut
menu.

3. Enter alarm remarks in the Edit Alarm Remark dialog box.

4. Click OK. The alarm remarks are displayed in the Remark column.

6.10.10 Exporting the Alarm Information

This section introduces how to print or export the alarm information.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm, Alarm History or Alarm Log tab.

2. Export the alarm Information.

4 Print alarms.

a) Select the alarm information entry and right-click to select Print.

b) In the Print Preview dialog box, set the page setup and other print options.

c) Click Print and select a printer and other printing settings in the displayed
Print dialog box.

d) Click OK.

4 Export alarms.

302 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

¡ Export all alarm entries. Right-click anywhere on the tab and select Export
→Export All Records to export all the alarm entries as a TXT, Excel, CSV,
XML, PDF or HTML file.

¡ Export the selected alarm entry. Select the alarm entry and right-click to
select Export→Export Selected Record to export the selected alarm
entries as a TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file.

6.10.11 Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience

By recording the alarm maintenance experience, you can handle the alarms of the same type
quickly and conveniently.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Maintenance Experience from the
shortcut menu.

3. In the Edit Maintenance Experience dialog box, select the applicable range, enter
the maintenance experience and click OK.

Note:

The recorded maintenance experience can be viewed in the corresponding

detailed alarm information. Besides, you can manage the maintenance
experience according to Managing Maintenance Experience.

6.10.12 Managing Maintenance Experience

By managing the maintenance experience, you can refer to the maintenance experience for
handling the alarms of the same type.

Version: 01 303
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Maintenance Experience Management from the

main menu.

2. View the alarm maintenance experience on the Alarm Maintenance Experience tab.

3. Do as follows:

4 In the right pane, select an entry and click the desired button at the lower right
part of the tab, or right-click an entry and select a desired option such as Edit,
Delete, Copy Cell, Print or Export from the shortcut menu to perform the
corresponding operation.

4 Filter the maintenance experience entries. Click at the top of the left pane to
switch the tree structure and sort alarms by alarm name or type. Then click the
tree node to filter the maintenance experience entries in the right pane.

4 Click the Import / Export button at the top of the right pane to import / export
the maintenance experience in the XML format.

4 If no applicable maintenance experience exists in the maintenance experience

library, you can create the new maintenance experience according to step 4.

4. Create the maintenance experience.

1) In the right pane of the Alarm Maintenance Experience tab, click New, or
right-click the blank area in the right pane of the tab and select New from the
shortcut menu.

2) In the New Alarm Maintenance Experience dialog box, set Equipment Type
and Alarm Name, enter the maintenance experience information and click OK.

6.11 Customizing Alarms

Customize the alarm names or levels according to the maintenance requirements for
convenient management and efficient alarm monitoring.

304 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

6.11.1 Customizing Alarm Names

To monitor the physical environment of devices, you can customize environmental alarms
for devices, such as the fire alarm, water alarm, and overtemperature / undertemperature
alarm.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Custom Alarm Name from the main menu.

2. In the Please Select a NE dialog box, select the NE whose alarms are to be
customized and click OK.

3. In the left pane of the Custom Alarm Name tab, select the PUBA card or ONU
whose alarms are to be customized, click the English Alarm Name column and select
the corresponding name.

4. Click Save to save the settings to the database.

Other Operations

u Clear the customized alarm: Select the customized alarm entry and click Clear to clear
the customized alarm information. Then click Save.

u Define the alarm for objects of the same type quickly: Click the Apply to Objects of
the Same Type button to make the setting valid and apply the changes to the cards of
the same type.

Version: 01 305
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Display / hide the undefined alarm: Click Show Alarms Without Custom Names /
Hide Uncustomized Alarm to display or hide the alarms not defined on the GUI.

u Set the custom alarm row by row: Click Hide Uncustomized Alarm, click Add to set
the alarm name, and click Save.

6.11.2 Re-Defining Alarm Names

The UNM2000 supports redefinition of alarm names. You can modify the pre-defined alarm
names to your desired ones according to the maintenance requirements.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→The Alarm Name Redefinefrom the main menu.

2. On the Redefine the Alarm Name tab, click Create.

3. In the Add the Define Alarm Name dialog box, click Select and select the desired
alarm.

4. Enter the new alarm name and click OK.

5. Click Save All to save the settings.

6. On the Current Alarm tab, view that the name of the alarm is changed to the
customized alarm name set in the above steps.

306 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

7. Delete the customized alarm name: On the Redefine the Alarm Name tab, select an
entry and click Delete→Save All.

Related Operation

1. On the Current Alarm tab, right-click an entry and select Modify the Level from the
shortcut menu.

2. Re-define the alarm name in the displayed dialog box.

6.11.3 Customizing Alarm Levels

You can adjust the alarm levels of all objects, the designated types of devices, or the
designated equipment as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Custom Alarm Level from the main menu.

2. At the lower right corner of the Customize Alarm Level tab, click Create; or right-
click in the blank area of the tab, and select Create from the shortcut menu.

3. In the New Customized Rule of the Alarm Level dialog box, set Alarm Source.

4 Select All Objects, and the customized alarm levels apply to all objects.

4 Select Select Equipment, click on the right side of Object Name,

and select the desired card of a certain device in the Select Object dialog box.
Then click OK.

4 Select Select Equipment Type and click on the right side of

Equipment Type. In the displayed Select Equipment Type dialog box, select
the specific equipment type and then click OK.

Note:

The priorities of custom alarm levels are as follows: equipment > equipment
type > all objects.

Version: 01 307
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click Select to select the desired alarms in the Select Alarm Name dialog box, and
click OK.

5. Set ONU Service Level.

6. Click the Custom Level column of the corresponding alarm, and select the desired
alarm level. Then click OK.

7. On the Customize Alarm Level tab, check and confirm the information related to the
custom alarm levels, and then click Save.

Other Operations

u Delete the custom alarm level: On the Customize Alarm Level tab, select the alarm
level concerned and click Delete.

u Modify the custom alarm level: On the Customize Alarm Level tab, click the
Custom Level column of the corresponding alarm entry to reset the alarm level. Then
click Save.

6.11.4 Customizing Special Alarms

Through custom special alarm settings, the UNM2000 can display different types of alarms
based on how much users pay attention to these alarms or how users find these alarms. In
this way, the maintenance engineers can better monitor the equipment, and quickly isolate
the failure and solve the problems.

6.11.4.1 Viewing Custom Special Alarms

This function helps you understand the defined special alarm types.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

308 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the left

pane to open the dialog box.

3. Click the Custom Special Alarms tab to view the special alarms already defined.

6.11.4.2 Customizing Special Alarms

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: 01 309
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the left

pane to open the dialog box.

3. Click the Custom Special Alarms tab.

4. Click Create, select the NE type, alarm name, and special alarm name in the Custom
Special Alarms dialog box, and then click OK.

5. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Subsequent Operation

Select the useless custom special alarms, and click Delete to delete them.

6.11.4.3 Setting Special Alarm Icons

Background Information

By setting the special alarm icons, you can view the special alarm icon at the upper-right
corner of the NE icon when the corresponding alarm occurs at the NE, so as to obtain the
alarm information in a timely manner.

u When multiple alarms occur at the NE, the special icon of the alarm with the highest
priority will be displayed at the upper-right corner of the NE icon.

u The priority of an alarm ranges from 1 to 22, with 22 being the highest.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the left

pane to open the dialog box.

310 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

3. In the Special Alarm Icon Display tab, and select Enable, Hide after Confirmation
or Hide after Clearing as required.

4 If Enable is selected, the special icon of this alarm appears at the upper-right
corner of the NE icon upon the occurrence of the alarm.

Note:

For enabling the custom alarms, see Customizing Special Alarms.

4 If Hide after confirmation is selected, after the corresponding alarm is

confirmed, the special icon of this alarm at the upper-right corner of the NE will
be hidden.

4 If Hide after Clearing is selected, after the corresponding alarm is cleared, the
special icon of this alarm at the upper-right corner of the NE will be hidden.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Version: 01 311
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.12 Managing the Alarm / Event Data

If the alarm history data stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the UNM2000
operation will be influenced. The alarm data saving function can save the alarm history data
in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to improve the UNM2000
operation performance. The UNM2000 supports manual saving and overflow saving.

u Overflow saving:You can set the maximum alarm saving capacity and the UNM2000
will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history data reach the
preset capacity, the UNM2000 will save the data to a specified file to decrease its load.

u Manual saving:You can save the alarm history data in the UNM2000 to a specified file
folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving period. When the alarm
history data saved in the database reach the preset time period, the UNM2000 will save
the data to a designated file folder. You can mark the saving time in the name of the
folder where the file is saved.

6.12.1 Setting the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving

Set the alarm / event overflow saving task. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether the
alarm / event history data in the database meets the preset conditions. If the overflow saving
conditions are met, the UNM2000 saves the alarm / event history data automatically. The
saved alarm / eventhistory data history will be deleted from the database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which cannot be
deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the corresponding task as
needed.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→Save Alarm History Overflow /

Save Event Overflow in the left pane to view the existing alarm history / event
overflow saving task.

3. Select one of the following access methods to open the Attribute dialog box of the
corresponding overflow saving task.

312 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

4 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

4 Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and select
Attribute.

4 In the left pane, click before Overflow Saving, right-click the corresponding
overflow saving task and select Attribute from the shortcut menu.

4. Set the attributes of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 6-8.

Table 6-8 Descriptions of the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving Task Settings

Parameter Description
Indicates the name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be edited
Task Name
by users.

Enable Select it to enable the task.

Basic
Execution Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is "Every 2
Informa-
Cycle days".
tion
Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them into
Saving Mode
Extend the server harddisk or the FTP server.
Informa- u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
tion overflow saving conditions directly.

If the data history exceeds the maximum number of stored entries or

Overflow Limit exceeds the record threshold, a preset proportion of data will be saved
and removed from the database.

Version: 01 313
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 6-8 Descriptions of the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving Task Settings (Continued)

Parameter Description
The data history that exceeds the database preservation days will be
Capacity Limit
saved and removed from the database when the saving task is executed.

5. After completing the settings, click OK.

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click Execute Now
in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

6.12.2 Setting the Manual Alarm / Event Saving

The UNM2000 supports saving alarm history and performance history manually, preventing
insufficient space in database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of alarm history / events, which
cannot be deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding saving task as
needed.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time. You
can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the saved file by
modifying the background configuration file. For specific operations, contact
the FiberHome technical engineer.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→Save Alarm History / Save Event

from the left pane to view the existing manual saving task of alarm / performance
history.

3. Select one of the following access methods to open the Attribute dialog box of a
manual saving task.

314 Version: 01
 6 Alarm Management

4 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

4 Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and select
Attribute from the shortcut menu.

4 In the left pane, click before Save Manually, right-click the corresponding
manual saving task and select Attribute from the shortcut menu.

4. Set the attribute of the manual saving task, referring to Table 6-9.

Table 6-9 Parameters of the Alarm / Event Manual Saving Task

Parameter Description
Indicates the name of the saving task, which cannot be edited by
Basic Task Name
users.
Informa-
Enable Select it to enable the task.
tion
Execution Cycle Sets the execution cycle of the task.

u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
manual saving conditions into files.
You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them
Saving Mode
into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
Extend u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
Informa- manual saving conditions directly.
tion Data Generation
Sets the generation time and end time of the data.
Time
Records that
Displays the number of the data entries that comply with the saving
Match the Saving
conditions. This item cannot be edited.
Conditions

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute Now
in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

6.13 Gathering Statistics of Device Failures

This section introduces how to gather statistics on device failures.

Background Information

The failure alarm that supports statistics collection is System Communication

Interruption.

Version: 01 315
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Device Failure Rate Statistic from the main menu.

2. In the Query Device Failure Statistic dialog box, set the statistical information and
alarm source, and click OK.

Note:

Alarm Source is required.

3. View the statistical result on the Device Failure Statistic tab.

Related Operation

Click to view the failure rate statistical result in the comparison curve chart.

316 Version: 01
7 Performance Management

The UNM2000 performs strong performance management functions. By monitoring the

performance, you can detect the silent failures during network running to prevent network
failures.

7.1 Basic Concepts

Performance management can help you identify potential network running risks in advance
and prevent network failures. The following introduces basic concepts involved in
performance monitoring.

Current Performance and Performance History

The performance data include the current performance data and performance history data.
You can check whether the service is running normally in a specified time period by
browsing the performance data.

u Current Performance

The current performance refers to the data saved in the current performance register of
the NE. The monitoring period of current performance data is 15 minutes. When
browsing the current performance, the UNM2000 queries the performance data
directly from the current performance register at the NE side.

u Performance History

The performance history refers to the performance data of NEs detected in the past
specified time period. According to different monitoring periods, the performance
history data is classified into 15-minute performance history and 24-hour performance
history. When querying the performance history data, you can select whether to query
the performance history data at the NE side or at the UNM2000 side according to the
location where the data are stored.

The current performance data whose saved time exceeds the specified time period will
be saved to the NE performance history register.

Version: 01 317
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Performance Threshold

By setting the performance threshold, you can filter the performance events that change in
the normal value range so that you can focus the critical performance events.

The threshold is also called tolerance, which indicates a performance limit within which a
device can work properly. If a performance indicator exceeds the performance threshold, the
performance deterioration must be concerned and handled. In normal situations, a margin
must be reserved for a configured performance threshold to ensure that issues can be
identified in advance.

Performance Comparison

You can compare the performance data of the specified object in different time periods to
view the corresponding running status.

7.2 Setting Performance-related Parameters

7.2.1 Setting Display of the Performance Value

You can set the unit of the performance value to Bit or Byte by setting display of the
performance value.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the server from
the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→PM Show Unit Setting in the left pane to
open the PM Show Unit Setting dialog box.

318 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

3. Select the unit of the performance value and click Apply. The settings take effect
immediately.

Note:

It is recommended to use the default setting: Show Bit by Byte.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

7.2.2 Setting the Performance Collection Sever

You can set the collection time and ONU performance collection range of the 24-hour
performance as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Performance Settings→Server Settings in the left pane to open the dialog
box.

3. Set the 24-hour performance collection time and ONU performance collection range
and then click Apply to apply the settings.

Version: 01 319
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.2.3 Setting the PAS Saving

If the data history stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the UNM2000 operation
will be influenced. The performance data saving function can save the performance history
data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to improve the UNM2000
operation performance. The PAS saving settings are used to set the saving mode of the
performance history.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the Parameter
Settings dialog box.

2. Select Performance Settings→Save Pas in the left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Set the start time, end time, saving mode, and saving day limitations according to
Table 7-1, and click OK. The settings will immediately take effect.

Table 7-1 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates the start time for
Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Start time saving PAS.
buttons.
Time format: HH:mm:ss
Indicates the end time for
Enter it manually or set it by the spin
End Time saving PAS.
buttons.
Time format: HH:mm:ss
Indicates that the PAS can be
Save Mode saved into a file or directly Select an item from the drop-down list.
deleted.
Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Limit on Saving Days Value range: 1 to 90
buttons.

320 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

7.3 Managing Performance Query Templates

The UNM2000 supports setting the performance query conditions or statistical conditions
as templates. You can use the preset template to quickly query the performance data.

7.3.1 Viewing Performance Templates

The following introduces how to view the performance template.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to open the

Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Click before Performance History Query Template to select the corresponding

template and view the details of the template in the right pane.

7.3.2 Creating a Performance Query Template

To avoid setting query criteria repetitively, you can save the commonly used performance
query criteria as a template so that it can be used for querying performance information
subsequently. The following introduces how to create a performance query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to open the

Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Historical
Performance Query Template dialog box.

Version: 01 321
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

No. Path

1 On the PAS Performance Query Template Management tab, click the

button at the upper left corner.

Select Performance History Query Template in the left pane, right-click the blank
2 area in the right pane and select New Performance History Query Template from the
shortcut menu.
Right-click Performance History Query Template in the left pane and select New
3
Performance History Query Template from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Historical Performance Query Template dialog box, set the
parameters on the Template Information, Basic Information and Advanced
Information tabs referring to Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates the name of the Enter it manually.
Template Name
Template new template. This field is required.
Information Indicates the remark
Template Remark Enter it manually.
entered.
1. Select the Latest Time radio button.
Indicates the time period 2. Select a time period from the drop-
Basic Time during which the down list.
Latest Time
Information Range performance history is to 3. If you select Custom, enter the time
be queried. manually or set the time by the spin
buttons.

322 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-2 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

1. Select the Time Range radio button.

2. Select the Start Time check box.
3. Set the time:

4 Enter it manually.
4 Set it by the spin buttons.
Indicates the start time of
the period of which the
4 Click :
Start
Time performance history is to a) Enter the year manually or
be queried. set it by the spin buttons.

b) Select a month from the

drop-down list.

c) Enter the time manually or

set it by the spin buttons.
Time
d) Click to select the date.
Range
1. Select the End time check box.
2. Set the time:

4 Enter it manually.
4 Set it by the spin buttons.
Indicates the end time of 4 Click :
End the period of which the
a) Enter the year manually or
Time performance history is to
set it by the spin buttons.
be queried.
b) Select a month from the
drop-down list.

c) Enter the time manually or

set it by the spin buttons.

d) Click to select the date.

Query Maximum Value

Performance Code, and
Performance Code Type Select the check box(es).
Query Minimum Value
Performance Code
1. Select the check box.
Indicates the value range of
Performance Value Range 2. Enter the minimum and maximum
the performance.
value ranges manually.

Version: 01 323
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-2 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

u 15-Minute
PM Type Performance Select the corresponding radio button.
u 24-hour Performance
1. Select the check boxes before >= and
<=.
Sets the display range of
Performance Value Range 2. Enter the performance value manually.
the performance value.
3. Select Display Zero Value
Performance.
1. Click Add.
Indicates the list of selected
2. Select an NE or an object under the
Selected Object List objects whose performance
NE in the corresponding dialog box.
is to be queried.
3. Click OK.
1. Click Select.
2. Select performance codes in the
Advanced Performance Code to be Selected
Information Indicates the list of selected pane of the Select Performance
performance codes of Code dialog box.
List of Selected PM Codes
which the performance is
3. Click to move the selected to
to be queried.
the right pane, or click to
move all.
4. Click OK.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Historical Performance Query Template, and

select a template in the Select Template dialog box to copy the basic
information and advanced information of the selected template, improving the
setting efficiency.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

Other Operations

In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or right-click
the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Set as / Cancel Default
Template, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

324 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

7.3.3 Modifying a Performance Query Template

When setting the performance query template, you can modify the settings in case the query
condition setting error occurs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to open the

Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Click before Performance History Query Template to select the corresponding

template in the left pane and view the details of the template in the right pane.

3. Modify the settings of the template in the right pane as needed and click Save All.

Other Operations

In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or right-click
the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Set as / Cancel Default Template,
Copy Cell, Print or Export.

7.4 Managing Performance Configurations

The UNM2000 supports managing performance threshold templates and binding the
performance threshold templates with the devices.

7.4.1 Managing Performance Threshold Templates

The UNM2000 supports creating, modifying and deleting performance threshold templates.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 325
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Configuring Performance Threshold Templates

1. In the NE Manager window, click .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Performance Management→Threshold Profile

and Bind→PM Threshold Profile.

3. On the PM Threshold Profile tab, click .

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the number of new performance threshold templates
and click OK.

5. Set the template name and object type in the left pane.

6. Set whether to turn on the alarm threshold switch upon occurrence of the alarm in the
right pane.

Modifying Templates in a Batch Manner

1. Click .

2. Select the desired template in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box and modify
the parameters in the Configuration Item pane.

Deleting a Template

Select a template and click .

7.4.2 Binding Performance Threshold Templates

The UNM2000 supports binding performance threshold templates with objects.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

326 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Procedure

1. In the NE Manager window, click .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Performance Management→Threshold Profile

and Bind→PM Threshold Profile Bind.

3. Select the desired object in the left device tree and set the template name in the drop-
down list in the right pane.

4. Click to deliver the configuration to the device.

5. Batch settings: Select multiple objects, click and then set the templates in the
Configure Template in Batch Manner dialog box.

7.5 Configuring the Performance Classification

Switch in a Batch Manner

The UNM2000 is added with the new function of configuring performance classification
switches in a batch manner. You can view the performance switch of the designated OLT
NE, modify the existing switches in a batch manner, and deliver the configurations to the
device via the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. In the UNM2000 main menu, select Performance→Performance Sort Switch

Config to open the Pm Sort Switch Management tab.

2. Click Create NE Object to open the Add Object dialog box and then select one or
multiple NEs.

3. Click OK. The UNM2000 reads the performance classification switch status of the
selected device(s).

Version: 01 327
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Modify the performance classification switches in a batch manner and then click Save
Config.

7.6 Monitoring Performance Data

This section introduces how to monitor the performance data, including viewing the current
performance, performance history, performance comparison, real-time performance and
performance history trend.

u Current performance: Views the current 15-minute performance and the performance
of the latest sixteen 15-minute time intervals. These data are not saved in the database.

u Performance history: Views the performance history data of the selected object in the
designated time range.

u Real-time performance: Views the real-time performance data of the selected object.
The collection period can be 10 seconds or 30 seconds; the collection interval can be
15 minutes, 30 minutes, one hour, or 24 hours.

u Performance comparison: Compares the performance data in designated period of an

designated object, so as to understand the operating status of this object in different
periods.

u Performance history trend: Views the change trend of the performance history data of
the designated object.

7.6.1 Viewing Current Performance

You can query the current performance so as to understand the running status of devices.

328 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Prerequisite

u The performance classification function of the corresponding device is Enabled.

u You are an EMS user with Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main Topology
tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open NE Manager from
the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following ways to view the current performance.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or port,
and select Current Performance from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window,right-click a card, and select

Current Performance from the shortcut menu.

3. (Optional) Right-click on the current performance tab, select 15-minute

Performance from the shortcut menu and select the corresponding menu item to
query the 1st to 16th 15-minute performance.

4. (Optional) Right-click in the current performance tab and select Print, Copy Cell or
Export.

Version: 01 329
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

Set the query conditions for current performance and then query again.

1. Click Query to display the Current Performance Query dialog box.

2. In the Current Performance Query dialog box, set Select the 15-minute
Performance, Performance Code Type, Object and Performance Code, and
then click OK.

7.6.2 Viewing Performance History

View the performance history to obtain the abnormal performance data of the equipment, so
as to instruct the current maintenance.

Prerequisite

u The performance classification function of the corresponding device is Enabled.

u The performance collection task has been set, and the system has waited for one test
period (15 minutes or 24 hours) at least.

u You are an EMS user with Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select the access method mentioned in Table 7-3 to open the Performance History
Query dialog box.

Table 7-3 Access Method of Viewing the Performance History

Operation Access Method

Select Performance→Performance History from the main menu.

Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select Performance
Viewing the History from the shortcut menu.
performance In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the corresponding
history card or port and select Performance History from the shortcut menu.

In the Diagram pane of the NE manager window, right-click the corresponding card
and select Performance History from the shortcut menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Performance History Query dialog box.

330 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Note:

u In the Advance Information tab, you can select 10 query objects at most.

u To avoid repeated setting of query conditions, you can click Save as

Template to save the current performance history query conditions as a
template, which can be selected for query by clicking Query According
to Template later.

3. After completing the settings, click OK; then the query results will be displayed in the
Performance History tab.

7.6.3 Viewing the Performance Comparison

You can compare the performance data of the specified object in different time periods to
view the corresponding running status.

Prerequisite

u Wait until at least two measurement periods (15 minutes for each measurement period)
expireabove the list.

u The performance statistics function is enabled.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main Topology
tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open NE Manager from
the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following methods to open the Performance Comparison Query
dialog box.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or port,
and select Performance Comparison from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window,right-click a card, and select

Performance Comparison from the shortcut menu.

Version: 01 331
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. In the Performance Comparison Query dialog box, set performance comparison

query conditions.

Note:

Select at least two periods from the 15 Minutes drop-down list.

4. Click OK and view the performance comparison result in the Card Performance
Comparison tab.

Note:

The system displays the comparison result in List View, Compare Based on
the Object and Histogram by default. You can select other display modes as
needed.

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print the comparison results or export them
in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

7.6.4 Viewing Real-Time Performance

You can monitor performance data of the selected resources in real time.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main Topology
tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open NE Manager from
the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following methods to open the Real-time Performance Query
dialog box.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or port,
and select Real-time Performance from the shortcut menu.

332 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window, right-click a card, and select

Real-time Performance from the shortcut menu.

3. In the dialog box that appears, set Collection Cycle, Time Length, Object and
Performance Code.

4. Click OK. After a while, you can view the real-time performance of the selected object
in the Real-time Performance tab.

Note:

u The system displays the real-time performance in List View and Curve
Chart by default. You can select other display modes as needed.

u Click Stop to stop collecting real-time performance.

u The curve chart displays the data units in the vertical coordinate. At most
five units can be displayed in the vertical coordinate. You can set the
performance unit according to Setting Display of the Performance Value.

Version: 01 333
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

u Click or at the top of the right pane to print real-time performance results, or
export them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

u Click and select the desired performance parameters in the displayed window.

7.6.5 Viewing the Performance History Trend

You can view the performance history charts so as to understand the performance data
change trend of the specified object and the running status of the network.

Prerequisite

u The object to be queried has its performance history data.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→View Performance History Trend from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Performance History Query dialog box.

Note:

u In the Advance Information tab, you can select 10 query objects at most.

u To avoid repeated setting of query conditions, you can click Save as

Template to save the current performance history query conditions as a
template, which can be selected for query by clicking Query According
to Template later.

3. After completing the settings, click OK; then the query results will be displayed in the
History property trend tab.

Note:

The system displays the performance history in the List view or Curve Chart
mode by default. You can select other display modes as required.

334 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print real-time performance results or export
them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

7.7 Managing Performance Collection

You can use the scheduled performance collection to query or process the performance data
of the NE. The UNM2000 enables you to collect the performance data through NE
Performance Indicator Collection and NE Performance Threshold Collection and
export the result as a file to reduce repeated work.

7.7.1 Managing Performance Indicator Sets

The following introduces how to view and set the performance indicator sets.

7.7.1.1 Viewing Performance Indicator Sets

View the existing performance indicator sets so as to quickly set the collection indicator of
the performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to open

the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, click Indicator Set and view the existing
indicator sets in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired indicator set to
view the details of the indicator set, including Basic Information and Member.

Version: 01 335
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the indicator set

In the left pane, select the corresponding indicator set, modify the relevant information
if necessary in the right pane. Click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the bottom, or
simply right-click the entry and select Delete, Print, Copy Cell or Export from the
shortcut menu.

7.7.1.2 Creating a Performance Indicator Set

Set the performance indicator set so as to quickly set the collection indicator of the
performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→PAS Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Indicator Set tab.

No. Path
Click Collection Task Management in the left pane and then right-click in the right
pane to select Create Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.

Creating a Right-click Indicator Set in the left pane and select Create Indicator Set from the
performance shortcut menu.
indicator set Click Indicator Set in the left pane and click Create Indicator Set in the right pane.

Click Indicator Set in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select Create
Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic Information and Member tabs of the Create
Indicator Set dialog box, referring to Table 7-4.

336 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-4 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates the name of the
Index Set Name Enter it manually.
Basic indicator set.
Informa- Select an item from the drop-down
NE Type Indicates the type of the NE.
tion list.
Remark Indicates the remark entered. Enter it manually.

1. Click the Select button.

2. Select performance codes in the
Performance Code to be
Selected pane of the Select
Indicates the list of selected Performance Code dialog
List of Selected
Member objects whose performance is box.
PM Codes
to be queried.
3. Click to move the
selected to the right pane, or

click to move all.

4. Click OK.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Indicator Set to open the Select Indicator Set
dialog box. Then select the desired indicator set to copy its parameter settings,
so as to improve setting efficiency.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

7.7.2 Managing Performance Threshold Sets

The following introduces how to view, create and use the performance threshold sets.

7.7.2.1 Viewing the Performance Threshold Set

View the performance threshold sets already set and select the desired threshold set to
quickly complete the statistics and query of performance threshold.

Version: 01 337
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to open

the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, select Threshold Set and view the
existing threshold sets in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired performance

threshold set to view the details of the threshold set, including Basic Information and
Member.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the performance threshold set

In the left pane, select the corresponding performance threshold set, modify the
relevant information in the right pane and then click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the bottom, or
simply right-click the entry and select Delete, Print, Copy Cell or Export from the
shortcut menu.

7.7.2.2 Creating a Performance Threshold Set

You can monitor the performance data by setting the performance threshold. When the
performance data exceed the preset threshold value, the threshold-crossing alarm will be
generated.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

338 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Procedure

1. Select Performance→PAS Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Threshold Set tab.

Operation Path
Click Collection Task Management in the left pane and then right-click in the
right pane to select Create Threshold Set from the shortcut menu.

Click Threshold Set in the left pane and then right-click in the right pane to select
Creating a
Create Threshold Set from the shortcut menu.
performance
Right-click Threshold Set in the left pane and select Create Threshold Set from
threshold set
the shortcut menu.
Click Threshold Set in the left pane and then click the Create Threshold Set
button in the right pane.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic Information and Member tabs, referring to
Table 7-5.

Table 7-5 Threshold Set Parameters

Parameter Description Setting

Threshold Set
Basic Sets a name for the threshold set. Set it manually.
Name
Infor-
Select an item from the drop-down
ma- NE Type Selects the corresponding NE type.
list.
tion
Enters the remark information for the
Remark Enter it manually.
threshold set.
Click Select to select the Click Select, select the desired
PM Code performance codes for which the performance code in the dialog box
performance threshold is to be set. that appears and click OK.
Upper
Sets the upper limit for the Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Threshold
corresponding performance code. buttons.
Value
Mem-
Lower
ber Sets the lower limit for the Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Threshold
corresponding performance code. buttons.
Value
Sets the upper clearing limit for the
Upper Clear corresponding performance code. Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Limit The upper clearing limit must be buttons.
smaller than the upper limit.

Version: 01 339
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-5 Threshold Set Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the Lower clearing limit for the
Lower Clear corresponding performance code. Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Limit The lower clearing limit must be buttons.
greater than the lower limit.

Sets the threshold-crossing alarm

code for the corresponding
performance code. The following
options are available:
Click it and select an item from the
Alarm Code u PM_THRESHOLD_CRITICAL
drop-down list.
u PM_THRESHOLD_MAJOR
u PM_THRESHOLD_MINOR
u PM_THRESHOLD_WARN-
ING
Sets the applied object of the
corresponding performance code.
The following options are available:

u All
Click it and select an item from the
Object Type
u Local Board drop-down list.

u Local Board Port

u ONU

u ONU Port
Note: The performance threshold parameters must meet the following conditions: Upper limit > upper
clearing limit > lower clearing limit > lower limit.

4. Click OK after the setting is completed.

7.7.3 Managing Performance Collection Tasks

The following introduces how to view and create performance collection tasks.

7.7.3.1 Viewing Performance Collection Task

View the performance collection task already set and select the desired task set to collect the
performance.

340 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to open

the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, select Collection Task and view the
existing collection tasks in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired collection task in
the right pane to view the details of the task, including Basic Information,
Collection Object & PM-Code, Advance Information and Collection Cycle.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the performance collection task.

In the left pane, select the corresponding performance collection task, modify the
relevant information in the right pane and then click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the bottom, or
simply right-click the entry and select Disable, Delete, Print, Copy Cell or Export
from the shortcut menu.

7.7.3.2 Creating a Performance Collection Task

You can monitor the performance data by setting the performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Version: 01 341
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to open

the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Collection Task tab.

No. Access Method

Click Performance Collection Management in the left pane and click Create
1
Collection Task in the right pane.

Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-click
2
in the right pane to select Create Collection Task from the shortcut menu.

Click Collection Task in the left pane and click Create Collection Task in the
3
right pane.

Click Collection Task in the left pane and then right-click in the right pane to
4
select Create Collection Task from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Collection Task in the left pane and select Create Collection Task
5
from the shortcut menu.

3. Set Basic Information, Collection Object and Index, and Advanced Information
in the Create Collection Task dialog box. See Table 7-6.

Table 7-6 Parameter Settings

Name Description Settings

Enter it manually.
Task name Indicates the name of the task.
This field is required.
Enable or Indicates whether to enable this
Select / deselect Enable Or Not.
disable task.
Indicates the type of the task,
Basic including collecting performance
Task Type Select an item from the drop-down list.
Info data and monitoring
performance quality.

Remarks Indicates the remark entered. Enter it manually.

Indicates whether to gather

Data Type statistics on 15-minute or 24- Select the check box(es).
hour performance.

342 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-6 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Settings

1. Click Add.
2. Select NE or Object in NE from the
drop-down list.
Note: When FTP Mode is
selected in the advanced
information, you can only select
NE from the drop-down list. Only
Collection when Normal Mode is selected
Selects the collection object.
Object can Object in NE be selected.
3. In the Select NE or Select Object
Collec- dialog box, select the corresponding
tion collection object.
Object & Note: The ONU WAN connection
PM- interface can be selected as the
Code collection object.
4. Click OK.
1. Click the Select button.
2. Select performance codes in the
Performance Code to be
Collection Selected pane of the Select
Select the collection
Specifica- Performance Code dialog box.
specification.
tion 3. Click to move the selected to
the right pane, or click to
move all.
4. Click OK.
Select the corresponding radio button.
Advance PON Flow Note: The switch does not support
Indicates the collection mode:
Informa- Collect collecting performance by the FTP
normal mode or FTP mode.
tion Mode mode, and therefore you need to
select Normal Mode for the switch.

Version: 01 343
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-6 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Settings

1. Select the Start Time/End Time

check box.
2. Set the time:

4 Enter it manually.
4 Set it by the spin buttons.
Effective
Indicates the time period during
4 Click :
Time
which the performance history is a) Enter the year manually or
Range
to be queried. set it by the spin buttons.
Collec-
tion b) Select a month from the

Cycle drop-down list.

c) Enter the time manually

or set it by the spin
buttons.

d) Click it to select the date.

Perfor-
mance Indicates the time period during
Enter the start and end time manually or
Collection which the performance data are
set them by the spin buttons.
Time to be collected.
Range

Note:

Click Copy from Other Collection Task, select the collection task in the
Select Collection Task dialog box, and copy the parameter settings of the
corresponding task to improve the setting efficiency.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

7.8 Managing Performance Data

This section introduces the related operations of performance data statistics.

344 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

7.8.1 Analysis of PON traffic statistics

The analysis of PON traffic statistics function supports analyzing traffic, optical power and
device health. It provides abundant reports for analyzing and monitoring services and
device running status so as to provide detailed data for network planning.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Analysis of PON Traffic Statistics from the main menu to

open the Query Traffic Statistical dialog box.

2. Set the statistical type, period, object, performance code and then click OK. The
Traffic Statistical Chart tab appears, displaying the statistical result.

Other Operations

By clicking the buttons on the toolbar of the Traffic Statistical Chart tab, you can print or
export the statistical result or display the statistical result in different charts.

7.8.2 Enabling / disabling FTP Report

After the FTP report is enabled, you can collect the traffic data and back them up to a
specified FTP server.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is set (click System→Parameter Settings and then select Service
ConfigurationFTP Server Management).

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Pm FTP Switch Management from the main menu to open
the Pm FTP Report Switch Set tab.

2. Click Synchronized From Device to synchronize the device data.

Version: 01 345
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click Add NE to open the Please Select NE dialog box and then select desired NEs.

4. Click OK.

5. Click in the Traffic Switch Set column to open the Traffic Switch Set dialog
box. Set the FTP server parameters, enable the traffic function and click OK.

6. Click Save All.

Other Operations

Right-click the NE object in the list or click the button at the bottom of the GUI to execute
operations such as Delete.

Subsequent Operation

After enabling the FTP report, create a performance collection task to collect the
performance such as traffic, optical power and ONU distance. The following takes
collecting PON traffic data as an example.

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to open

the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Collection Task and select Create Collection Task from the shortcut
menu.

3. In the Create Collection Task dialog box, set the task parameters and set PON
Traffic Collection to Yes to enable the FTP collection.

4. Click Create to complete the settings.

346 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

7.8.3 Top Ranking Statistics

Top Ranking Statistics supports PON traffic ranking and equipment health degree
ranking, providing users with specialized and abundant reports.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Top Rank Statistics from the main menu to open the Query
Traffic Top Ranking dialog box.

2. Set the statistical type, ranking number, statistical cycle, object type and performance
code, and then click OK. The Traffic Statistical Top Ranking tab appears,
displaying the statistical result.

Other Operations

By clicking the buttons on the toolbar of the Traffic Statistical Top Ranking tab, you can
Print or Export the statistical result or display the statistical result in different charts.

Version: 01 347
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.9 Managing Statistics Export Tasks

This task facilitates users to analyze traffic data of the equipment and supports exporting the
analysis data. The statistics export task supports exporting traffic analysis, TopN traffic
ranking, 15-minute performance, and 15-minute performance data of equipment traffic and
health degree.

7.9.1 Traffic Analysis Export Tasks

The export task of traffic analysis supports exporting the PON Traffic Analysis,
Equipment Health Degree Analysis and Optical Power Analysis reports to the FTP
server, so as to provide specialized and abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic Statistic in the left pane to view the existing
export task of traffic analysis.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters on the Basic Information, Object Source, and Extend
Information tabs in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

Table 7-7 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Performance Traffic Analysis

Parameter Description
Indicates the name of the traffic analysis export task, which cannot
Task Name
be edited by users.

Enable Enables the task.

Basic
Statistical Type Sets the analysis cycle of the exported report.
Information
Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.

348 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-7 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Performance Traffic Analysis (Continued)

Parameter Description
Object
Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.
Source
Extend XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.
Information Report Template Sets the template used by the exported report.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.2 TopN Traffic Ranking Export Tasks

This task supports exporting the reports of TopN Traffic Ranking and TopN Equipment
Health Degree Ranking to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant
report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic TopN Ranking Statistic in the left pane to
view the existing export task of TopN traffic ranking.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears. Click OK.

Table 7-8 Parameter Description of the Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking

Parameter Description
Indicates the name of the TopN traffic ranking export task,
Task Name
Basic which cannot be edited by users.

Information Enable Selects it to enable the task.

Statistical Type Sets the analysis cycle of the exported report.

Version: 01 349
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-8 Parameter Description of the Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking (Continued)

Parameter Description
Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Object Source Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.
XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.
Report Template Sets the template used by the exported report.

Extend Object Type Sets the object type in the exported report.
Information Performance
Sets the performance specification in the exported report.
Specification

Ranking Number Sets the ranking number in the exported report.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.3 15-Minute Performance Export Tasks

The export task of 15-minute performance supports exporting the 15-minute

performance report to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant report
service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→15 Minute Performance Export Task in the left
pane to view the existing export task of 15-minute performance.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears and click
OK.

350 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-9 Parameter Description of the Export Task of 15-minute Performance

Parameter Description
Indicates the name of the 15-minute performance export task,
Task Name
Basic which cannot be edited by users.

Information Enable Selects it to enable the task.

Execution Cycle Sets the execution cycle of the report export task.
XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.
File Type Sets the file type of the exported report.
Extend
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
Information
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Cycle Sets the cycle of the report exporting.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.4 Export Tasks of Equipment Traffic and 15-Minute

Performance of Health Degree

The UNM2000 supports exporting the equipment flow and the 15-minute performance of
health degree to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant report service to
users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic and Health Degree 15 Minute

Performance Export Task in the left pane to view the existing export task of
equipment traffic and the 15-minute performance of health degree.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

Version: 01 351
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears and click
OK.

Table 7-10 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Equipment Traffic and 15-minute Performance
of Health Degree

Parameter Description
Indicates the name of the export task of equipment traffic and
Basic Task Name 15-minute performance of health degree. The name cannot be
Information edited.
Enable Selects it to enable the task.
Object Source Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.
XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.
Extend
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
Information
End Time Sets the end time of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.5 Optical Module Information Export Tasks

The UNM2000 supports exporting the information of the optical module to the FTP server,
so as to provide specialized and abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→OptModule Information Export Task in the left

pane to view the existing information export tasks of the optical module.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears and click
OK.

352 Version: 01
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-11 Information Export Task Settings of the Optical Module

Parameter Description
Sets the name of the optical module information export task,
Task Name
Basic which cannot be edited by users.

Information Enable Selects it to enable the task.

Execution Cycle Sets the execution cycle of the report export task.

Object Source Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.

Extend XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.

Information Report Template Sets the template of the task report.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

Version: 01 353
8 Log Management

The logs record the operation information of the UNM2000 users and the important events
occurred in the system. By querying, gathering statistics of and saving logs regularly, the
administrator can detect illegal login and operations, and analyze the failures. By browsing
and gathering statistics of login, the administrator can query the operation information of
the EMS and save the logs.

8.1 Log Management Policy

The log management policy includes UNM2000 log management, northbound interface
command log management, log saving management, log forwarding management and log
export management.

UNM2000 Logs

The UNM2000 logs include system logs, operation logs and security logs.

u The UNM2000 system logs record the tasks that influence the running of the
UNM2000. By viewing the UNM2000 system logs, you can detect the failure that may
influence the running of the UNM2000 and process it in a timely manner so as to
ensure the normal running of the UNM2000.

u The operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end
(such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms) except the
operations that influence the security of the UNM2000. By viewing the operation logs,
you can understand the operation performed at the UNM2000 client end so as to trace
and audit the operations. This provides support to elimination of the influence caused
by misoperation.

u The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that
influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and
unlocking. By viewing the UNM2000 security logs, you can understand the operations
performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence the security of the UNM2000.
Querying the security logs on a regular basis can effectively ensure the security of the
UNM2000.

354 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Northbound Interface Command Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the device by
the users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound interface commands. You can
view the northbound command logs to understand the northbound interface command
operations performed on the device and obtain the device running information. The
northbound interface command logs include the TL1 command logs and Web service
command logs.

Log Saving

By setting the scheduled save task of logs, the UNM2000 will save the logs to the specified
directory regularly, which provides convenience for viewing logs and reduces the records in
the database so as to improve the running speed of the system.

Log Forwarding

The UNM2000 supports forwarding the UNM2000 logs to the FTP server to save various
logs, providing reference for maintenance and relieving the storage pressure of the
UNM2000 sever.

Log Export

The UNM2000 enables you to export the UNM2000 logs to the specified directory so as to
reduce the storage pressure on the UNM2000 server. The logs can be exported as a TXT,
Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file.

8.2 Log Type

The UNM2000 log types include system logs, operation logs, security logs and northbound
interface command logs.

8.2.1 System Logs

The UNM2000 system logs record the running status of the UNM2000. By viewing the
UNM2000 system logs, you can detect the failure that may influence the running of the
UNM2000 and process it in a timely manner so as to ensure the normal running of the
UNM2000.

Version: 01 355
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The system logs are stored in the database. You can query the operation logs via the client
end.

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning, Normal
Danger Level
and Danger.

Source The UNM2000 module in which the operations are performed.

Time Time of the operation execution.

Operation
The operational terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
The operation result:Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.
u Succeeded:The operation is successful and all the operation results are
returned.
Operation Result
u Failed:The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded:The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all the
operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

8.2.2 Operation Logs

The UNM2000 operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client
end (such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms) except the
operations that influence the security of the UNM2000. By viewing the operation logs, you
can understand the operation performed at the UNM2000 client end so as to trace and audit
the operations.

The operation logs are stored in the database. You can view the operation logs via the client
end.

Log Meaning

The operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end (such as
creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms) except the operations that
influence the security of the UNM2000.

356 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
Operation
The name of the operation performed by users in the UNM2000.
Name
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning, Normal and
Danger Level
Danger.

Username The UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

The login mode of the user who performs the operation, including Login to NMS and
Login Mode
Login to Northbound Interface.
User Type The type of the UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

Operation
Time of the operation execution.
Time
Operation
The IP address of the terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

The operation result:Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.

u Succeeded:The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation returned.
Result u Failed:The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded:The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all the
operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

8.2.3 Security Logs

The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence
the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and unlocking. By
viewing the security logs, you can understand the operations performed at the UNM2000
client end that influence the security of the UNM2000. Querying the security logs on a
regular basis can effectively ensure the security of the UNM2000.

The security logs are stored in the database. You can view the security logs via the client
end.

Version: 01 357
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Log Meaning

The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence
the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and unlocking.

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
Security Event The security-related operations in the UNM2000.

The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning, Normal
Danger Level
and Danger.

Username The UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

The login mode of the user who performs the operation, including Login to NMS
Login Mode
and Login to Northbound Interface.
User Type The type of the UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

Operation Time Time of the operation execution.

Operation
The IP address of the terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

The operation result:Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.

u Succeeded:The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation returned.
Result u Failed:The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded:The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all the
operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

8.2.4 Northbound Interface Command Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the device by
the users on the UNM2000 client via the northbound interface commands. You can view the
northbound command logs to understand the northbound interface command operations
performed and obtain the device running information. The northbound interface command
logs include the TL1 command logs, Web service command logs, Socket operation logs and
alarm logs.

358 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Log Meaning

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the equipment
by the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client via the northbound interface commands.

Description of Log Parameters

u Parameters of the TL1 Command Logs

Parameter Description

No. The number of the TL1 command log

NE IP Address The IP address of the NE

Terminal IP The terminal IP address of the TL1 interface command
Terminal Port The terminal port number of the TL1 interface command

The operation result includes Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.

u Success: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation Result returned.
u Failed: The operation failed.
u Part Succeeded: The operation is partly successful.

Start time The time when the TL1 interface command starts
End time The time when the TL1 interface command ends
Duration The time duration that the TL1 interface command lasts
Details The error information of TL1 interface command
Operation Name The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users

Operation Object Object of the operation

Deliver Command The TL1 commands delivered to NEs by NE users

u Parameters of Web Service Command Logs

Parameter Description

No. The number of the Web service command log

NE IP Address The IP address of the NE

The operation result includes Succeeded and Failed.
u Success: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation Result
returned.
u Failed: The operation failed.

The start time of the range in which the desired Web service interface
Start time
commands were delivered
The end time of the range in which the desired Web service interface
End time
commands were delivered
Duration The time duration that the desired Web service interface commands lasted

Version: 01 359
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Parameter Description

Details The details recording the query errors of Web service interface commands

ONU MAC/SN The MAC address or SN of the ONU in the Web service command log

HG MAC The MAC address of the HG in the Web service command log

Failure Reason The reason why the operation failed

Operation Name The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users

Operation Object Object of the operation

Command issued The Web service commands delivered by NE users to the NE

u Parameters of Socket Operation Logs

Parameter Description

No. The number of the Socket interface logs

Client IP Address The IP address of the client

The operation result includes Succeeded and Failed.
u Success: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation Result
returned.
u Failed: The operation failed.

Connection Time The connection time of the Socket interface command

Disconnect Time The disconnection time of the Socket interface command
Duration The duration of the Socket interface command
Details The error information of Socket interface command
User Name The username of the Socket interface command
Operation Name The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users

Channel ID The channel ID of the Socket interface command

Deliver Command The Socket interface commands delivered by NE users to the NE

u Parameters of the Alarm List Logs

Parameter Description

List ID List ID of the alarm logs

Alarm Title Title of the alarm

Channel ID Channel ID of the alarm
Alarm Status Status of the alarm: active alarm or cleared alarm
Alarm Type Type of the alarm

360 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Parameter Description
Level of the alarm:
u Level-1 alarm
Original Level u Level-2 alarm
u Level-3 alarm
u Level-4 alarm
Event Happen Time The alarm occurrence time or clearing time

Alarm Unique Mark ID of the device alarm

Alarm Reason The reason that triggers the alarm

Alarm NE UID The UID of the alarmed device

Alarm NE Name The name of the alarmed NE
Alarm NE Device Type The type of the alarmed NE

Alarm Location Object UID The UID of the alarmed object

Alarm Location Object Name The name of the alarmed object

Alarm Location Object Source

The resource type of the alarmed object
Type

The location information of the alarm, such as shelf number, slot

Alarm Location Info
number and card number
Alarm Info Help Used for customized information, including names and values

8.3 Log Statistics

The UNM2000 supports gathering the statistics of the system logs, operation logs, security
logs and northbound interface command logs. You can gather statistics and perform analysis
for logs by setting System Log Statistics Conditions and Query Filtering Conditions,
so as to understand the statistics conditions of relevant operation quickly.

Procedure

The procedures of gathering statistics of logs of different types are similar. The following
takes the system log as an example.

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical System Logs.

2. Set the query conditions according to Table 8-1 and click OK.

Version: 01 361
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 8-1 Parameter Description of the statistical system logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the items to be
Row Select the items to be displayed in the drop-down
displayed in the row of the
Statistics menu of Row Statistics.
Basic statistics result.
Info Sets the items to be
Column Select the items to be displayed in the drop-down
displayed in the column of
Statistics menu of Column Statistics.
the statistics result.

Select Source, click and then select the

system to be queried in the Select Source dialog
Select the query objects of
Source Info box.
the system log.
Note:
u The system logs of all users are queried by
default.
Queries the operation In the Operation Result group box, select one or
Operation Result record according to the more options. By default, all the options are
operation result. selected.
Queries the operation In the Danger Level group box, select one or
Danger Level record according to danger more options. By default, all the options are
level. selected.
Sets the time range to
query the operation logs in
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Time Range this time range. If no time
the following text box.
range is set, it will query
all logs.

Filter the operation logs by

Select Details contain and enter the fields
querying the information
Details contain contained in the Details in the text box at the
in the Details contain text
right side.
box.

3. View the result in the Statistical System Logs tab.

Other Operation

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

362 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

8.4 Managing System Logs

The system logs records the automatic operations of the UNM2000, facilitating users to
understand the UNM2000 running status. The following introduces how to manage the
system log templates and query system logs.

8.4.1 Managing System Log Templates

To query the system logs conveniently and quickly, you can set the most concerned system
log types as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query System Logs.

2. Click Query on the System Logs tab to bring up the Query System Logs dialog
box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the system log query requirement, referring to
Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Parameter Description of the Query System Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select Source, click and then select the

system to be queried in the Select Source dialog
Select the query objects of
Source Info box.
the system log.
Note:
u The system logs of all users are queried by
default.
Queries the operation record
Operation In the Operation Result group box, select one or
according to the operation
Result more options. By default, all the options are selected.
result.

Version: 01 363
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 8-2 Parameter Description of the Query System Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Query the operation record In the Danger Level group box, select one or more
Danger Level
according to danger level. options. By default, all the options are selected.

Sets the time range to query

the operation logs in this Select Start Time or End Time and set time in the
Time Range
time range. If no time range following text box.
is set, it will query all logs.

Filter the operation logs by

Select Details contain and enter the fields
querying the information in
Details contain contained in the Details in the text box at the right
the Details contain text
side.
box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the system log query template.

Other Operation

On the System Logs tab, right-click the entry to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

8.4.2 Querying System Logs

The system logs record the automatic operations of the UNM2000, facilitating you to
understand the UNM2000 running status.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query System Logs.

2. View the query result on the System Logs tab. All the system logs of the current day
are queried by default.

364 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

3. Double-click the selected system log on the System Logs tab to view the detailed
information.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u Buttons on the GUI

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result. Managing System Log
Templates shows the parameters of the query conditions.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menu

Version: 01 365
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Right-click the System Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

u Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

u Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

u Template Management: Manages the log query template. You can edit or delete
the existing log template.

u Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

u Print: Prints the queried log.

u Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected directory
in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

u Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.5 Managing Operation Logs

The operation logs record the operation information of users, enabling you to trace and
check user operations. The following introduces how to manage the operation log templates
and query operation logs.

8.5.1 Managing Operation Log Templates

To query the user operations conveniently and quickly, you can set the most concerned
operation log types as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Operation Logs.

2. Click Query on the Operation Logs tab to bring up the Query Operation Logs
dialog box.

366 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

3. Set the query conditions according to the operation log query requirement, referring to
Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 Parameters in the Query Operation Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select User Name, click , and select the user

to be queried in the Select User dialog box.
Note:
User Select users to query
u The operation logs of all users will be queried
Name their operation logs.
by default.
u The Select User dialog box only shows the
users that logged into the UNM2000 and
User Info
performed operations.

Select the operation Select Operation Terminal, click , and

Opera- terminal and query select the operation terminal to be queried in the
tion operation records Select Operation Terminal dialog box.
Terminal according to the Note:
operation terminal. The operation logs of all operation terminals will be
queried by default.

Query the operation

Select one or multiple check boxes for Operation
Operation Result record according to the
Result. All check boxes are selected by default.
operation result.

Query the operation

Select one or multiple check boxes for Danger
Danger Level record according to
Level. All check boxes are selected by default.
danger level.

Set the time range to

query the operation
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in the
Start Time Range records in this range. If
following text box.
this item is not set,
query logs in all times.

Filter the operation logs

by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details in the text box at the right
Details contain text side.
box.

Version: 01 367
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 8-3 Parameters in the Query Operation Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Click Select under the Operation Name box and

Sets the operations to be
Operation Name select the desired operation name from the Select
queried.
Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object box.

Sets the operation
Operation Object Select the operation object to be queried in the
object to be queried.
Select Operation Object dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the operation log query template.

Other Operations

On the Operation Logs tab, right-click the entry to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

8.5.2 Querying Operation Logs

The operation logs record the operation information of users, enabling you to trace and
check user operations.

Background Information

u Filter according to username when querying operation logs. The Unselected Value
Filter pane in the Select User dialog box only displays the names of users that have
performed operations.

u The range of operation logs that users of different groups can view:

4 Users in Administrators group can view the operation logs of all the users.

4 Users in Security Administrator Group with the Query Operation Logs

authority can view the operation logs of all users.

4 The common users that have the Query Operation Logs authority but belong to
neither the Security Administrator Group nor the Administrators group can
only view their own operation logs.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Operation Logs.

368 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

2. View the query result on the Operation Logs tab. All the operation logs of the current
day are queried by default.

3. Double-click the selected operation log on the Operation Logs tab to view the
detailed information.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result. Managing Operation
Log Templates shows the parameter descriptions of the query condition.

Version: 01 369
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Delete: Deletes the selected operation log.

4 View Data: Views the data information of operation records in the corresponding
operation logs.

Note:

The View Data function is only available for viewing the operation logs of
writing service configuration to device.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menu

Right-click the Operation Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Operation Log Templates.

4 View Data: Views the data information of operation records in the corresponding
operation logs.

4 Delete: Deletes the selected operation log.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Template Management: Manages the log query template. You can edit or delete
the existing log template.

4 Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

4 Print: Prints the queried operation log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected directory
in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

370 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

8.6 Managing Security Logs

The security logs record the information on the security operations performed by the
UNM2000. Querying security logs regularly helps ensuring the security of the network
management system effectively. The following introduces how to manage security log
templates and query the security logs.

8.6.1 Managing Security Log Templates

To query the UNM2000 security logs conveniently and quickly, you can set the most
concerned security log types as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Security Logs.

2. Click Query on the Security Logs tab to bring up the Query Security Logs dialog
box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the security log query requirement, referring to
Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Parameter Description of the Query Security Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select User Name, click , and select the

user to be queried in the Select User dialog box.
User User Selects users to query their Note:
Info Name security logs. u The security logs of all users will be queried
by default.
u The Select User dialog box only shows the
users that logged into the UNM2000.

Version: 01 371
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 8-4 Parameter Description of the Query Security Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Select Operation Terminal, click , and

Selects the operation
select the operation terminal to be queried in the
Operation terminal. Query security
Select Operation Terminal dialog box.
Terminal records according to the
Note:
operation terminal.
The security logs of all operation terminals will
be queried by default.

Queries the security

Select one or multiple check boxes for Operation
Operation Result operation record according
Result. All check boxes are selected by default.
to the operation result.

Queries the security record Select one or multiple check boxes for Danger
Danger Level
according to danger level. Level. All check boxes are selected by default.

Sets the time range to

query the security records
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Start Time Range in this range. If this item is
the following text box.
not set, query logs in all
times.
Filters the security logs by
Select Details contain and enter the fields
querying the information
Details contain contained in the Details in the text box at the
in the Details contain text
right side.
box.
Click Select under the Select Security Event
Select Security Sets the security event to
box. Select the name of operation to be queried in
Event be queried.
the Select Security Event dialog box.

Click Select under the Select Operation

Select Operation Sets the operation object to Object box. Select the operation object to be
Object be queried. queried in the Select Operation Object dialog
box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the security log query template.

Other Operations

On the Security Logs tab, right-click the entry to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

372 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

8.6.2 Querying Security Logs

The security logs record the information related to the security operations on the
UNM2000. Querying security logs regularly helps ensure the security of the network
management system effectively.

Background Information

The user with the Query Security Logs authority can view the security logs of all users.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Security Logs.

2. On the Security Logs tab, view the query result. The system displays all the security
logs of the current day by default.

3. On the Security Logs tab, double-click the desired security log to view the log details.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects the existing template and obtains the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Security Log Templates.

Version: 01 373
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Security Logs tab to bring up the shortcut menu. The descriptions of
the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Security Log Templates.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Template management: Manages the log query templates or edits / deletes the
existing log query template. See Managing Security Log Templates.

4 Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected directory
in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7 Managing Northbound Interface Command

Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the device by
the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound interface commands.
You can view the northbound command logs to understand the northbound interface
command operations received by the device and obtain the device running information.

8.7.1 Managing TL1 Command Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the TL1 commands accepted and executed by the NEs,
you can set the most concerned TL1 commands as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

374 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select TL1
Command Logs tab and click Query to open the Query TL1 Command Log dialog
box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed, referring to Table 8-5.

Table 8-5 Description of the Parameters in the Query TL1 Command Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Queries the operation In the Operation Result group box, select one or
Operation Result record according to the more options. By default, all the options are
operation result. selected.
Sets the time range to
query the security
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Start Time Range operation logs in this time
the following text box.
range. If no time range is
set, it will query all logs.

Filters the TL1 command

logs according to the Select Send Commands contain and enter the
Send Commands
information in the Send fields contained in the Send Commands in the
contain
Commands contain text box at the right side.
textbox.
Click Select under the Operation Name box
Select Operation Selects the operation
and select the desired operation name from the
Name commands to be queried.
Select Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object box.

Select Operation Sets the operation object to
Select the operation object to be queried in the
Object be queried.
Select Operation Object dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

8.7.2 Querying TL1 Command Logs

The TL1 command logs record the operations performed on the device by the UNM2000
users on the UNM2000 client end via the TL1 commands. You can view the TL1 command

Version: 01 375
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

logs to understand the operations performed on the device by the UNM2000 users via the
TL1 commands and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the TL1
Command Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all the TL1
command logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click a TL1 command log entry to view the details of theTL1 command log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing TL1 Command Log Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the TL1 Command Logs tab to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing TL1 Command Log Templates.

376 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.3 Collecting Statistics of TL1 Command Logs

The TL1 command logs record the operations performed on the device by the UNM2000
users on the UNM2000 client end via the TL1 commands. You can collect statistics on TL1
command logs to understand the operations performed on the device by the UNM2000
users via the TL1 commands and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical Northbound Interface Command

Logs from the main menu.

2. In the lower left corner of the Statistical Northbound Interface Command Logs
window, select the TL1 Command Logs tab.

3. Click Query on the right to open the Statistical TL1 Command Log dialog box.

4. You can set the parameters for collecting statistics on TL1 command logs. For setting
the parameters, see Table 8-6.

5. Click OK to view the statistics result.

Table 8-6 Description of the Parameters in the Statistical TL1 Command Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Basic
Sets the items to be displayed in Select the items to be displayed in the drop-down menu of
Informa- Row Statistics
the row of the statistics result. Row Statistics.
tion

Version: 01 377
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 8-6 Description of the Parameters in the Statistical TL1 Command Log Dialog Box
(Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the items to be displayed in
Statistical Select the items to be displayed in the drop-down menu of
Note 1
the column of the statistics
Column Column Statistics.
result.
If it is selected, the pattern of
The pattern of this table depends on the values of the
Preview the statistical output table is
statistical row and column.
displayed.

Queries the operation record

In the Operation Result group box, select one or more
Operation Result according to the operation
options. By default, all the options are selected.
result.
Sets the time range to query the
operation logs in this time Select Latest Time or Time Range to set the statistical
Start Time Range
range. If no time range is set, it time of TL1 command logs.
will query all logs.
Addition-
Filters the TL1 command logs
al Select Send Commands contain and enter the fields
Send Commands according to the information in
Informa- contained in the Send Commands in the text box at the
contain the Send Commands contain
tion right side.
textbox.
Click Select under the Operation Name box and select
Select Operation Selects the operation commands
the desired operation name from the Select Operation
Name to be queried.
Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object box. Select the

Select Operation Sets the operation object to be
operation object to be queried in the Select Operation
Object queried.
Object dialog box.

Note 1: The values of the statistical low data and column data cannot be the same; otherwise, errors may occur.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

u Shortcut menus

378 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Right-click the TL1 Command Logs tab to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the log statistics.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the log statistics into the selected directory
in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.4 Managing Web Service Command Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the Web service commands accepted and executed by
the NEs, you can set the most concerned Web service commands as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Web Service Command Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Web Service
Command Log dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed. See Table 8-7.

Version: 01 379
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 8-7 Description of the Parameters in the Query Web Service Command Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

In the Operation Result group

Queries the operation record
Operation Result box, select one or more options. By
according to the operation result.
default, all the options are selected.

Sets the time range to query the

Select Latest Time or Time
security operation logs in this time
Start Time Range Range and set time in the
range. If no time range is set, it will
following text box.
query all logs.

Sets the IP address of the OLT in the

OLT IP Enter it manually.
Web service command log.

Sets the MAC address or SN of the

ONU MAC/SN ONU in the Web service command Enter it manually.
log.

Sets the MAC address of the HG in

HG MAC Enter it manually.
the Web service command log.

Queries the operation records

Failure Reason according to the operation failure Enter it manually.
reason.
Select Send Commands contain
Filters the TL1 command logs
and enter the fields contained in the
Send Commands contain according to the information in the
Send Commands in the text box
Send Commands contain text box.
at the right side.

Click Select under the Operation

Selects the operation commands to Name box and select the desired
Select Operation Name
be queried. operation name from the Select
Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation

Sets the operation object to be Object box. Select the operation
Select Operation Object
queried. object to be queried in the Select
Operation Object dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

380 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

8.7.5 Querying Web Service Command Logs

The Web service command logs record the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the Web service commands. You can view
the Web service command logs to understand the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users via the Web Service commands and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Web Service Command Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all
the Web service command logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click a Web service command log to view the details of the Web service
command log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Web Service Command Log Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Version: 01 381
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Right-click the Web Service Command Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut
menu. The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Web Service Command Log Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.6 Querying Web Service Command Logs

The Web service command logs record the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client via the Web service commands. You can collect
statistics on Web service command logs to understand the operations performed and obtain
the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical Northbound Interface Command

Logs from the main menu.

2. In the lower left corner of the Statistical Northbound Interface Command Logs
window, select the Web Service Command Logs tab.

3. Click Query on the right to open the Statistical Web Service Command Log dialog
box.

4. You can set the parameters for collecting statistics on Web service command logs. For
setting the parameters, see Table 8-8.

5. Click OK to view the statistics result.

382 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Table 8-8 Description of the Parameters in the Statistical Web Service Command Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the items to be displayed in the Select the items to be displayed in the drop-
Row Statistics
row of the statistics result. down menu of Row Statistics.

Statistical ColumnNote Sets the items to be displayed in the Select the items to be displayed in the drop-
Basic Info 1
column of the statistics result. down menu of Column Statistics.
If it is selected, the pattern of the The pattern of this table depends on the
Preview
statistical output table is displayed. values of the statistical row and column.
In the Operation Result group box, select
Queries the operation record according
Operation Result one or more options. By default, all the
to the operation result.
options are selected.

Sets the time range to query the Select Latest Time or Time Range to set
Start Time Range operation logs in this time range. If no the statistical time of Web service command
time range is set, it will query all logs. logs.

Sets the IP address of the OLT in the

OLT IP Enter it manually.
Web service command log.

Sets the MAC address or SN of the

ONU MAC/SN Enter it manually.
ONU in the Web service command log.

Sets the MAC address of the HG in the

HG MAC Enter it manually.
Additional Web service command log.
Information Queries the operation records according
Failure Reason Enter it manually.
to the operation failure reason.

Filters the Web service command logs Select Send Commands contain and enter
Send Commands
according to the information in the the fields contained in the Send
contain
Send Commands contain text box. Commands in the text box at the right side.

Click Select under the Operation Name

Select Operation Selects the operation commands to be box and select the desired operation name
Name queried. from the Select Operation Name dialog
box.
Click Select under the Operation Object
Select Operation
Sets the operation object to be queried. box. Select the operation object to be queried
Object
in the Select Operation Object dialog box.

Note 1: The values of the statistical row data and column data cannot be the same; otherwise, errors may occur.

Other Operation

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client.

Version: 01 383
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Web Service Command Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut
menu. The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the log statistics.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the log statistics into the selected directory
in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.7 Querying Socket Operation Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the Socket interface commands accepted and executed
by the NEs, you can set the most concerned Socket interface commands as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select Socket
Operation Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Socket Operation Log
dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed, referring to Table 8-9.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

384 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Table 8-9 Parameters in the Query Socket Operation Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select User Name or Operation

User information related to the Terminal, click the selection button
User Info
operation interface command and set the options in the displayed
dialog box.

In the Operation Result group box,

Queries the operation record
Operation Result select one or more options. By default,
according to the operation result.
all the options are selected.

Sets the time range to query the

Select Latest Time or Time Range
Start Time Range security operation records in this
and set time in the following textbox.
range.

Sets the time range to query the

Disconnect Time security operation logs in this time Select Start Time and End Time, and
Range range. If no time range is set, it will set time in the following text box.
query all logs.

Filters the Socket operation logs Select Send Commands contain and
Send Commands according to the information in the enter the fields contained in the Send
contain Send Commands contain Commands in the text box at the right
textbox. side.
Queries the channel ID of the
Channel ID Enter it manually.
Socket interface operation.

Click Select under the Operation

Selects the operation commands to Name box and select the desired
Select Operation Name
be queried. operation name from the Select
Operation Name dialog box.

8.7.8 Querying Socket Operation Logs

The Socket operation logs record the Socket interface operations performed on the
UNM2000 client end by the UNM2000 users. You can view the Socket operation logs to
understand the Socket interface operations performed by the UNM2000 users and obtain
the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 385
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Socket Operation Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all Socket
operation logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click a Socket operation log to view the details of the Socket interface
operation log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Querying Socket Operation Log Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Socket Operation Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu.
The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Querying Socket Operation Log Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

386 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.9 Managing Alarm List Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the alarm list commands accepted and executed by the
NEs, you can set the most concerned alarm list commands as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Alarm List Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Alarm List Logs dialog
box.

3. Set the query criteria as needed, referring to Table 8-10.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

Table 8-10 Parameter Description of the Query Alarm List Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the time range to query the
Select Latest Time or Time Range
Start Time Range security operation records in this
and set time in the following text box.
range.

Select List ID or Range to set the list

Alarm List Info Sets the alarm list ID information.
ID information.
Queries the channel ID of the alarm
Channel ID Enter it manually.
list ID.

8.7.10 Querying Alarm List Logs

Alarm list logs record the list of alarms triggered by user operations at the UNM2000 client.
The alarm list logs include active alarms and cleared alarms.

Version: 01 387
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Alarm List Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all alarm list logs of
the current day by default.

3. Double-click an alarm list log to view the details of the alarm list log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operation

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and displays
them at the client.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the logs
that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Alarm List Log Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Alarm List Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the description of
the query parameters, see Managing Alarm List Log Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

388 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.8 Managing Log Data

By saving logs, you can clear the unnecessary logs manually or on a regular basis to avoid
that the logs occupy too many resources. By exporting the logs as files, you can view logs
or locate failures.

8.8.1 Managing the Log Forwarding Server

By setting the log forwarding server, you can forward the logs of the UNM2000 to other
servers.

8.8.1.1 Viewing the Syslog Forwarding Server

Check whether the preset Syslog forwarding server meets the requirement.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→System Log Forwarding Server Management from the main

menu to open the System Log Forwarding Server Management tab, and view the
information of the existing Syslog forwarding server.

Other Operations

Click the button below or the right-click the corresponding entry to select Modify, Stop /
Enable, Delete, Refresh, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

Version: 01 389
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

8.8.1.2 Adding A Syslog Forwarding Server

You can add a new Syslog forwarding server if the existing server cannot meet the
requirement.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→System Log Forwarding Server Management from the main

menu to open the System Log Forwarding Server Management tab.

2. Right-click in the blank area of the System Log Forwarding Server Management
tab and select Add to open the System Log Forwarding Server Settings dialog
box.

3. Set the parameters of the Syslog forwarding server, referring to Table 8-11.

Table 8-11 Description of the Syslog Forwarding Server

Parameter Description
Server Server IP Sets the IP address of the Syslog forwarding server.
Information
Server Port Sets the port of the Syslog forwarding server.

Sets the type of log to be forwarded, including:

u System Logs
u Security Logs
Log Type u Operation Logs
u NE Logs
u TL1 Logs
u Current Alarm Logs
Syslog Sets the level of logs to be forwarded, including:
Information u EMERG:the system is unavailable.
u ALERT:the event should be handled in a timely manner.
u CRIT:critical event.
Log Level u ERR:error event.
u WARNING:warning event.
u NOTICE:common but important event.
u INFO:useful information.
u DEBUG:debugging information.

390 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Table 8-11 Description of the Syslog Forwarding Server (Continued)

Parameter Description
Sets the facility level to be forwarded, consistent with the setting on
the Syslog forwarding server side. including:
u KERN:kernel log information.
u USER:random user log information.
u MAIL:mail system log information.
u DAEMON:system daemon process log information.
u AUTH:security management log information.
Facility Level u SYSLOG:Syslog forwarding server log information.
u LPR:printer log information.
u NEWS:news service log information.
u UUCP:UUCP system log information.
u CRON:log information of the system daemon process CRON.
u AUTHPRIV:private security management log information.
u DAEMON:system daemon process log information.
u LOCAL0 to 7:reserve for local.
Sets the transmission protocol type, including TCP and UDP, which
protocol type should be consistent with the setting of the Syslog forwarding
server.
Character String Sets the character string, and the logs comply with the character
Other
Filtering string filtering conditions will be forwarded.
Information
Comment Sets the remark information.
Enabled Sets whether to enable the current settings.

4. Click OK to add a new Syslog forwarding server.

8.8.2 Setting the Log Overflow Saving

Set the saving task of the log overflow. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether the log
data history (operation logs, TL1 logs, system logs, NE logs and security logs) of the
database meets the pre-set conditions. If the overflow saving conditions are met, the
UNM2000 saves the log data automatically. The saved log data history will be deleted from
the database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which cannot be
deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the corresponding task as
needed.
Version: 01 391
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The procedures of setting log overflow saving are similar. The following takes setting
operation log overflow saving as an example.

1. Select System→Save Data to open the Save the Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→Save Operation Log Overflow

from the left pane to view the existing saving task of operation log overflow.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute dialog box of
the corresponding saving task of alarm history overflow.

No. Access Method

1 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click on the left side of Overflow Saving, and right-click the
3
corresponding overflow saving task to select Attribute.

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 8-12.

Table 8-12 Description of the Overflow Saving Task Parameters

Parameter Description

Task Name The name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be edited by users.

Enabled Select it to enable the task.

Task Type Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is Every 2 days.
Basic
Execution
Information Sets the execution time of the task.
Time
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the overflow
saving conditions into files.
Extended You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them into
Saving Mode
information the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions directly.

392 Version: 01
 8 Log Management

Table 8-12 Description of the Overflow Saving Task Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description
If the data history exceeds the maximum saving entry number or
Overflow
exceeds the record threshold, a pre-set proportion of the database will be
Limit
saved.
Capacity The data history that exceeds the reserving days of the database will be
Limit saved during the saving task.

5. Click OK.

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click Execute Now
in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

8.8.3 Setting the Manual Log Saving

To prevent insufficient space, the UNM2000 supports saving operation logs, system logs,
NE logs, security logs and TL1 logs manually

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of log data, which cannot be
deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding saving task as needed.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time. You
can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the saved file by
modifying the background configuration file. For specific operations, contact
the FiberHome technical engineer. The procedures for setting manual saving of
logs are the similar. The following uses the operation logs as an example to
introduce how to set the manual saving.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: 01 393
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→Save Operation Log from the left
pane to view the existing manual saving task of operation log.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute dialog box of
the corresponding manual saving task of data history.

No. Access Method

1 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

2 Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and select Attribute.

In the left pane, click on the left side of Save Manually, and right-click the
3
corresponding manual saving task to select Attribute.

4. Modify the parameters of the corresponding task in the Attribute dialog box according
to requirement and click OK.

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute Now
in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

394 Version: 01
9 Resource Statistics Management

Resource statistics management enables you to manage statistics of all physical resources
and logical resources in the network. The UNM2000 provides the unified resource statistics
and statistics export, which helps you understand the usage of all network resources in real
time, and supports service planning and network capacity expansion.

9.1 Function Overview

Resource statistics management mainly includes Resource Statistics, Statistics Export

and Statistical Template Management. You can gather statistics on all network
resources in real time or at the preset time and export the statistical result as a report.

The function is described as shown in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Description of Resource Statistics Management

Statistical Report Generation

Function Name Function Description
Method
Sets the statistical range to gather statistics
u Displays it on the UNM2000
on physical resources and logical resources
Resource GUI in real time.
in the entire network.
Statistics u Exports it to the local
Filters the resources in the object tree based
computer.
on the statistical range.

Creates scheduled tasks to gather statistics

Automatically exports it to the FTP
Export Statistics of physical resources and logical resources
server.
in the entire network at specified time.

The UNM2000 enables you to manage

Statistical default and custom templates.
Template Upon creating statistical tasks, you can -
Management select statistical templates according to
statistical requirements.

Resource Statistical Report Panorama

Table 9-2 shows the resource statistical reports supported by the UNM2000.

Version: 01 395
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on information of
Logical address, NE
the specified NE in the specified
name, NE IP address,
area, including basic information,
NE type, NE version,
slot usage, service card usage,
NE Resource NE protocol type, slot
uplink card usage, PON service card
Statistics Report usage, service card
usage and PON port usage.
usage, uplink card usage,
Gathers statistics on the number of
PON service card usage
NEs in the specified area based on
and PON port usage.
NE type or NE version.

Gathers statistics on the information

of all cards under the specified NE, Card name, card type,
including NE basic information, slot address, card
card basic information, online software version, card
Physical Card Resource
status, card power-on time and PON hardware version,
Resource Statistics Report
port usage. number of used PON
Statistics Report
Gathers statistics on the number of ports and PON port
cards under the specified NEs based usage.
on NE type or card type.

Gathers statistics on the information

of all ports under the specified NE,
including NE basic information,
Card port name, card
card basic information, online
port number, card port
Port Resource status, card power-on time and PON
type, port remark, status,
Statistics Report port usage.
optical module type and
Gathers statistics on the number of
PON port running status.
card ports under the specified NE
based on slot address, card type,
card name or card port type.

396 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on the information ONU authorization
of all ONUs under the specified NE, number, ONU name,
including NE basic information, ONU alias name, ONU
card basic information, card port type, ONU category,
basic information, ONU association ONU physical address,
information, LAN port usage, E1 ONU logical SN, ONU
ONU Resource
port usage, voice port usage and logical SN password,
Statistics Report
uplink / downlink bandwidth usage. ONU management IP
Gathers statistics on the number of address, ONU online
ONUs under the specified NE based status, ONU service
on NE basic information, card basic class, ONU firmware
information or ONU basic version and ONU
information. hardware version.
Gathers statistics on port attributes
of all ONUs under the specified NE,
including NE basic information,
card basic information, ONU basic ONU name, ONU alias
ONU Port information, ONU port basic name, ONU type, ONU
Resource information, ONU data port authorization number,
Statistics information, ONU voice port ONU port number, ONU
Report Note 2 information, bandwidth template port name, ONU port
and WAN connection type. type and port status.
Gathers statistics on the number of
all ONU ports under the specified
NE based on ONU port attributes.

Gathers statistics on MSAN port

attributes of the specified NE,
including the NE basic information,
card basic information, MSAN port
Port type, port remark,
MSAN Port basic information, DSL port status
port unique ID, service
Resource information, MSAN VLAN
type, CVLAN rule and
Statistics Report information and voice port
CVLAN mode.
information.
Gathers statistics on the number of
MSAN ports under the specified NE
based on MSAN port attributes.

Version: 01 397
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Area name, total
Gathers statistics on PON network quantities of PON ports,
resources in the specified logical online PON ports, OLT
Area Statistical
domain, including the PON port uplink ports, in-use OLT
Report
resource, OLT uplink port resource uplink ports and ONUs
and ONU resource. connected to the OLT,
and ONU online ratio.
Gathers statistics on quantities of
Equivalent NE actual NEs and equivalent NEs in NE type and equivalent
Statistics Report the network based on the NE type or
Note 1 coefficient.
equivalent coefficient.

Device name, device

Gathers statistics on port attributes type, device IP address,
Switch Port of the switch in the specified area, device MAC address,
Resource including device basic information, port index, port type,
Statistics Report port basic information and port port status, port
extension information. description, remark and
rate.
Customizes statistical tasks
Customizes the statistical
according to your own
items as needed, which
Custom requirements. The statistical items
should cover the NE,
Statistical include NE information, card
card, card port, ONU
Report information, card port information,
and ONU port
ONU information and ONU port
information.
information.
Gathers statistics on ONU user Card port number, ONU
information of the specified NE, authorization number,
including the NE basic information, ONU name, ONU type,
card port number, ONU basic ONU manufacturer,
ONU User
information and ONU user details. identify information,
Statistics Report
community address,
Gathers statistics on the number of
Resource mobile number, post
ONU users under the specified NE
Statistics Report code, device model and
based on the ONU user information.
of Other Types ONU service class.
Gathers statistics on local VLAN
Uplink interface number,
attributes of the specified NE,
Trunk group number,
Local VLAN including the NE basic information,
Trunk information,
Statistics Report uplink interface number, Trunk
VLAN and tag/untag
group number, Trunk information,
attributes.
VLAN and tag/untag attributes.

398 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on the number of
local VLANs of the specified NE
based on local VLAN attributes.
Gathers statistics on MGC service
attributes of the specified NE,
including the NE basic information,
MGC service attributes, primary /
MGC protocol type,
NE MGC secondary DNS server address, SIP
MGC IP address /
Service registry server information and SIP
domain address and
Statistics Report proxy server information.
MGC port number.
Gathers statistics on the number of
MGC services of the specified NE
based on MGC service attributes of
the NE.
Gathers statistics on the device
categories and types, including the
basic information, device category
Device Type and device type. Device category and
Statistics Report Gathers statistics on the quantities of device type.
various devices of the specified NE
based on the device category or
device type.

Gathers statistics on the quantities of

PON Device
PON devices and PON ports under
Capability Statistical category and
the specified NE based on the
Statistics statistical name.
Note 1
default statistical items (statistical
Report
categories and names).

Version: 01 399
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on ONU WAN WAN connection index,
service attributes of the specified WAN connection name,
NE, including the NE basic WAN connection mode,
information, ONU basic information WAN connection type,
and WAN connection service VLAN ID of WAN
information. connection, L3 rate limit
Gathers statistics on the quantity of uplink min. assured
ONU WAN
ONU WAN connection services of bandwidth, L3 rate limit
Service
the specified NE based on ONU uplink max. allowed
Statistics Report
WAN service attributes. bandwidth, L3 rate limit
downlink min. assured
bandwidth, L3 rate limit
Gathers statistics on L3 service rate
downlink max. allowed
limit based on ONU WAN
bandwidth and L3 rate
connection service attributes.
limit uplink fixed
bandwidth.
NE name, card name,
card port name, ONU
name, ONU alias name,
Gathers statistics on the out-of-
ONU Out-of- out-of-service reason,
service time of all ONUs under the
Service Time ONU accumulative
specified NE by setting the querying
Statistics Report interruption duration,
conditions.
ONU interruption times
and last interruption
duration of ONU.
Gathers statistics on management
VLAN attributes of the specified
NE, including the NE basic
information, management VLAN Management VLAN
Management
name, management VLAN type and name, management
VLAN Statistics
VLAN ID. VLAN type, VLAN ID
Report
Gathers statistics on the number of and inner VLAN ID.
management VLANs of the
specified NE based on management
VLAN attributes.
Gathers statistics on LLDP local
LLDP
information and LLDP remote LLDP status, LLDP
Information
information, including the NE basic management IP address
Statistics
information, LLDP status and LLDP and LLDP startup time
ReportNote 1
management IP address.

400 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type
Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Version: 01 401
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on local
management interface configuration
attributes of all ONUs under the
specified NE, including the NE
basic information, ONU basic
information, serial port status, Telnet
user-side / network-side attributes
and Web user-side / network-side
attributes. ONU physical address,
Gathers statistics configuration enabling,
ONU Local
on the quantity serial port, Telnet user-
Manager
of local side / network-side
Configuration
management attributes and Web user-
Statistics Report
interfaces of all side / network-side
ONU ports attributes.
under the
specified NE
based on local
management
interface
configuration
attributes of the
ONU.

402 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics
on the optical
power
information of
the specified
NE, including
OLT PON port Tx optical power,
the OLT PON
ONU uplink port Rx / Tx optical
port optical
power, OLT uplink port Rx / Tx
power, ONU
Optical Power optical power, optical module
uplink port
Statistics temperature, optical module voltage,
optical power,
ReportNote 1Note 3 maximum distance, PON port
OLT uplink port
optical module presence status and
optical power,
number of ONUs with low optical
number of
power.
ONUs with low
optical power
and the optical
modules of the
ONUs with low
optical power.

Gathers statistics
on GPON
service Logical domain, NE name, NE IP
bandwidth of address, NE type, slot address, card
ONU, including name, card type, card port number,
GPON Service
fixed bandwidth, card port name, ONU authorization
Bandwidth
assured number, ONU name, ONU alias
Statistics
bandwidth and name, ONU type, service type, fixed
maximum bandwidth, assured bandwidth and
bandwidth of maximum bandwidth.
certain service
types.

Note 1: Customizing statistical templates is not supported.

Note 2: Before executing the ONU port resource statistics, you need to set the rate limit scheme
according to Setting the Rate Limit Scheme for ONU Port Resource Statistics.
Note 3: Before executing the optical power statistical task, you need to set the statistical policy and the
low optical power threshold of ONUs according to Setting the Optical Power Statistical Policy /
ONU Low Optical Power Threshold.

Version: 01 403
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Real-time Statistical Operation GUI

Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display the Resource
Statistics tab.

(1) Access method of the real-time statistical task (2) Operational pane of the real-time statistical
task

Scheduled Export Operation GUI

Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display the Statistics
Export tab.

404 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

(1) Access method of the scheduled statistical task (2) Operational pane of the scheduled statistical
task

9.2 Setting the Resource Statistics Policy

Before executing a resource statistical task, you can set the related parameters to control the
statistical policy.

9.2.1 Setting the Optical Power Statistical Policy / ONU Low

Optical Power Threshold

Before executing the optical power statistical task, you need to set the statistical policy and
low optical power threshold.

Purpose

Set the optical power statistical policy and the ONU low optical power threshold.

Version: 01 405
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

Upon executing an optical power statistical task, the UNM2000 will collect statistics on
ONU low optical power data according to the preset policy and ONU lower optical power
threshold. The function is detailed as follows:

u Supports only collecting statistics of PON ports with optical modules.

u Supports only displaying ONUs with low optical power.

u Supports setting the low optical power threshold for the ONU Rx optical power.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Expand Resource Statistics Settings and select Optical Power Statistics/ONU

Low Light Threshold.

3. Set the optical power statistical policy and the ONU low optical power threshold
according to the following table.

Parameter Value Range

EPON low light threshold(dBm) -27 to -3
10G EPON low light threshold(symmetric/
-28.5 to -10
asymmetric)(dBm)

GPON/XGPON/XGSPON low light

-28 to -8
threshold(dBm)

406 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Parameter Value Range

Only PON ports with light modules are
Select or deselect the check box.
counted
Displays only low light ONU records Select or deselect the check box.

4. Click OK to complete the settings.

9.2.2 Setting the Rate Limit Scheme for ONU Port Resource
Statistics

Before executing the ONU port resource statistical task, you need to set the rate limit
scheme.

Purpose

Set the rate limit scheme for the ONU port resource statistical task.

Background Information

Upon executing an ONU port resource statistical task, the UNM2000 collects statistics on
ONU port rate information according to the preset rate limit scheme.

The UNM2000 supports the rate limit schemes: ONU port service configuration, ONU data
port rate limit configuration, ONU data port configuration, ONU data service configuration
and service template binding.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Expand Resource Statistics Settings and select ONU Port Resource Statistics
Speed Limit.

3. Select the rate limit scheme according to Prompt Information in the dialog box.

Version: 01 407
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click OK to complete the settings.

9.3 Managing Statistics Templates

The UNM2000 provides the unified statistical template management function, and supports
referencing, creating, modifying or deleting statistical templates.

9.3.1 Background Information

Overview

You need to select a statistical template during creating a statistical task. The UNM2000
gathers statistics on and analyzes the specified logical domains and specified NEs in the
entire network according to the template attributes (template types and statistical items).

The UNM2000 provides two statistical templates: Default Template and Custom
Template. When the default templates do not meet the requirements, you can customize
templates.

Template Type

Template Type Description Supported Operation

Default The template names and statistical items of default

- Reference
templates statistical templates cannot be modified.

Information Gathers statistics on attributes highly related to the

Custom statistics target resource based on the specified statistical items. Create, reference, modify and
templates Quantity Gathers statistics on quantity of the target resources delete
statistics based on the specified statistical items.

408 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Differences Between Information Statistics and Quantity Statistics

The following uses Card Resource Statistics as an example to introduce the differences
between information statistics and quantity statistics.

Table 9-3 Differences Between Information Statistics and Quantity Statistics

Item Information Statistics Quantity Statistics

Gathers statistics on the quantities of cards with

Gathers statistics on attributes highly related to the
Statistics Target different attributes and sum them up automatically
card.
based on the specified statistical items.

u NE information: NE name, NE IP address and

NE type
u NE information: NE name, NE IP address and
u Slot information: slot address
NE type
Statistics Item u Card information: card name, card type and
u Card information: card type and card software /
card software / hardware version
hardware version
u PON port information: number of used PON
ports and PON port usage

Displays the information of the statistical items and

Displays the information of the statistical items as
quantity of cards calculated based on the statistical
shown below.
items.

Statistical Result

9.3.2 Viewing Statistical Templates

This section introduces how to view statistical templates.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides independent template management windows for different resource
statistical objects. When a user selects resource statistical tasks, you can enter the
corresponding template management window.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Version: 01 409
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

The following introduces how to view NE statistical templates.

1. Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→NE Resource

Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2. Click to open the Custom Template dialog box and view details
of the current template.

9.3.3 Creating Statistical Templates

When the default templates cannot meet the requirements for statistics, you can create
statistical templates.

410 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Background Information

u The UNM2000 provides independent template management windows for different

resource statistical objects. When a user selects resource statistical tasks, you can enter
the corresponding template management window.

u The following resource statistical tasks do not support creating statistical templates:
equivalent NE statistics, PON device capability statistics, LLDP information statistics
and optical power statistics.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The following introduces how to create a card resource statistical template.

1. Click it to open the Custom Template dialog box.

1) Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card Resource

Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2) Click to open the Custom Template dialog box.

2. Create a template.

1) Click to display the Create Template dialog box.

Version: 01 411
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2) Setting template attributes according to Table 9-4.

Table 9-4 Template Configuration Description

Item Operation Description

Template The template name cannot be empty. It

Indicates the name of the template.
Name contains up to 30 bytes.

u Select Info Statistics: Gathers

statistics on attributes highly related
to the target resource based on the
See Table 9-3 for the difference between
Template specified statistical items.
the information statistics and quantity
Type u Select Quantity Statistics: Gathers
statistics.
statistics on quantity of the target
resources based on the specified
statistical items.
Statistics The content displayed under Statistics
Select the statistical items according to
Combination Combination Items varies with different
user requirements.
Item template types.

3) Click OK.

412 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

9.3.4 Modifying Statistical Templates

This section introduces how to modify statistical templates.

Precautions

The UNM2000 only supports modifying custom statistical templates.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The custom statistical template is available.

Procedure

The following introduces how to modify a card resource statistical template.

1. Click it to open the Custom Template dialog box.

1) Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card Resource

Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2) Click to open the Custom Template dialog box.

2. Modify a template.

1) Select a custom template and click to open the Modify Template

dialog box.

2) Modify template attributes according to Table 9-4.

Version: 01 413
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3) Click OK.

9.3.5 Deleting Statistical Templates

This section introduces how to delete statistical templates.

Precautions

The UNM2000 only supports deleting custom statistical templates.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The custom statistical template is available.

Procedure

The following introduces how to delete a card resource statistical template.

1. Click it to open the Custom Template dialog box.

1) Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card Resource

Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2) Click to open the Custom Template dialog box.

2. Delete a template.

1) Select a custom template and click .

414 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

2) Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

9.4 Querying Statistical Reports in Real Time

The UNM2000 supports collecting statistics on all physical resources and logical resources
in the network in real time and presents the statistical result as reports.

The key procedures for collecting statistics on physical resources and logical resources are
the same. The following introduces how to query the card resource statistical report.

Purpose

This function helps you quickly obtain the usage of all resources in the network and
understand the status of network resources in real time.

Background Information

The report format supports .txt/.xml/.csv/.pdf/.xls/.html.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The statistical template is planned.

Configuration Example

Statistical Task Name Statistical Template Name Template Type

Card Resource Statistics Card Information List Information Statistics

Procedure

1. Select a statistical task.

Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card Resource

Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

Version: 01 415
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select a statistical template.

Expand the drop-down list on the right of Statistics Template and select Card
Information List.

Note:

If the existing templates cannot meet the requirements for statistics, you can
customize statistical templates according to Creating Statistical Templates.

3. Select the statistical range.

1) Click Statistics Range to open the Select Object dialog box.

2) (Optional) Select the statistical type.

Note:

The statistical type should be selected for some resource statistical tasks.

416 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

¡ NE Statistics: The minimum granularity of statistics is the NE.

¡ Range Statistics: The minimum granularity of statistics is the logical domain.

3) Select the statistical object.

4) Click OK. The system automatically starts the statistical task.

4. View the real-time statistical result.

Version: 01 417
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

After collecting statistics is completed, you can export the statistical report.

u Export the specified records: Select multiple entries and select Export→Export
Selected Record from the shortcut menu.

u Export all records: Select any entry and select Export→Export All Records from the
shortcut menu.

9.5 Exporting Statistical Reports at Specified Time

The UNM2000 supports creating scheduled tasks, which will gather statistics physical and
logical resources in the entire network at the preset time and automatically export the
statistical report to the XFTP server.

The key procedures for exporting physical resources and logical resources at the preset time
are the same. The following introduces how to export the card resource statistics.

Purpose

You can create scheduled statistical tasks, which will export the statistical results to the
specified FTP server at the preset time. This helps you obtain physical resource statistics on
a regular basis and analyze the network status.

418 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Background Information

u The exported files are classified by resource names and automatically saved to the root
directory of the XFTP server. For example, the exported file of NE resource statistics is
stored in the \Resource_Statistics\NE_Export directory.

u The supported report formats include .xml and .csv.

Prerequisite

u The statistical template is created. For procedures, see Creating Statistical Templates.

u The XFTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Configuration Example

Table 9-5 Configuration Example of Exporting NE Resource Statistics

Attribute Configuration Item Example

Task Name Test01
Enable Select Enable
Execution Cycle Every day
Basic Information
Execution Time 9:44:01 AM
Start Time 2019-10-16 09:43:51
End Time 2019-10-18 09:43:51
Statistical NE / objects under the NE (the new NEs
Statistical policy will not be automatically added into the statistical
Object Source
task)

Statistical Object Custom

XFTP Server FTP:111(10.170.161.161)

Extend Information Statistical Template List of NE information.

File (statistical report) type XML

Procedure

1. Select a statistics export task.

Select Export Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics Export→NE Resource

Statistics Export in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

Version: 01 419
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Create a statistical export task according to the configuration example in this section.

1) Click Create to open the Create NE Resource Statistics Export dialog box.

2) Set Basic Information according to Table 9-6 and Figure 9-1.

Table 9-6 Parameters in Basic Information

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

Task Name Set it manually.

u Selected: Activate the scheduled task.

Enable
u Deselected: Deactivate the scheduled task.
u One time: The task will be executed once it
takes effect.
u Every (days): Enter a value ranging from 1 to
365.
Execution CycleNote 1
u Every week: Select a day during a week to
execute the task.
Basic Information u Every month: Select a day during a month to
execute the task.
Set the task execution time in the execution cycle.
Execution Time
The format is hh:mm:ss.
Set the time when the periodical statistical task
Start Time starts.
The format is yyyy-hh-dd hh:mm:ss.

Set the time when the periodical statistical task

End Time ends. Check it and it takes effect.
The format is yyyy-hh-dd hh:mm:ss.

Note 1: When the execution cycle is set to One time, Execution Time/Start Time/End Time in
Basic Information is hidden.

420 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Figure 9-1 The Basic Information Configuration GUI

3) Set Object Source according to Table 9-7 and Figure 9-2.

Table 9-7 Parameters in Object Source

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

u Gathers statistics on all NEs in the logical

domain (the new NE will be automatically
added to the statistical task).
Statistical policy
Object Source u Statistical NE / objects under the NE (the
new NEs will not be automatically added into
the statistical task)

Statistical Object Selects the object based on the statistical policy.

Figure 9-2 The Object Source Configuration GUI

4) Set Extend Information according to Table 9-8 and Figure 9-3.

Version: 01 421
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-8 Parameters in Extend Information

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

Select the export path from the drop-down list for
XFTP Server
the statistical report.

Select a statistical template from the drop-down

Extend Information Statistical Template
list.
Select the statistical report format from the drop-
File (statistical report) type
down list.

Figure 9-3 The Extend Information Configuration GUI

5) Click OK to view the creation result.

3. Execute the task.

4 Scheduled execution: The system executes the task automatically according to the
execution cycle and time set at Step 2.

4 Manual execution: Click Execute Now.

4. View the execution result.

1) Select the task entry and view Execution Result.

¡ Task progress: 100%

¡ Task result: success

2) Click View Details to view the export result of the statistical report.

422 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

5. View the exported information.

4 View details now: In the View Details pane, right-click the first data entry and
select Open File.

4 View details by accessing the XFTP server: In the View Details pane, access the
XFTP server according to the path displayed in the second data row.

Other Operations

u Export task records:

4 Export the specified records: Select multiple entries and select Export→Export
Selected Record from the shortcut menu.

4 Export all records: Select any entry and select Export→Export All Records
from the shortcut menu.

u View task attributes: Right-click a task and select Attribute from the shortcut menu.

9.6 Customizing Resource Statistics Reports

You can customize resource statistics reports in the UNM2000, and query and export all
related resource information required in project scenarios in a unified manner. This brings
improved working efficiency.

Version: 01 423
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

Earlier UNM2000 versions support collecting classified statistics of multiple physical

inventories and exporting classified resource reports. However, in actual projects, users
need to query the related resource report as required by specific scenarios. In this case, it is
time consuming and arduous to manually combine multiple classified resource reports into
one. To solve the problem, this UNM2000 version supports customizing resource statistics
reports. You can select multiple statistics items across object layers to customize a statistics
report template. In this way, you can query and export all required resource information in a
unified manner.

The custom resource statistics report function provides a default ONU Port Business List
statistics template. The table below describes its related statistics items and resource objects.
You can use this default template to obtain multi-layer resource information such as ONU
port, device type and card type.

Statistics Item Resource Object Category

Logical Address
NE
NE Basic information
NE IP Address
NE Type

Slot Address Card Basic information

Card Port Number Card port Basic information
ONU Authorization Number
ONU Type ONU Basic information
ONU Physical Address

ONU Port Name ONU port

Basic information
ONU Port Number ONU port

Service type
ONU port Data port service
CVLAN Mode
CVLAN ID Data port service

Public Network IP
Endpoint User Name/SIP
Telephone No. ONU port Voice port service
Physical Phone Number

Voice CVLAN
ONU Online Status
ONU Last Offline Time ONU Status information
ONU Last Offline Duration

424 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Statistics Item Resource Object Category

ONU Firmware Version ONU version information

WAN Connected Type ONU port Basic service information

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The XFTP server is configured.

Procedure

u Customize resource statistics.

1) Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display the

Resource Statistics tab.

2) In the left pane of the Resource Statistics tab, select Resource Statistics→
Physical Resource Statistics→Custom Statistics.

3) (Optional) If the default statistics template ONU Port Business List cannot meet
the requirement, you can customize a statistics template.

a) Click Custom to open the Custom Template dialog box.

b) Click Create to display the Create Template dialog box.

Version: 01 425
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

c) In the Create Template dialog box, set the template name, select required
statistics items, and click OK.

d) In the Custom Template dialog box, click Close.

4) Select a desired statistics template in the statistics template drop-down list. Click
Statistics Range to open the Select Object dialog box.

5) Select the desired resource object in the Select Object dialog box, and click OK.

6) View the real-time statistics result in the right pane.

7) (Optional) In the statistics result, select the desired entry(ies), right-click to select
Export→Export All Records / Export Selected Record from the shortcut
menu to export a custom statistics report.

u Customize a resource statistics export task.

1) Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display the

Resource Statistics tab.

426 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

2) In the left pane of the Resource Statistics tab, select Export Statistics→
Physical Resource Statistics Export→Custom Statistics Export.

3) In the right pane, click Create to open the Create Custom Statistics Export
dialog box.

4) Set the related parameters in the Create Custom Statistics Export dialog box
referring to the table below. Then click OK.

Table 9-9 Setting of Creating a Custom Statistics Export Task

Parameter Description

Task name Name of the custom statistics export task.

Status of the task. It is selected by default.

Enable u Select: Enable the task.
u Deselect: Disable the task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u One time: The task is executed immediately after it
Execution takes effect.
Note 1
Cycle u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 365.

Basic information u Every week: Select the effective days in every week.
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every month.

Execution time of a periodic task.

Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic statistics task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

End time of a periodic statistics task. It is valid after being

End time selected.
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Sets whether new NEs are added to the statistics task

automatically.
u Gather statistics of all NEs in the logical domain (new
Statistics Policy
Object Source NEs are added to the statistics task automatically)
u Gather statistics of NEs and objects on them (new NEs
are not added to the statistics task automatically)

Statistical Object Customized based on the statistics policy

Version: 01 427
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-9 Setting of Creating a Custom Statistics Export Task (Continued)

Parameter Description
Select an XFTP server from the drop-down list. Statistics
XFTP Server
reports are exported to this server.

Extend Statistical Select an existing statistical template from the drop-down

information Template list.
Select XML / CSV from the drop-down list as the type of
File Type
exported files.

Note 1: When One time is selected for execution cycle, Execution Time / Start Time / End Time
will be automatically hidden on the Basic Information tab.

5) (Optional) After the task is executed successfully, you can open the statistics
report via the shortcut menu in the task details pane, or access the XFTP server to
view the exported custom statistics report.

9.7 OLT Resource Statistics Report

You can gather statistics of OLT comprehensive resources and export corresponding reports
through creating policy tasks with custom statistics items in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The XFTP server is configured.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→OLT Comprehensive Resource Statistics Export

Task in the left pane to view existing export tasks of OLT comprehensive resource
statistics.

3. In the right pane, click Create to open the Create OLT Comprehensive Resource
Statistics Export Task dialog box.

4. Set the related parameters in the Create OLT Comprehensive Resource Statistics
Export Task dialog box referring to the table below. Then click OK.

428 Version: 01
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-10 Settings of Creating an OLT Comprehensive Resource Statistics Export Task

Parameter Description

Task name Name of the custom statistics export task.

Status of the task. It is selected by default.

Enable u Select: Enable the scheduled task.
u Deselect: Disable the scheduled task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u One time: The task is executed immediately after it
Execution takes effect.
CycleNote 1 u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 365.

Basic information u Every week: Select the effective days in every week.
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every month.

Execution time of a periodic task.

Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic statistics task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

End time of a periodic statistics task. It is valid after being

End time selected.
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Object Source Statistical Object Customized based on the statistics policy

Select an XFTP server from the drop-down list. Statistics

XFTP Server
reports are exported to this server.

Select XML / CSV from the drop-down list as the type of

File Type
exported files.

u When All Statistics is selected, all comprehensive

Extend
resource statistics items related to OLT are selected by
information
default.
Statistics Item u When Customize Select is selected, you can select
desired statistics items as needed in addition to the
mandatory statistics items Logic Address, NE Name,
NE IP, NE Type and Shelf.

Note 1: When One time is selected for execution cycle, Execution Time / Start Time / End Time
will be automatically hidden on the Basic Information tab.

5. (Optional) After the task is executed successfully, you can access the XFTP server to
view the exported OLT comprehensive resource statistics report.

Version: 01 429
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operation

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

430 Version: 01
10 Resource Management

Resource management enables you to manage all physical resources and logical resources
in the network. The UNM2000 provides overall resource management, which helps you
understand the usage of all resources in the network timely.

10.1 Modifying Object Names in a Batch Manner

The UNM2000 supports modifying object names in a batch manner. Supported object types
include logical domain, NE, card port and ONU.

10.1.1 Modifying Logical Domain Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify logical domain names in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u New logical domain names are planned.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to open
the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select Logical Domain in the left pane to query logical domains.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired logical domains. Click OK to display the query
result.

3. Modify the logical domain names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

Version: 01 431
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Modify the logical domain names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000

screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new logical
domain names one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the logical domain names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

d) Click Open File, enter the new logical domain names one by one in the
Modify Name column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up the
Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is successful.
Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.1.2 Modifying NE Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify NE names in a batch manner.

432 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u New NE names are planned and unique in the entire network.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to open
the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select NE in the left pane to query NEs.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired NEs. Click OK to display the query result.

3. Modify the NE names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

4 Modify the NE names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000 screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new NE names
one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the NE names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, and click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

Version: 01 433
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

d) Click Open File, enter the new NE names one by one in the Modify Name
column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up the
Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is successful.
Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.1.3 Modifying Port Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify port names in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u New port names are planned.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to open
the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select Board Pon in the left pane to query card ports of a specified NE.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired NEs. Click OK to display the query result.

3. Modify the port names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

434 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

4 Modify the port names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000 screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new port names
one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the port names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, and click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

d) Click Open File, enter the new port names one by one in the Modify Name
column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up the
Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is successful.
Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.1.4 Modifying ONU Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify ONU names in a batch manner.

Version: 01 435
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u The ONU names are planned.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to open
the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select ONU in the left pane to query ONUs.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired NEs. Click OK to display the query result.

3. Modify the ONU names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

4 Modify the ONU names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000 screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new ONU names
one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the ONU names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

436 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

d) Click Open File, enter the new ONU names one by one in the Modify
Name column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up the
Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is successful.
Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.2 Modifying ONU Names by Importing EXCEL

You can modify the ONU name by importing into Excel, improving the configuration
efficiency.

Prerequisite

u The ONU name has been planned.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Modify ONU Names by Importing EXCEL in the main menu.

2. Click Open File to bring up the Import Data dialog box.

3. Click Download Template to save the Excel template into the designated directory
on the UNM2000 client end.

4. Enter the planned information in the Excel and save it.

5. Click View File to open the Save dialog box.

6. Select the configured Excel file and click Save.

7. Click Confirm to import the data into the UNM2000.

Version: 01 437
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

10.3 Importing the ODN NSM Information

Manual creation of ODN view is inefficient and may cause errors. By importing the ODN
NMS information, you can quickly establish the ODN network view. After the information
is imported, the relationship among NEs (OLT PON port, splitter and ONU) is displayed in
the topology. This improves the operation and maintenance efficiency.

Background Information

The ODN provides optical transmission channel between the OLT and ONU.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Import ODN NSM Information from the main menu.

2. Click Open File in the lower right corner to bring up the Import Data dialog box.

3. Click Download Template to save the ODN imported information template to the
local computer and then complete the information according the actual project
requirement.

438 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

Note:

The items marked with * in the template file are required. Please enter the items
correctly; otherwise, the file may be failed to be imported.

4. Click Browse File, select the ODN information file preset and click OK to import the
data.

10.4 ONU Query Management

By querying the system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU, you
can quickly acquaint yourself with the distribution of the ONU.

10.4.1 Querying ONUs

With the ONU query function, you can find the desired ONU quickly and view the system,
slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU.

The UNM2000 supports querying the ONU by different ONU attributes. It also supports
fuzzy query and complete match. The ONU query conditions fall into two parts:

u Common query conditions: Include the logical domain, device type, ONU PON type,
device name, friendly name, logical ID, physical address, OLT IP address,
management IP address, and voice service and data service of the ONU.

u Advanced query conditions: Include the slot number, ONU number, ONU password,
logical SN password, optical splitter number, optical splitter port number, ONU
identifier, ONU user information and ONU service type.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Set ONU Query Conditions dialog box.

Version: 01 439
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. After completing the settings, click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs
meeting the query conditions.

4. On the Query ONU tab, select one or more entries and click Service Configuration
at the lower-right corner to go to the NE Manager window. Then you can query the
service configuration information of the ONU.

Subsequent Operation

Right-click an ONU, select Service Configuration or Locate to ONU List from the
shortcut menu.

10.4.2 Querying ONUs in a Batch Manner

You can query ONU information in a batch manner by importing an ONU identifier
template. And you can handle the query result, including de-authorization and shielding
alarms, in a batch manner.

Procedure

1. On the main menu, select Resource→Batch Query ONU to open the Set Query
Condition dialog box.

2. Select an ONU identifier type and import a query template.

1) Select an ONU identifier type.

440 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

Note:

ONU identifiers are grouped into three categories: physical identifier, logical
identifier and password. You can select one of them as needed.

2) Click Download Example Template to download the specified ONU identifier

template to the local host.

3) Enter the ONU identifier to be queried in the template by referring to the

following table. Save the template file.

ONU Identifier Type Data Length (Byte) Value Range

u For a MAC address, the value ranges from 0 to

9 or from a to f.
u For a physical SN, the first four digits are an
physical address 12
ASCII character string (case-sensitive) and the
last 8 digits range from 0 to 9 or from a to f
(lower-case letters).

It cannot begin or end with the following characters:

u Special characters from NULL to / (0x00 to
logical identifier 24 0x2f).
u Punctuation marks such as ;, : and ?.
u The @ sign (0x40) and DEL (0x7f).

password 10 No limit

4) Click Import Template to view the result of importing.

Version: 01 441
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click OK in the Set Query Condition dialog box.

4. View the query result on the Batch Query ONU tab.

Related Operation

u ONU deauthorization

1) Select one or more ONU entries, right-click them and select ONU
Deauthorization from the shortcut menu. For specific operations, see
Deauthorizing ONUs.

u ONU alarms shielding

1) Select one or more ONU entries, right-click them and select Alarm shield from
the shortcut menu. For specific operations, see Setting Alarm Filter Rules.

10.4.3 Viewing the ONU List

You can view the ONU details and configure the ONUs.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or right-
click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU List from
the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

442 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

2. You can perform the following operations as required.

Note:

The following uses Port Service Config, Service Configuration and View
Details as an example to introduce how to perform the operations.

4 Port service configuration

On the ONU List tab, select a port and click Port Service Config to view the
port type of the ONU service and the number of ports of different types.

4 Service Configuration

On the ONU List tab, select a port and click Service Configuration to access the
designated ONU service configuration tab and perform the service configuration
of the ONU.

Version: 01 443
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Right-click the designated configuration option in the Operational Tree and

select Favorite from the shortcut menu to save this option in the favorite folder,
so that the user can find it quickly next time. Select Cancel Favorite to remove
this option from the favorite folder.

4 Viewing Details

Click View Details to view the detailed information of the specified ONU,
including ONU Port Panel, ONU Information, ONU Service Information,
Port Status Information, ONU MAC address, ONU Callback Information,
QINQ Domain Attach Information, Under ONU and Parent ONU.

10.4.4 ONU Query Example

With the ONU query function, you can find the desired ONU quickly and view the system,
slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU.

444 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

Background

The UNM2000 supports querying ONUs by different ONU attributes. It supports both
fuzzy match and complete match. The ONU query conditions fall into two parts:

u General query conditions:Include the logical domain, device type, ONU PON type,
device name, friendly name, logical ID, physical address, OLT IP address,
management IP address, and voice service and data service of the ONU.

u Advanced query conditions:Include slot No., ONU No., ONU password, logical SN
password, optical splitter No., optical splitter port No., ONU label, ONU user
information and ONU service class.

The following introduces how to perform the ONU query via setting different query
conditions:

Querying the ONU Object by MAC Address

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Enter the MAC address of the ONU in the Physical Address field.

3. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the MAC address.

Querying the ONU by ONU Data Service

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Enter the IP address of the OLT in the OLT IP field.

3. Set Service Condition to Data and specify the values of CVLAN ID and SVLAN ID.

4. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the set conditions.

Querying the ONU by ONU Location

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Select the logical domain where the desired ONU resides from the drop-down list on
the right of Logical Domain.

3. Click the Advanced tab in the Set ONU Query Conditions dialog box.

4. Specify Slot Number and ONU Number in the Advanced tab.

5. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the set conditions.

Version: 01 445
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

10.5 Querying the MDU Phone Number

With the Query MDU Phone Number function, you can navigate to the corresponding
card and port according to the telephone number of the port. At present, this function only
supports querying the SIP voice port of the AN5006-20 and AN5006-30.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query MDU Phone Number from the UNM2000 main menu.

2. In the Set Query Conditions dialog box, enter the Phone Number.

Note:

u If you select Full Field Matching, enter a complete phone number.

u If you deselect Full Field Matching, fuzzy query is supported.

3. Click OK. The Query MDU Phone Number tab displays the query result.

10.6 Querying Cards By Serial Number

You can query the name and management IP of the OLT where the card belongs and the slot
number where the card locates according to the serial number of the card. The query range
can be all the OLT devices in the network.

Prerequisite

The serial number of the card is obtained.

446 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query Board by Serial Number from the UNM2000 main menu.

2. In the Set Query Conditions dialog box, enter the serial number of the card and
select one or more OLT device(s).

Note:

u If you select Full Field Matching, enter a complete serial number of the
card.

u If you deselect Full Field Matching, fuzzy query is supported.

3. Click OK. The Query Board by Serial Number tab displays the query result.

10.7 Querying ONU RMS Error Information

You can filer and query the failure information of the ONU RMS and print / export the
content in the failure information table.

Version: 01 447
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→ONU RMS Error Information

Query to open the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog box.

2. In the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog box, set Basic Information and
Advanced Information.

3. Click OK. The ONU RMS Error Information tab displays the failure details.

Other Operations

In the ONU RMS Error Information tab, right-click an entry and select Print or Export.

10.8 Querying the ONU Network Access Interception

Logs

You can query the ONU network access interception logs through the UNM2000 and print /
export the log content.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→ONU Network Intercept Log

Query to open the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box.

2. In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box, set Basic Information and
Advanced Information.

3. Click OK. The ONU Network Intercept Log Query tab displays the log information.

Other Operations

In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query tab, right-click an entry and select Print or
Export.

448 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

10.9 Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner

You can modify the coordinate of an NE by importing into Excel, improving the
configuration efficiency.

Prerequisite

u You have obtained the NE coordinate data.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→GIS Batch Import from the main menu.

2. Click Download Template to save the Excel template into the designated directory
on the UNM2000 client end.

3. Enter the Longitude and Latitude of the NE in the Excel and save it.

4. Click Import to bring up the Open dialog box.

5. Select the saved Excel file and click Open.

6. Click OK to import the data into the UNM2000.

10.10 Configuring the Gateway Type

You can configure the gateway types, actual models and manufacturer names of ONU
devices of different manufacturers through the UNM2000 so that the gateway types of the
ONU devices can be identified when the resource management system delivers the network
access configuration of enterprise gateway.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→Gateway Type Config to open the
Gateway Type Config dialog box.

2. In the Gateway Type Config dialog box, click Add to open the Add dialog box.

Version: 01 449
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. In the Add dialog box, enter the ONU Vendor and ONU Realno and select the
gateway type.

4. Click Yes to save the gateway type configuration into the database.

10.11 Checking the List of Registered ONUs

You can export data of abnormal ONUs to a specified directory and apply for registration of
those ONUs again. This improves the troubleshooting efficiency.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Onu Online Check Task from the functional tree on the left to open the Onu
Online Check Task dialog box.

3. Click Create to open the Create Onu Online Check Task dialog box and set the
parameters.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

1) Set Basic information, including Task name (required), Enable (select or clear
the check box), Execution Cycle, Execution time, Start time and End time.

450 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

2) Set Object source by selecting the object to be checked.

Version: 01 451
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3) Set Extend information by selecting a path to export the data to be checked.

452 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

4. Click Create and Continue to continue to create the next task.

5. Click OK to complete creating the current task and close the Create Onu Online
Check Task dialog box.

10.12 Unauthorized ONU List

You can obtain the information of all unauthorized ONUs under one or more OLT devices
through the UNM2000. The information of unauthorized ONUs includes system IP address,
slot number, PON port number, ONU type, physical address, physical password, logical ID
and logical password.

Version: 01 453
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Unauthorized ONU List from the main menu to open the Select
NE dialog box.

2. In the Select NE dialog box, select the object.

3. Click OK to query the unauthorized ONU list.

10.13 Managing Customized Attributes

You can set the custom attributes of the NE, PON port and ONU. The custom attributes of
the NE can be used to define the hot-spot regions and the carried service.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2. Add custom attribute:

454 Version: 01
 10 Resource Management

Note:

Three attributes of NEs, PON ports and ONUs can be customized..

1. Select NE Custom Attribute / PON Custom Attribute / ONU Custom

Attribute in the drop-down list at the left side of the Custom Attributes
Management tab.

Note:

The following describe the configuration method taking the NE Custom

Attribute as an example.

2. Modify the attribute name: right-click an attribute name in the browsing tree
below, select Modify Property Name and set the new attribute in the Modify
Custom Attribute Name dialog box. Click OK.

3. Right-click an attribute name, and select Create Property Value from the
shortcut menu.

4. Set Property Value and Select Object in the Create Property Value dialog
box, and click OK.

Version: 01 455
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

You can set up to three hot-spot regions for a single NE.

Related Operation

View the customized attributes:

1. Right-click an NE in the main topology and select Attribute from the shortcut menu.

2. In the Attribute Page pane, view or modify the customized attribute values.

456 Version: 01
11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.1 Using the Network Management Tool

You can rapidly log in to the Network Management Tool through the entrance on the
UNM2000 GUI to perform process management, resource management, data history
management, query of network management operation logs, system warning setting, and
import/export of network management configuration for the UNM2000 system.

11.1.1 Basic Operations

The following describes basic operations of the network management tool, including
logging in, logging out, switching the displayed language, changing a password, and
resetting the password of the query user.

Prerequisite

Note:

Only the "Admin" user and the users belonging to the "Security Administrator
Group" can operate the network management tool. For other users, the menus of
the Network Management Tool are greyed out.
The "Admin" user and the users belonging to the "Security Administrator
Group" can assign the Network Management Tool operation privileges to
other users.

u The UNMCMService and UNMCMAgent services are started on the UNM2000

server.

u The UNM2000 client is connected to the server.

u Only one Admin user is allowed to log into the network management tool at a time.

Version: 01 457
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Login

1. Log into the UNM2000 client. Select System→NMS Management Tool from the
main menu to display the login window.

2. Type the username and password according to Table 11-1, and click Login.

Note:

When a user's login attempts reach three times, the system will prompt the user
and lock the user for one minute.

Table 11-1 Default Account Information

User Type Username Password

Admin user Admin Admin
Query user Query Query

Switching Display Languages

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner of the
main GUI.

2. Select Chinese or English from the drop-down menu.

458 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Modifying the Password

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner of the
main GUI.

2. Select modify password from the drop-down list box to open the modify password
dialog box.

3. Enter the old password and new password and click OK.

4. On the system prompt GUI, click OK.

Resetting the Password of the Query User

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner of the
main GUI.

2. Select reset Query user password from the drop-down menu to open the reset
Query user password dialog box.

3. Enter your current login password and click OK.

4. When the system prompts reset Query password success, click OK.

Logout

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner of the
main GUI.

2. Click logoff from the drop-down menu.

11.1.2 Managing Processes

The Process GUI displays the UNM2000 process information in lists. When users of
different types log into the NMS Management Tool, the operation GUI and operation items
displayed are different.

The Process Window

u Managing a User

Version: 01 459
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Querying a User

460 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Process Management

User Type Operation Item Procedure

Start Select a service in the disabled state and click start.
select a service in the enabled or initialized state, and
Stop
click stop.
Restart Select the desired service and click restart.
Start NMS Click start all to start all NMS services.
Admin User
Stop NMS Click stop all to stop all NMS services.

Restart NMS Click restart all to restart all NMS services.

Select a service and click the One-click Export of
Export Dump / Log with
Dump/Log button to manually generate the dump / log of
One Click
the service and export it to the specified FTP server.

Click Refresh to display the latest service state and

Refresh
process details.

Filter by state Click in the status column and select the desired
status type.
Admin user /
query user
Filter by Startup Mode Click in the startup mode column and select the
desired startup mode.

Query details Click in the service column to view the details

of the specified process.

11.1.3 Managing Resources

You can view the resource usage of the operating system, UNM2000 system and database
in the Resource window. The administrator and query user have the same management
authority.

The Resource Management Window

Version: 01 461
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Managing Resources

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Click the Operation System tab to view the CPU,

View resource usage of memory and disk usage of the host where the

the OS operating system is installed.

2. Click to view the usage of the disk.

Admin user / Click the Network Management System tab to view
View resource usage of
query user the CPU usage, memory usage and handle quantity of the
the NMS
NMS service.
View resource usage of Click the Database tab to view the total space, used
the database space and use rate of databases.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the latest resource usage.

11.1.4 Managing History Data

You can set search conditions and filter conditions to query history data of Operation
System, Network Management System, and Database. The UNM2000 can display the
history data and query results in curve graphs. The administrator and query user have the
same management authority.

462 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

History Data Management GUI

Managing History Data

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Click the Operation System tab.
2. Select the query time range from the time range
Query history data of
drop-down list box.
the operating system.
3. Select a server from the server drop-down list box.
4. Click Query.
Admin user / 1. Click the Network Management System tab.
query user 2. Select the query time range from the time range
Query history data of drop-down list box.
the network 3. Select the service name (no more than three items
management system. can be selected once) from the service drop-down
list box.
4. Click Query.

Version: 01 463
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Click the Database tab.
2. Select the query time range from the time range
drop-down list box.
Query history data of
3. Select the database name (no more than three items
the database.
can be selected once) from the Database drop-down
list box.
4. Click Query.

Zoom in the curve Press and hold the cursor to frame a specified area on the
graph. curve graph.

Reset the curve graph. Click reset to restore the curve graph to the default size.

11.1.5 Managing Logs

You can set search conditions and filter conditions to query operation logs of users who log
in to the system through the Network Management Tool. The administrator and query user
have the same management authority.

Log Management GUI

Managing Logs

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Select the query time range from the time range
drop-down list box.
Admin user / Query logs.
2. Click refresh to display logs within the specified
query user
time range.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the latest logs.

464 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.1.6 Setting Management Parameters

The UNM2000 supports setting the threshold-crossing alarm levels and alarm clear
thresholds of CPU occupation ratio / memory occupation ratio / disk utilization ratio
of the operation system, CPU occupation ratio / memory occupation ratio of the
UNM2000 and database space utilization ratio / log space utilization ratio using the
management tool.

Procedure

1. In the Network Management Tool, click Settings.

2. Click behind each alarm threshold to change it to .

3. You can set the following threshold-crossing alarm levels and alarm clear thresholds in
the Settings GUI.

4 Operation system alarm thresholds: CPU occupation ratio, memory occupation

ratio and disk utilization ratio.

4 UNM2000 alarm thresholds: CPU occupation ratio and memory occupation ratio.

4 Database alarm thresholds: database space utilization ratio and log space
utilization ratio.

Version: 01 465
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Set the data saving time and click Save.

466 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Management Parameter Settings

User Type Operation Item Procedure

In the alarm threshold text box, enter an integer ranging
Set the alarm threshold.
from 20 to 99, and click Save.

Admin User In the data saving time text box, enter an integer ranging
Set the data saving time.
from 1 to 90, and click Save.
Set the resetting. Click Reset to restore all parameters to the default values.

Query parameter
On the main GUI of the NMS Management Tool, click
Query user settings of the NMS
Settings.
Management Tool.

11.1.7 Importing / Exporting the Configuration File

By the network management tool, you can import / export configuration files to
synchronize or back up device configurations.

11.1.7.1 Setting the Timer

This section introduces how to set the timer in the network management tool.

1. In the network management tool, click import / export from the main menu to open

the import / export GUI.

2. Click set timer to open the following GUI.

Version: 01 467
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set timer parameters by referring to the following table.

Item Setting

Interval time The format is 1–364 day(s).

Yes
Enable timer Execution time The format is [0–23] h [0–59] min.
No - -

4. Click OK.

11.1.7.2 Setting a Backup Server

This section introduces how to set a backup server.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM Management Tool as an administrator.

Procedure

1. In the UNM Management Tool, click Import / Export from the main menu to open
the Import / Export window.

2. Click set backup server to open the following window.

468 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Set parameters of the backup server referring to the following table.

Parameter Description
Export file name Enter a custom file name.
Enter the path where backup files are saved on the
Local backup
UNM2000 server. The default path is D:/UNM2000/
folder
Local emsback on the UNM2000 server.
backup Maximum number
of local backup Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 50.
file
Backup
type XFTP IP address Enter the IP address of the XFTP server.
Protocol type Select FTP or SFTP as needed.
FTP Enter the communication port between the XFTP server
Port
backup and the UNM2000 server.
FTP username Enter the user name for XFTP server login.

FTP password Enter the password for XFTP server login.

4. Click OK. An alert box appears, prompting successful saving.

5. Click OK to go back to the Import / Export window.

11.1.7.3 Exporting Dump or Log Files by One Click

This section introduces how to export dump or log files to the specified XFTP server by one
click.

Version: 01 469
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You have logged into the UNM Management Tool as an administrator.

u You have set the backup server.

Procedure

1. In the UNM Management Tool, click Import / Export from the main menu to open
the Import / Export window.

2. Click one-click export of dump/log to open the following window.

3. Set the parameters for exporting dump or log files referring to the following table.

470 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Parameter Description
Export the file
Basic parameter Select Dump File or Log File as needed.
type manually
settings
Export the switch
Enables or disables automatic export as needed.
automatically

XFTP IP address Enter the IP address of the XFTP server.

XFTP server Protocol type Select FTP or SFTP as needed.

parameter Enter the communication port between the XFTP server and the
Port
settings UNM2000 server.
FTP username Enter the user name for XFTP server login.

FTP password Enter the password for XFTP server login.

4. Click OK. An alert box appears, prompting successful saving.

5. Click OK to go back to the Import / Export window.

Other Operations

u Click test to test whether the XFTP server can be connected normally.

u Click export history Dump/Log file to manually export historical dump or log files
to the specified XFTP server.

11.1.7.4 Importing Configuration Data

This section introduces how to import configuration files in the network management tool.

1. In the network management tool, click import / export.

2. Click import to open the parameter settings window.

Version: 01 471
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Caution:
Before importing a configuration file, close all the network management
services.

3. Select local backup or FTP backup from the drop-down list of import type.

4. Select the configuration file to be imported in import file.

5. Click OK.

11.1.7.5 Exporting the Configuration File

This section introduces how to export configuration files in the network management tool.

1. In the network management tool, click import / export.

472 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

2. Click export to open the following GUI.

3. Enter the description information of the configuration file in the file description text
box.

4. Click OK.

11.2 Managing Configuration Backup Tasks

To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up the NE data so that you can restore the
data when the severe failure occurs in the network. You can manage the configuration
backup tasks, including managing software backup tasks and configuration export tasks.

11.2.1 Managing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view, create and execute the software backup tasks.

11.2.1.1 Viewing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task in the left pane to view the
existing software backup tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Version: 01 473
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.2.1.2 Creating Software Backup Tasks

If the existing software backup task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can create
new tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Software Backup Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane
and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.1.3 Executing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to execute software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running normally.

474 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task in the left pane to view the
existing software backup tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the software
backup task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the software
backup task.

11.2.2 Managing Configuration Export Tasks

This section introduces how to view the data export task information, and how to create a
new task and execute operations.

11.2.2.1 Viewing Configuration Export Tasks

By viewing configuration export tasks, you can confirm whether the exported data need to
be saved externally.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task in the left pane to view

the existing configuration export tasks.

Version: 01 475
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.2.2.2 Creating a Configuration Export Task

If the existing configuration export task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can
create new configuration export tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Configuration Export Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

476 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.2.3 Executing Configuration Export Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the configuration export tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task in the left pane to view

the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the
configuration export task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the configuration.

11.2.3 Managing Card Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view, create and execute the card software backup tasks.

11.2.3.1 Viewing Card Software Batch Backup Tasks

By viewing the card software backup tasks, you can confirm whether it is necessary to add
or delete card software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 477
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the left

pane to view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.2.3.2 Creating Card Software Batch Backup Tasks

If the existing card software backup task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can
create new tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the left

pane.

3. In the right pane, click Create to open the Create Board Software Batch Backup
Task dialog box.

478 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.3.3 Executing Card Software Batch Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the card software batch backup tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the left

pane to view the existing tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object Info and
Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration export task meets the
requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the configuration.

Version: 01 479
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.2.4 Managing MAC Address Table Export Tasks

The MAC address table export task support exporting the MAC address table of the PON
port or OLT, which can be set by the MAC address type. The following mainly introduces
how to view, create and execute the MAC address table export tasks.

11.2.4.1 Viewing MAC Address Table Export Tasks

By viewing the MAC address table export tasks, you can confirm whether it is needed to
add or delete MAC address table export tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left pane
to view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Attribute to view the MAC address
type of the task.

480 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.2.4.2 Adding an Export Task of MAC Address Table

If the existing task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can create new MAC address
table export tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left pane.

3. Click Create in the right pane to open the dialog box.

4. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.4.3 Executing MAC Address Table Export Tasks

The following introduces how to execute MAC address table export tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 481
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left pane
to view the existing tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the
configuration export task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the configuration.

11.3 Managing Upgrade Tasks

You can create tasks for the upgrade operations required for OLT system cards (system
cards, service cards, TDM cards, voice cards and OLT firmware) and the ONU system
software and firmware so as to implement automatic upgrade.

Caution:

The upgrade of NE software is risky, which may cause interruption of NE

services. Please upgrade the NE software in strict accordance with the published
upgrade guide of the corresponding NE. It is recommended to contact the
FiberHome Technical Engineer for NE software upgrade.

11.3.1 Managing System Software Upgrade Tasks

You can create the system software upgrade task to upgrade the system software of multiple
objects. By selecting the file type of the object source, you can upgrade the core switch card,
IDM software, voice interface card, OLT firmware, time card software and OTDR card. The
following introduces how to view, create and execute the upgrade task of the system
software.

482 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.3.1.1 Viewing System Software Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to view
the existing system software upgrade tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.1.2 Creating System Software Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the
right pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

Version: 01 483
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the upgrade requirement, and click OK. The new task
appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.1.3 Executing System Software Upgrade Tasks

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks with Execution Cycle set to One time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click Execute
Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to view
the existing system software upgrade tasks.

3. Right-click a task that meets the system software upgrade requirement and select
Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click Execute Now at
the lower right corner of the tab to execute the system software upgrade task.

484 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.3.2 Managing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

You can select different object sources in the ONU batch upgrade task to upgrade the CPU /
IAD software and firmware of the ONU in a batch manner.

11.3.2.1 Viewing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing ONU batch upgrade tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.2.2 Creating ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Version: 01 485
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane
and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the upgrade task requirement, and click OK. The new
task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.2.3 Executing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks with Execution Cycle set to One time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click Execute
Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing ONU batch upgrade tasks.

486 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Right-click a task that meets the ONU batch upgrade requirement and select Execute
Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click Execute Now at the lower
right corner of the tab to execute the ONU batch upgrade task.

11.3.3 Managing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

You can upgrade the service cards of multiple objects in a batch manner via the task of
upgrading the service cards in a batch manner.

11.3.3.1 Viewing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left pane
to view the existing upgrade task of the service card.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.3.2 Creating Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Version: 01 487
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left pane or right-click
in the right pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the service card upgrade task requirement, and click
OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.3.3 Executing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks with Execution Cycle set to One time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click Execute
Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left pane
to view the existing upgrade task of the service card.

488 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Right-click a task that meets the batch upgrade requirements for service cards and
select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click Execute
Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the batch upgrade task for service
cards.

11.3.4 Managing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

You can upgrade cards and ONUs in a batch manner using the whole package upgrade task.

11.3.4.1 Viewing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Whole Package Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing whole package upgrade tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.4.2 Creating Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Version: 01 489
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Whole Package Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the whole package upgrade task requirement, and click
OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.4.3 Executing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Whole Package Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing whole package upgrade tasks.

3. Right-click a task that meets the whole package upgrade requirement and select
Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click Execute Now at
the lower right corner of the tab to execute the whole package upgrade task.

490 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.4 Managing Data Synchronization Tasks

Data synchronization indicates synchronizing the device data with the UNM2000 data.
Managing the data synchronization tasks including managing the software / hardware
version upgrade tasks, configuration upload tasks and automatic discovery of NEs.

11.4.1 Managing Software / Hardware Version Upgrade Tasks

The software and hardware version upgrade indicates upgrading the software and hardware
versions to the UNM2000 database.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Software&Hardware Version Update Task to

view the existing software and hardware version upgrade tasks.

3. Do as follows:

4 If the existing tasks can meet the requirements, right-click a task and select
Execute Now, or select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner
of the tab to execute the software / hardware version upgrade task.

4 Right-click the task to Delete, or view / modify Attribute.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information, status and failure reason of
the task.

11.4.2 Managing Configuration Upload Tasks

Due to NE maintenance or upgrade / downgrade requirements, you can back up the NE data
to the UNM2000 server, client or the third-party FTP server to avoid damage or loss of NE
data caused by upgrade / downgrade or unexpected reason.

The configuration upload tasks are used to synchronize the device configuration to the
UNM2000 database to ensure consistency of the UNM2000 data and the device data.

Version: 01 491
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.4.2.1 Viewing Configuration Upload Tasks

By viewing the configuration upload tasks, you can confirm whether the time of uploading
the device configuration to the UNM2000 database and the execution object meet the
requirements for data synchronization.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Configure Upload Task in the left pane to view the
existing configuration upload tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.4.2.2 Creating a Configuration Upload Task

If the existing configuration upload task fails to meet the data synchronization requirement,
you can create new configuration upload tasks as required.

492 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Configure Upload Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane
and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information and Object source tabs as required,
and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.4.2.3 Executing Configuration Upload Tasks

You can execute the configuration upload tasks to synchronize the device configuration to
the UNM2000 database so as to ensure security and correctness of the UNM2000 data.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Configure Upload Task in the left pane to view the
existing configuration upload tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the
configuration upload task meets the requirements.

Version: 01 493
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the
configuration upload task.

11.4.3 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

11.4.3.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

The NE automatic discovery function is used to search NEs automatically, based on which
you can create NEs in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task in the left pane to view the
existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

494 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.4.3.2 Creating NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

If the existing NE automatic discovery task does not meet the data synchronization
requirement, you can create new ones as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Right-click Auto Detect NE Task in the left pane and select Create, or right-click in
the right pane and then select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information and Extend information tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.4.3.3 Executing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task in the left pane to view the
existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

Version: 01 495
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object Info and
Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration upload task meet the
requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click Execute Now
at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the configuration upload task.

11.4.4 Managing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

11.4.4.1 Viewing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane to view
the existing ONU port enabling rule tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut menu to
query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

496 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.4.4.2 Creating ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

If the existing rule task of enabling the ONU port does to meet the data synchronization
requirement, you can create new tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Right-click ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane and select Create, or right-
click in the right pane and then select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.4.4.3 Executing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane to view
the existing configuration upload tasks.

Version: 01 497
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object Info and
Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration upload task meet the
requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click Execute Now
at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the configuration upload task.

11.5 Managing Test Tasks

The test task includes the POTS port external / internal line task and the VoIP pinging test
task.

11.5.1 Managing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Via the task of the POTS port internal / external line test, you can detect whether the POTS
port of the ONU is normal.

11.5.1.1 Viewing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→POTS Port Inter & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane to
view the current POTS port internal / external line test tasks.

498 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.5.1.2 Creating POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click POTS Port Inner & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane or right-click
in the right pane and then select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog
box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.5.1.3 Executing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: 01 499
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The execution of the test task will influence the normal operation of services
and therefore it is recommended to execute the test task when service traffic is at
a relatively low volume.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→POTS Port Inter & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane to
view the current POTS port internal / external line test tasks.

3. Right-click the desired test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
click the task and then click the Execute Now button at the bottom of the tab to
execute the POTS port internal / external line test task.

11.5.2 Managing VOIP PING Tasks

The VoIP PING task can be used to detect the MGC IP address corresponding to the ONU,
helping isolate failures.

11.5.2.1 Viewing Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→VOIP PING Task in the left pane to view the existing VOIP PING
tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

500 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.5.2.2 Creating VOIP PING Tasks

The VOIP PING test is used to check whether the network management system can ping
the IP address of the MGC related to the ONU. This function is used to isolate the fault in
failure detection.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Right-click VOIP PING Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and select
Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required. Table 11-2 describes Parameter Settings on the
Extend information tab. Then, click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Table 11-2 Description of VOIP PING Parameters

Parameter Description

-n Sends the ECHO data packets with the number specified by COUNT

-w The timeout interval, unit: ms

-l Sends the ECHO data packets with the assigned traffic

-i Sets the TTL field to the assigned value

-v Sets the TOS field to the assigned value

-r Assigns the number of routes to be passed through in the Recorded Route field

-s The time stamp of the hop number assigned by the COUNT

-t Pings the specified computer continuously

Version: 01 501
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 11-2 Description of VOIP PING Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description

-a Resolutes the address into the NetBios name of the computer

If the Not-Section flag is transmitted in a packet, this packet will not be sectioned
-f
by the gateways at the route

-j Sets TTL to the given value

-k Uses the computer list assigned by "computer-list" to route the packet

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.5.2.3 Executing VOIP PING Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→VOIP PING Task in the left pane to view the existing VOIP PING
tasks.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the VOIP
PING test task.

11.5.3 Managing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

11.5.3.1 Viewing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

502 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Test Task→HCU Discharge Test Task to view the existing
HCU automatic discharge test tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

u In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

u Right-click any task selected at the previous step and select Test Data.

u View test result:

Version: 01 503
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

504 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.5.3.2 Creating HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Right-click HCU Discharge Test Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane
and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Version: 01 505
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

When the HCU automatic discharge test task does not meet the upgrade requirements or is
expired, you can right-click the task to delete / disable the task, or view / modify the
attribute.

11.5.3.3 Executing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. In the left pane, select Test Task→HCU Discharge Test Task to view the existing
HCU automatic discharge test tasks.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the HCU
automatic discharge test tasks.

11.6 Managing Deployment Tasks

11.6.1 Managing Configuration Script Tasks

11.6.1.1 Viewing Configuration Script Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

506 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select PreConfig Task→Config Script Task to view the existing
configuration script task.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status of the
task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including basic
information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.6.1.2 Creating Configuration Script Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. Right-click Config Script Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and
select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Version: 01 507
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.6.1.3 Executing Configuration Script Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the Policy
Task Management window.

2. In the left pane, select PreConfig Task→Config Script Task to view the existing
configuration script task.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the
configuration script tasks.

11.7 PON Traffic Analysis

The UNM2000 integrates the PON Traffic Tool. For specific operations, see "PON Network
Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Background Information

u The PON traffic analysis supports the independent mode and convergence mode,
which provide the basically consistent functions.

4 Independent mode: Logs into the traffic analysis tool via the browser.

4 Convergence mode: Accesses the traffic analysis tool via the Advanced menu of
the UNM2000.

u The PON Traffic Tool, with visualized data analysis, intelligent warning management,
precise capacity analysis, helps you comprehensively understand the service traffic and
bandwidth usage of the PON network, gather statistics on and analyze traffic growth
trend and resource use efficiency of the PON network and effectively gives early
warnings on capacity expansion, and balances and optimizes network resources so as
to prevent network congestion and guarantee the transfer quality of various services.

508 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Supported Functions

Function Description

u Views the key indicator data of the network, such as the ONU
low optical power report, uplink port optical power anomaly
statistics, ONU low optical power trend chart and total traffic of
Overview the network.
u For specific operations, see Section Viewing the Homepage
Chart in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System
V2R11 Operation Guide".

Topology map u Provides the topology of the entire network, where threshold-
crossing NEs are highlighted and the corresponding information
is provided. In this way, network operators can directly view the
traffic status of the entire network.
u Dynamically displays traffic distribution of each area in a big-
Map screen GIS map. You can zoom in or out a focused area to
GIS map
display its multi-level traffic information. In this way, traffic
status is visualized.
u For specific operations, see Section Viewing the Traffic Map in
"PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11
Operation Guide".

Version: 01 509
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Function Description
Table u Collects statistics on the rate, bandwidth usage, packet loss, and
Trend chart bit error information of OLT uplink ports, OLT PON ports, ONU
Port analysis PON ports, and links of NEs in the entire network, and exports
these reports for the operation and maintenance personnel to
Area analysis
analyze the operation status of the network.
TopN ranking
u Gathers statistics of and analyzes the bandwidth usage and flow
rate trend of the desired NE port over a specified time period.
This function helps you understand the bandwidth usage and
traffic change trend, and analyze the traffic growth point.
u Collects statistics on the peak downlink bandwidth usage of OLT
uplink ports, and OLT PON ports of NEs in the entire network,
and exports these reports for the operation and maintenance
personnel to analyze the operation status of the network.
u Enables you to gather statistics of and analyze the total traffic of
the PON network, bandwidth usage of the PON port, traffic of
Traffic the uplinks and uplink threshold-crossing ratios of an area over a
Analysis specified time period. This function helps you understand the
network resources, bandwidth usage and traffic change trend, and
Adding /
analyze the traffic growth point.
Removing
u Ranks the peak bandwidth usages of the OLT uplink port, OLT
Tokens
PON port and ONU PON port of a specified NE over a specified
time period and lists the objects whose peak bandwidth usages
are in top 10, 50 or 100.
u Supports custom token removing / adding rules. Monitors
performance indicators in the entire network, adds tokens to
threshold-crossing objects, and sends threshold-crossing alarms
via the Socket interface to a third-party. If an object with a
threshold-crossing token resumes normal operations, you can
remove its token.
u For specific operations, see Section Traffic Analysis in "PON
Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11 Operation
Guide".
u Gathers statistics of online ratio of physical resources, and
resource information in the entire network, and outputs analysis
reports.
Resource Analysis
u For specific operations, see Section Network Resource
Analysis in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System
V2R11 Operation Guide".

510 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Function Description
Table u Collects statistics on the following parameters of NEs in the
Trend entire network: Rx and Tx optical power, temperature, bias
Analysis on current, and voltage of OLT uplink ports; Tx optical power,
anomaly temperature, bias current, voltage, and Rx ONU optical power of
OLT PON ports; Rx and Tx optical power, uplink / downlink
optical attenuation, temperature, bias current, and voltage of
ONU PON ports. The module supports exporting these reports
for the operation and maintenance personnel to analyze the health
status of the device.
u Gathers statistics of optical power change trend of the OLT
uplink ports, OLT PON ports, and ONU PON ports in the
Optical
specified area, and exports these reports for the operation and
Power
maintenance personnel to analyze the health status of the device.
Analysis
ONU low u Gathers statistics of Rx weak optical power information of the
optical power OLT uplink ports, OLT PON ports, and ONU PON ports in the
specified area, and exports these reports for the operation and
maintenance personnel to analyze the health status of the device.
u Gathers statistics of the ONU objects with weak optical power in
the entire network, analyzes the causes for ONU weak optical
power, collects the ONU weak optical power information for
each cause and generates a report.
u For specific operations, see Section Optical Power Analysis in
"PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11
Operation Guide".

Threshold- u Provides the latest 15-min performance threshold-crossing

Perfor- crossing current warning / alarm data.
mance alarm u Supports viewing the performance threshold crossing data in the
threshold- specified time period and exporting the corresponding reports.
Threshold-
crossing u For specific operations, see Section Threshold-Crossing
crossing history
alarm Alarm Analysis in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
alarms
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

u Views the OLT device health, card health, ONU health and
anomalies of the OLT core switch card, and outputs reports.
Device health status u For specific operations, see Section Device Health Analysis in
"PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11
Operation Guide".

Version: 01 511
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Function Description
Automatic task u Supports customizing reports. It collects statistics on OLT uplink
15-minute ports, OLT PON ports, and ONU PON ports for NEs in the entire
original data network, and generates traffic analysis reports, optical power
report reports, health reports, and resource reports for the operation and
maintenance personnel to analyze the network operation status.
u Generates the 15-minute original performance data report and
Automatic
exports it to the specified FTP server. If the uploading fails, it
Report
provides the uploading failure records.
Report
u Saves the reports by generation time and archives them based on
archiving date
period time.
u For specific operations, see Section Automatic Report
Management in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Threshold
u Sets thresholds for traffic, optical power and health status.
settings
u Sets the FTP server to save the exported automated reports.
FTP server u Sets the mailbox to send and receive the exported automated
settings reports.
Settings
Mailbox u Sets the system display parameters to display the map.
settings u For specific operations, see Section System Settings in "PON

System Display Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11 Operation

Settings Guide".

Monitoring u Manages second-level traffic monitoring tasks.

tasks u Views second-level traffic reports.
Second-
Reports u Views second-level traffic trend charts.
level traffic
u For specific operations, see Section Second-Level Traffic
monitoring
Trend chart Monitoring in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

11.8 Failure Isolation

The UNM2000 supports the intelligent fault assistant location function to quickly locate the
faulty point, improving the fault isolation efficiency.

Background Information

The UNM2000 supports isolating the failures by the sequence of OLT Status→PON Port
Status→ODN Status→ONU Status. It gives the processing suggestions based on the
failure location and supports exporting failure isolation reports.

512 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.8.1 Managing Failure Detection Templates

11.8.1.1 Viewing Failure Detection Templates

Background Information

u The system includes four default templates: voice service fault detection, IPTV
program interruption, WiFi service fault detection and no Internet access.

u The default templates of the system cannot be deleted or modified.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on the
right of Select Detection Template to view the existing fault detection templates.

11.8.1.2 Creating Failure Detection Templates

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on the
right of Select Detection Template to open the Custom Template dialog box.

5. Click Create to open the Create Fault Detection Template dialog box and set the
template name, type and remark.

Version: 01 513
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6. Click OK after setting.

Note:

u Click Create and continue to create templates in the Create Fault

Detection Template dialog box.

u Click Select Template, and you can copy all settings except Template
Name from other task. This can improve the setting efficiency.

11.8.1.3 Modifying Failure Detection Templates

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on the
right of Select Detection Template to open the Custom Template dialog box.

5. Select a non-default template and click Modify to open the Create Fault Detection
Template dialog box and then set the template name, type and remark.

6. Click OK after setting.

11.8.1.4 Deleting Failure Detection Templates

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

514 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on the
right of Select Detection Template to open the Custom Template dialog box.

5. Select a non-default template and click Delete.

11.8.2 Performing Fault Detection

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the drop-down list of Select
Detection Template to select the detection template.

5. Click Execute.

Related Operation

u After completing the failure detection, view the detection result on the Detection
result tab.

Version: 01 515
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Figure 11-1 Intelligent Fault Assistant Location

u Click Export to export the detection result export of failure intelligent assistant
location.

11.9 Managing Device Users

The following introduces how to create, modify and delete the device users, and how to
assign the authority to the users.

11.9.1 Adding Device Users

You can create the UNM2000 device users and bind them with NEs.

516 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to display

the Console User Management tab.

2. Click to open the Add Console User dialog box.

3. Set the relevant parameters in the Add Console User dialog box according to
Table 11-3.

Table 11-3 Device User Settings

Parameter Description
Required. Sets the user account, which must comply with the account policies. For
User Name
the settings of the account policies, see Setting the Account Policy.

Required. Sets the user password, which must comply with the password policies.
Password
For the settings of the password policies, see Setting the Password Policy.

Confirm
(Required) Enters the password again.
Password
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device user by
Binded NE List
selecting / deselecting the check box.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Click an NE in the left pane and view the device user information of the NE in the right
pane.

Version: 01 517
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.9.2 Modifying Device Users' Passwords

You can modify the passwords of device users on a regular basis to enhance the account
security.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to display

the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Select a device user entry in the right pane and click to display the Modify
Console User Password dialog box.

4. Set the relevant parameters in the Modify Console User Password dialog box
according to Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 Device User Settings

Parameter Description

User Name Indicates the name of the user whose password is to be modified.

Old Password Indicates the old password of the device user.

Required. Sets the new password of the user, which must comply with the
New Password password policies. For the settings of the password policies, see Setting the
Password Policy.

Confirm
Required. Enters the password again.
Password
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device user by
Binded NE List
selecting / deselecting the check box.

5. After the settings are completed, click OK.

11.9.3 Deleting Device Users

You can delete the specified device user or change the NE bound with the device user.

518 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to display

the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Select a device user entry in the right pane and click , or right-click a device user
entry and select Delete Console User from the shortcut menu to open the Delete
Console User dialog box.

4. Set the relevant parameters in the Delete Console User dialog box according to
Table 11-5.

Table 11-5 Device User Settings

Parameter Description
User Name Indicates the name of the user to be deleted.
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device user by
Binded NE List
selecting / deselecting the check box.

5. After completing the settings, click OK.

11.9.4 Enabling / Disabling Device Users

You can enable / disable the specified device user or change the NE bound with the device
user.

Version: 01 519
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to display

the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Select a device user entry in the right pane and click , or right-click a device user
entry and select Enable/Disable Console User from the shortcut menu to open the
Enable/Disable Console User dialog box.

4. Set the relevant parameters in the Enable/Disable Console User dialog box
according to Table 11-6.

Table 11-6 Device User Settings

Parameter Description
User Name Indicates the name of the user to be deleted.
Enable Console
Sets whether to enable this user by selecting / deselecting the check box.
User
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device user by
Binded NE List
selecting / deselecting the check box.

5. After completing the settings, click OK.

520 Version: 01
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.9.5 Reading the Device User Information

The following introduces how to read the user information of the specified device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to display

the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Right-click the device in the left pane and select Read Selected Console User
information from the shortcut menu, or select a device user entry in the right pane
and click .

Operation Result

In the message pane at the lower part of the Console User Management tab, view
whether the device user information is read successfully.

Version: 01 521
12 Application Scenarios

The following introduces the common application scenarios of the UNM2000.

12.1 Alarm Management

Alarm management module performs real-time monitoring on the faults and abnormalities
generated during the equipment operation and provides detailed information and analysis of
the alarm, so as to help users to isolate the faults and handle them quickly.

Background Information

The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the current alarms and the historical alarms
according to the alarm statuses.

u Current alarm: The alarm data saved in the current alarm database of the UNM2000.

The alarm frequently generated by the same object will be displayed as one entry in
the current alarm list, and the frequency column shows the generation times of the
alarm. You can view the alarm log to query all the alarm records.

u Alarm history: the current alarms that have been confirmed and cleared will be added
into the alarm history after a preset period.

The alarm history will be saved into the alarm history database from the current alarm
database. See Setting the Definition of the Alarm History regarding how to set the
delay time for transferring the current alarms to the alarm history.

Alarm Operation Description

The UNM2000 provides abundant alarm management functions. The user can refer to
Table 12-1 and choose the corresponding function to monitor and handle the alarms.

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description

Operation Description Related Function

Sets the alarm parameters, including
Preset alarm alarm sound, alarm automatic For setting the alarm parameters, see Setting Alarm Related
parameters synchronization policy and alarm Parameters.
history definition.

522 Version: 01
 12 Application Scenarios

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function

Sets the maintenance status of the For managing the project status of alarms, see Managing the
managed object. Alarm Project Status.

For viewing the current alarms, see Viewing Current Alarms.

For viewing the alarm history, see Viewing Alarm History.

For viewing reported alarms, see Viewing Reported Alarms.

Monitors the alarms to obtain the
For viewing alarm logs, see Viewing Alarm Logs.
alarm information.
For viewing statistics of alarm logs, see Viewing Alarm Log
Statistics.
For viewing alarm statistics, see Viewing Alarm Statistics.

To obtain accurate alarm information,

synchronize the alarms to make the
For synchronizing alarms, see Synchronizing Alarms.
alarms displayed in the UNM2000
consistent with device alarms.
Monitor alarms
Customizes the alarm names or levels For customizing alarm names, see Re-Defining Alarm Names
according to the maintenance and Customizing Alarm Names.
requirements for convenient
management and efficient alarm For customizing alarm levels, see Customizing Alarm Levels.
monitoring.

To make sure the related staff are For managing remote alarm notification, see Setting Remote
notified timely upon occurrence of Notification of Alarms.
failures, you need to set the alarm For enabling / disabling alarm alert sound, see Setting the
notification mode in advance, Audible Alarms.
including the alarm sound, alarm
For setting the alarm reporting rule, see Setting Alarm Reporting
reporting rules and remote notification
Rules.
rules.
For collecting statistics of device faults, see Gathering Statistics
of Device Failures.

Collects failure information by For viewing the alarm details, see Viewing Alarm Details.
Collect failure
information and viewing alarm details, locating alarms For locating the alarms, see Locating Alarms.
analyze the failure and viewing alarm-related operations For viewing related alarms, see Viewing Related Alarms.
reason and then analyzes the failure reason.
For outputting alarm information, see Exporting the Alarm
Information.
View root / derivative alarms.
Eliminates the failures that trigger the
Eliminate failures alarms according to the related For viewing the alarm details, see Viewing Alarm Details.
manuals and alarm details.

Version: 01 523
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function

After a failure is eliminated, the
corresponding alarms will be cleared
automatically. If the alarms cannot be For clearing the alarms manually, see Clearing Alarms Manually.
cleared automatically, you can remove
them manually.
Handle alarms When the device is maintained, tested For filtering alarms, see Shielding Alarms.
or commissioned, there will be a
relatively great number of reported
For managing alarm shield rules, see Managing Alarm Shielding
alarms. For the unimportant alarms,
Rules.
you can set the alarm shield to shield
the alarms matching the conditions.

When an alarm is confirmed, this

Confirm alarms For confirming alarms, see Confirming Alarms.
alarm is processed.

Confirms and clears alarms at the

Confirm and clear For confirming and clearing alarms, see Confirming and Clearing
same time, and saves the alarm to the
alarms Alarms.
alarm database.
For editing the alarm maintenance experience, see Editing Alarm
Record alarm When the failure is processed, you can
Maintenance Experience.
maintenance record the alarm maintenance
For managing the alarm maintenance experience, see Managing
experience experience to the alarm database.
Maintenance Experience.

Save alarm Saves the alarm history to improve the For managing history data saving, see Managing the Alarm /
history NE running efficiency. Event Data.

12.2 Performance Management

The following introduces performance management function, helping you effectively

understand the service running status in a specified period of time.

Background Information

The performance data include the current performance data, real-time performance data and
performance history data.

u Current performance: Indicates the current 15-minute performance and the

performance of the latest sixteen 15-minute time intervals. The current performance
data are not saved in the database.

524 Version: 01
 12 Application Scenarios

u Real-time Performance: Indicates the performance data collected and displayed in real
time. The collection period can be 10 seconds or 30 seconds; the collection interval
can be 15 minutes, 30 minutes, one hour, or 24 hours. The performance data will not
saved in the database.

u Performance history: Indicates the performance data collected according to the

performance collection task and saved into the database.

Performance Operation Description

The UNM2000 provides abundant performance management functions. You can refer to
Table 12-2 and choose the corresponding performance function to effectively monitor the
running status of the NE service.

Table 12-2 Performance Operation Description

Operation Description Related Function

As there are many performance
indexes with great amount of
performance data, the UNM2000
Enable the NE
disables the performance classification Enables the NE performance classification switch. See
performance
switch of the device by default. Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a Batch
classification
Therefore, you need to enable the Manner
switch
performance classification switch
before querying the NE performance
data.
Collect performance data or monitor
For managing performance collection tasks, see Managing
performance quality through the
Performance Collection Tasks.
performance collection task.

By managing performance indicator

sets, you can quickly set the collection For managing performance indicator set, see Managing
Manage
indicator of the performance collection Performance Indicator Sets.
performance
task.
collection
You can monitor the performance data
by setting the performance threshold.
For managing performance threshold set, see Managing
If the performance data exceeds the
Performance Threshold Sets.
preset threshold value, the threshold
crossing alarm will be generated.

For viewing the current performance, see Viewing Current

Monitoring Obtain performance data by Performance.
Performance Data monitoring performance. For viewing the real-time performance, see Viewing Real-Time
Performance.

Version: 01 525
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 12-2 Performance Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function

For viewing the performance history, see Viewing Performance
History.

For viewing the performance history trend, see Viewing the

Performance History Trend.

For viewing the performance comparison, see Viewing the

Performance Comparison.

Save performance Save the performance history data to

For managing history data saving, see Setting the PAS Saving.
history data improve the NE running efficiency.

12.3 Guaranteeing Device Configuration

To avoid that unexpected events, such as device failure, communication interruption

between the UNM2000 and the device and power failure, influence the service recovery, the
UNM2000 provides some functions for guaranteeing the device configuration.

Backing Up Configuration

u When you need to compare whether the device configuration is the same as that in the
UNM2000 database, you can configure the synchronization operation to view whether
each configuration is the same. If not, you can manually synchronize the device
configuration to the UNM2000 database or synchronize the configuration in the
UNM2000 database to the device. For specific operations, see Configuration
Synchronization.

u To avoid device failures, you can set the execution period as needed so that the device
configuration will be automatically uploaded to the UNM2000 database on a regular
basis. This is convenient for restoring the configuration after the device failure is
eliminated. For specific operations, see Managing Configuration Upload Tasks.

u To avoid that the device and the UNM2000 server become faulty at the same time, you
can set the execution period so that the device configuration will be automatically
exported and saved to another FTP server on a regular basis. This ensures that the
device configuration will not be lost. For specific operations, see Managing
Configuration Export Tasks.

u You can also back up data by the network management tool. For specific operations,
see Importing / Exporting the Configuration File.

526 Version: 01
 12 Application Scenarios

Backing Up Software

To avoid upgrade failure of device software, you can set the execution period as needed so
that the device configuration will be automatically exported and saved to another FTP
server on a regular basis. This is convenient for quickly restoring the device software. For
specific operations, see Managing Software Backup Tasks.

Version: 01 527
 Appendix A Abbreviations

BML Business Management Layer

BMS Business Management System

CORBA Common Object Request Broker Architecture

CPU Central Processing Unit

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCN Data Communication Network
DDN Digital Data Network

EML Element Management Layer

EMS Element Management System

EPON Ethernet Passive Optical Network

GPON Gigabit-Capable Passive Optical Network

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GNE Gate Network Element

GUI Graphic User Interface

IP Internet Protocol
International Telecommunication Union-
ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Sector
NE Network Element
NEL Network Element Level
NML Network Management Layer

NMS Network Management System

OLT Optical Line Terminal

ONT Optical Network Terminal

ONU Optical Network Unit

RMS Resources Management System

SML Service Management Layer

SMS Service Management System

TCP Transfer Control Protocol

TL1 Transaction Language 1

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UPS Uninterrupted Power System

528 Version: 01